Home

OfficeServ DM User Guide - Nycomm Holding Page

1. English Americ Catt Add Delete Upload Delete No Description Lengthisec 0001 Thank you for calling 1 0002 An operator will be with you in a moment 1 0003 Our office hours are 8 AM to 5 PM Monday throu 3 0004 Our office is closed for the holiday 2 0005 Our office is closed due to emergency conditions 7 0006 If you know the extension of the person you are C 3 0007 To reach the sales department press 2 For the S 4 0008 To leave a message in our after hours message 3 0009 Sorry that is not a valid entry Please try again 3 0010 Sorry that is not a valid entry Please try again 0 4 a a a A amp a a Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 20 42 296 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Prompt Recording Studio Prompt Recording Studio Prompt Number Prompt Recording Studio Confirm Language English America Lengthfsec Recorded Description Reload Close Item Description Prompt The number of the Prompt to be recorded or reviewed After Number entering a valid prompt number you will be presented with instructions to record or re record You ma
2. Function Type Description HDSET Headset mode ABAND Checks the information to establish whether the caller abandoned the call before it was answered SLTALM Sets the normal phone alarm VMMEMO Calls the IP UMS and embedded voice mailbox VM Memo VMADM Changes the IP UMS and embedded voice mailbox VM Administration VMAME Auto answer for the IP UMS and embedded voice mailbox VM Auto Answer Emulation VMMSG Checks the IP UMS and embedded voice mailbox messages VM Message CR Records calls to the IP UMS and embedded voice mailbox Call Record RTO Switches the mode Ring Plan Time Override RP Switches the ring mode LOG Searches the latest call sent received Call Log DNDO Ignores the Do not disturb setting DND Override WAKEUP Sets the morning call time Hotel function BILL Bills the room charge Hotel function HOTEL Hotel Hotel function RB Bills the call charge Room Bill Hotel function RSV Displays the room status Room Status View Hotel function CREDIT Checks and changes the charge at which the room is available Hotel function CHIN Check in Hotel function CHOUT Check out Hotel function PTHR Aligns the networking call paths Path Replacement CONP Displays the networking name Connected Name Display SRELOC Exchanges station data Set Relocation SLOCAT Checks the locations of hotel staff Staff Locater Hotel function INFDSP Displays t
3. Description Tx Rx SLT UMS Normal Phone Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP Normal Phone Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK DGP Analog Trunk Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT Analog Trunk Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK Analog Trunk Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK Analog Trunk Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP Analog Trunk Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP Analog Trunk Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi Analog Trunk Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN Analog Trunk Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT Analog Trunk Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS Analog Trunk Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP Analog Trunk Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK DGP Digital Trunk Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT Digital Trunk Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK Digital Trunk Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK Digital Trunk Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP Digital Trunk Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP Digital Trunk Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi Digital Trunk Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN Digital Trunk Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT Digital Trunk Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS Digital Trunk Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP Digital Trunk Tx gt SIP Station Rx
4. Select Conference Member Subscriber Phone v Search Select Phone Name Email No Data Users Found 0 Selected Users 0 Invite Selected L Invite All Attendee List Phone Name Email Ada Select Phone Name Email No Data Delete All_ J L Delete Selected Invited Users 0 1 OK Cancel SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 437 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here lt Sending the invitation gt 1 Le 438 Input the Mail Subject The mail will be sent to conference party 3 Meet Me Conference Invitation Conference Subject Mail Subject test mail After make the conference checked with the Send Invitation you can see the below window After modify the mail contents click the Send button FeS CONFERENCE INVITATION MAIL HSS TITLE test DATE amp TIME 201 0 Apri23 16 15 16 30 PASSWORD 1234 Rant CONFERENCE MEMBERS Total Room Size 3 ICONF ID 11101 MEMBER stroh strah samsung com Name Phone Email istroh 4314 stran samsung com Send Cancel SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Detail If click the Detail button you can see the today list And after select the range by dragging click the Detail button you can see the selected list
5. Port Base Card Base Page Search 8 9 7 By Day of Week Functional 2Configuration O H 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities r 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscribers 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 4 By Call Code 8 9 5 By Hour 8 9 6 By Port Number B 9 7 By Day ee 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen H 9 Conference Refresh Timer sec 15 v Reporting Created Calls Total Count Minutes Port Utilization LAN Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 49 39 Reporting Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the Report Counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Calls The total number of calls that came in on a specific day of the week Total Count The percentage of all calls received on a specific day of the week Minutes The total connect time in minutes of all calls on a specific day of the week Port Utili
6. DND Call Specifies whether to print DND calls Wake Up Call Specifies whether to print station alarms Caller ID Data Specifies whether to print caller ID SMDR Up to 16 characters long Abandon Call Specifies whether to print the information for the calls abandoned by the caller before the answer is received Directory Name Sets the company name to print with the header Number of Dial Mask Sets number of dialed digits not to be printed Incoming Answer Specifies whether to print the times that incoming calls are answered Used to know the answering times Intercom Call SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Specifies whether to print calls between stations 215 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 216 Continued Key MMC In Out Specifies whether the key programming is started or finished ITP Regist Specifies whether to print information when an IP phone is registered Set Relocate Specifies whether to print the information when a phone is relocated Viewing and Changing the SMDR Printing Options Select 5 Features gt 5 6 System I O Options gt 5 6 3 SMDR Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current SMDR option values 3 Change the SMDR option values 4 Save the changes Phone I O Parameter This menu provides IP phone s advance function Phone I O Parameter Items te
7. Conference List lt 2010 09 01 00 00 2010 09 01 23 59 gt Select Card CNF ID Subject Channels Start Time End Time Email Owner C1 S4 001 Conference 2 2010 09 01 01 15 2010 09 01 01 30 No 3316 C1 S4 002 Conf2 3 2010 09 01 08 45 2010 09 01 09 00 No 3316 Detail Cancel En Close lt Detail gt You can see the detail of selected conference lt Cancel gt You can cancel the selected conference And you can send the mail with reason Remark You can run lt Detail Reservation gt lt Cancel Reservation gt about yours SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 439 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 440 History If click the History button you can see the today list And after select the range by dragging click the History button you can see the selected list p Conference History Ea 2010 08 14 00 00 2010 08 14 23 59 gt Select Card CNFID Subject Status Start Time End Time Record C1 83 001 pytest 2 Complete 2010 08 13 22 45 2010 08 14 00 00 No Detail Conference Delete Delete All Close lt Detail Conference gt You can see the detail of selected conference lt View Reason gt You can see the cancel reason of selected conference lt Download Record gt You can download the recording file if have been recorded lt Delete Record gt You can delete the recording file if have
8. Management Language E mailGateway DNS 2 Configuration Domain Name OK 3 Call Routing OK 4 Group amp Table 5 Features Name Server List Delete 6 System Control No Data 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference Name Server Add SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 295 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Voice Studio The Voice Studio is an utility for recording custom prompts To record a prompt with a telephone enter the extension number and press call button wv D Mana File Options Util Tab Help amp D Port Base 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio pt 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference
9. Phone Type Description 14 BTN SET Phone that has fourteen 14 program buttons LARGE SET Large LCD phone 7 BTN LCD Phone that has seven 7 program buttons 0 BTN LCD Phone that has no program button NONE 24 BTN SET Phone that has twenty four 24 program buttons 12 BTN SET Phone that has twelve 12 program buttons 7 BTN SET Phone that has seven 7 program buttons 6 BTN SET Phone that has six 6 program buttons 28 BTN SET Phone that has twenty eight 28 program buttons 18 BTN SET Phone that has eighteen 18 program buttons 8 BTN SET Phone that has eight 8 program buttons 38 BTN SET Phone that has thirty eight 38 program buttons 21 BTN SET Phone that has twenty one 21 program buttons Viewing the Connection Status Select 6 System Control gt 6 2 Port Status gt 6 2 1 Connection Status from the Tree Viewer 2 View the connection status SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide ITP Status Sets various parameters of the IP phone Parameters for the IP Phone Parameter Description IP Address IP address of the IP phone Remote IP Address Private IP address of the IP phone MAC Address Hardware address of the IP phone Phone Version Displays the version of the registered IP phone Signal Port Sets the IP port through which messages are sent and received for calls using the IP phone Voice Port Sets the IP port through which voice packets are sent
10. 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 7 1 Display User Log 8 7 2 Display Error Log 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM 8 7 5 Subscriber Import B 7 6 Backup and Restore 8 7 7 Clear Report Count 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report p 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM 8 7 5 Subscriber Import __8 7 6 Backup and Restore Backup Restore Restore File 4 Mm gt No Data yi Back Up v v v Restore v vi z Z a B aj u LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Clear Report Count This clears all report counters Report counters can be found throughout the OfficeServ System block definitions and on the Status Screen This will not clear the total run time display in System Wide Parameters System File Options Util Tab Help Tele 5 o e a 0 0 eio Port Base Card Base Page Search 4 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM_ 8 7 5 Subscriber Import 8 7 6 Backup and Restore 8 7 7 Clear
11. CID Display Sets the type of the caller ID information to display on the LCD of the digital phone ANI Display Sets the type of the ANI information to display on the LCD of the digital phone CLIP Display Sets the type of the CLIP information to display on the LCD of the digital phone Language Sets the language of the text displayed on the LCD of the digital phone Types of Caller Information No Display Displays no caller information Number First Displays the caller s number Name First Requirements Displays the caller s name After selecting a language the text is displayed in this language Even if you select Korean in a phone which supports Korean text only the program name is displayed in Korean others are displayed in English SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 251 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 252 Viewing and Changing the Type of Caller Information and Display Language Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 3 Station Display from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Station Display 3 Change the Station Display 4 Save the changes Keyset On Off Specifies whether to use a specific function for each station Items to be Specified Item Description Auto Hold Puts the current trunk on hold automatically when another trunk is selected during a trunk call Auto Timer Starts a t
12. Operating Mode 00 Default lw Event MSG LEFT _ Call Director Action Type Gp Target Name NOMSG LEFT ESCAPE GREET DTMF OPERATOR Item Description Operating Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Mode Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given a unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows each Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes using different Targets for the pointers various Mode references For example the No Answer pointer might route callers to an associate s Extension during the Day Mode but after 5 00 PM it would route them to a Mailbox during Night Mode Pointers set in the Default Mode are always in effect unless the same Pointer is set in the current Operating Mode OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 367 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description MSG LEFT This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if t
13. SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 59 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 60 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Using Card Base XY Card Base is enabled in on line mode NOTE Page Search This menu is used to find menu Search by Menu Select by Menu and enter the keyword and click on the Search button The corresponding menu names are displayed on Result s byMenu by MMC If you click move to the page that you are selecting SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 61 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Search by MMC Select by MMC and enter the desired MMC number and click on the Search button The corresponding menu with the MMC number is displayed on Result s byMenu by MMC If you click move to the page that you are selecting 62 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd This page is intentionally left blank 63 OfficeServ DM User Guide CHAPTER 5 Call Server Programming This chapter describes each page function for call server programming in KMCC mode of port base tab Configuration System Configuration System Selection Allows you to select the OfficeServ keyphone system that you want to program System Selection Items Item Description
14. A Y in this parameter and the OfficeServ System will un deliver all unheard copies of a message sent to this list after the first listener saves the message From To Indicates the period from the date when the Report Counters were last cleared till the current date Msgs distributed period specified in the range below The total number of messages distributed to list members during the DELETION OF ALL OTHER UNHEARD COPIES WHEN ONE SAVED BY FIRST LISTENER This will not apply to members of the list that are Network MBX members There is no way to un deliver a message sent to a Network MBX after it has been sent SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 365 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here List Members General List Member Call Director List Members 1 2 3 This page contains a list of the Mailbox Blocks which messages left in this LIST Block will be distributed to These mailbox blocks are referred to as Members Members may include other LIST Blocks thereby creating nested lists A System Administrator using the PC interface must enter the members contained in this list 366 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Call Director List Block TEMPLATE LST General List Member Call Director
15. From To Total calls Operating Mode Caller Script 00 befout 7 Event Caller Script Action Type Gp Target Name MNU 420 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Label Name Label name First prompt The first prompt spoken to the caller Allowable inputs are 1000 9999 Blank indicates say nothing Prompt The system information spoken to the caller can be either the index system date or time the current key value or the value stored in the CID FWDID TRUNK REG 1 etc call session memory registers If the Speak block is used to only speak a salutation to the caller then this field is left blank Last prompt The prompt spoken to the caller after the first prompt and or system information is spoken The allowable inputs are 1000 9999 Blank indicates say nothing From To Indicates the period from the date when the Report Counters were last cleared till the current date Applies to all call counts in this report Total calls Shows the total number of calls this Block has processed during the period specified in the following range SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 421 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Operating Mode Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displ
16. Succeed TAA Port Information 2 6 8 PRI Trunk Data Succeed 2 8 0 Numbering Plan HA LCR Options FA Network Dial Translation IFA Networking Options 3 39 Remote Station Dial Translation Succeed Succeed Succeed Succeed Downloading LAN Station Groups 4 1 2 Trunk Groups 4 2 1 Station Pair NjA ESD ES US US ESD NSN DSU ESS v 3 3 5 Remote Station Dial Translation 12 163 6 When the download is finished the following screen is displayed Click on OK Elapsed Time 00 00 21 Lox SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 29 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Upload DB 30 This menu is used to upload the user PC s database to the key phone system Click on System gt Upload DB The following screen is displayed Open x Look In C Desktop v m T D download odm File Name Files of Type Database File odm v 2 Select a file to display the following login screen 3 Input Password Password OK Cancel On the lt Login gt screen enter the database file s Password to open the file to upload 3 You can select the desired page to download To download all fields click on All Select
17. Function Type Description LISTEN Group listening IG Whether to include the group or not In Out Of Group GRPK Answering by any arbitrary group Group pick up HOLD Hold HLDPK Hold pick up LNR Redial Last Number Redial This can only be specified only if it is not already included in the fixed keys MMPG Announcement forward Meet Me Page MMPA Announcement forward answering Meet Me Page Answer MSG Message This can only be specified only if it is not already included in the fixed keys NEW New trunk call New Call CANMG Message canceling Message Cancel SETMG Leaving a message Set Message W O Ring OHVA Off hook announcement PAGPK Announcement hold answer Pick Up Page Hold PAGE Announcement Page SNR Saved number redial Saved Number Redial SPEED Speed dial SLTMMC Normal phone programming SLT Programming UA Night ring answer PMSG Absence message Status Message WCOS Changes to the service grade of the self station Working COS ALMCLR Clears the alarm BLOCK Locks the off hook announcement OHVA Block REJECT Rejects the off hook announcement OHVA Reject DISALM Clears the DISA alarm DISA Alarm Clear MYGRPK Self group call pick up Pick Up PARK Saves recovers the call Call Park Retrieve ALLCLR Initializes the station settings SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 117 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 118 Continued
18. SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 3 DB Control Upload All Select Selected item s 163 163 Upload Cancel Description Select Status System Selection LAN Parameter Y System Options Cabinet Information Virtual Cabinet Information Port Information PRI Trunk Data Numbering Plan LCR Options Network Dial Translation Networking Options Remote Station Dial Translation Station Groups Trunk Groups Station Pair WLAN Parameter RRR NINI EST PSU SU ES ES ES RRR SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 31 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 4 Select the desired page and click on Upload to initiate uploading To cancel uploading click on Cancel 3 DB Control Upload Group All Select Selected item s 163 163 Upload Cancel Menu Description Select Status Pa Nee 2 1 0 System Selection LAN Parameter Succeed Succeed 2 1 5 2 2 0 2 3 0 System Options Cabinet Information Virtual Cabinet Information Succeed Succeed Succeed 2 4 1 2 6 8 2 8 0 P
19. Function that can z Description be specified AAPLAY AA PLAY This option may not be available in certain OfficeServ models AAREC AA RECORD This option may not be available in certain OfficeServ models AB Absence Presence ABSENCE ABAND Checks the information for whether the caller abandoned the call before answering CID ABANDON ABW Connects disconnects to the group agent for auto call distribution SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 169 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Function that can 7 aa Description be specified ACC Charge Account AG Answer Group Including or excluding in a temporary answer group ALARM Alarm AN RLS Answer release ANSWER RELEASE It can be specified only when it does not exist in the fixed keys BARGE Barge in BARGE IN OVERRIDE BILL Bills the room charge Hotel function BLOCK Locks the off hook announcement OHVA BLOCk BOOK Booking function BOOTH Sets whether to use the booth phone Hotel function BOSS Boss and secretary BOSS AND SECRETARY CAD Displays the call processing status CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY CALL Multi purpose call button CALL BUTTON An extension number specifies a purpose automatically CAG Control Answer Group Making or deleting a temporary answer group CAMP Station reservation STATION CAMP ON CANMG Message canc
20. Sets whether to display video during ringing after a call is received to the video IP phone Disable Enable This option is applicable to the video IP phone only SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Large LCD Option Settings 1 a a 4 Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 12 Large LCD Options from the Tree Viewer View the large LCD option settings Change the large LCD option settings Save the changes Executive State You can view the status of stations specified as a bosses by interoperating with the OfficeServ EasySet This is the program to use when setting the current status of bosses to be displayed And you can set the answer mode for a boss call using the boss secretary function Items to be Specified Item Description State Sets the status of the boss to be displayed when interoperating with EasySet Exec Answer Mode Sets the answer mode when the boss calls the secretary Display 1 When the status of the boss is set to In this option sets the message to be displayed in the EasySet Display 2 When the status of boss is set to Out this option sets the message to be displayed in the EasySet Viewing and Changing the Boss Presence Status 1 2 j 4 Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 13 Executive State from the Tree Viewer View the boss presence status Change the boss
21. System country Select the country Editable IP version Displays the IP version Not editable IP Address Displays the IP address of the SCM server Not editable IP Gateway Displays the gateway address of the SCM server Not editable Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask of the SCM server Not editable WBS Select The system can only interoperate with one type of AP This field displays the AP type used Not editable System Coding SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Specify the coding method of the system E g a law u law Editable 64 OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing the System Selection Items Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 0 System Selection from the Tree Viewer 2 Check the current items selected on the system System Information Displays the system software and hardware information and versions System Information Items Item Description System Type Displays the system type MCP DIP Switch Displays the selection status of the switch on the MCP card MCP EPLD Version Displays the MCP EPLD Erasable Programming Logic Device version installed in the system MCP PCB Version Displays the MCP PCB version installed in the system MODEM EPLD Version Displays the EPLD modem version installed in the system MODEM PCB Version Displays the PCB modem version installed in the system MODEM Exist Displays
22. Mobile WIP Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number WIP Phone Information Station Data Station On Off Customer On Off Data and Preset Forward of the Mobile WIP Use the Prev and Next buttons to move from item to item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Mobile WIP Information 1 88 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 4 Mobile WIP from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the Mobile WIP information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the Mobile WIP information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Standard SIP Phone Displays the standard SIP phone information For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Standard SIP Phone Information 1 KR amp N 5 IP UMS Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 5 Standard SIP Phone from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the standard SIP phone information Change the standard SIP phone information Save the changes Displays the IP UMS information For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the IP UMS Information 1 M A KRN Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 V
23. Disp Spdname When set to On the name instead of the number is displayed when a call is made using the speed dial function CID Review All When the caller ID is received it is saved in the buffer allocated in 2 5 6 DLI D ata When this function is set to On all calls are saved When set to Off a call is saved only if it is not answered Secure OHVA When set to On the off hook voice announcement OHVA is sent to the receiver When set to Off it is sent to the speaker Enblock 2LCD Sets the dial mode of the phone which has the navigation buttons Station No Specifies whether to call the specified station for an incoming trunk Ring or station call When set to On the specified station does not ring although a call is received to it At this time though it does not ring the LED and LCD services function as though it does Feature Tone When set to On a tone other than the dial tone is heard for each of the specific functions enabled Those are the DND All Forward Busy Forward No Answer Forward Follow Me and Station Lock functions Viewing and Changing the Keyset On Off Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 4 Keyset On Off from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Keyset On Off settings Change the Keyset On Off settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 253 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to ap
24. Domain The Domain is used as part of the authentication process between the IVM and the Mail server Based on the Local Domain Name and Domain ID the mail server can validate that it is accepting mail from this Client Mail Servers that are on a local LAN and that do not have Public IP addresses often do not require authentication 390 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description Attempts How many times to do you want the IVM to attempt to deliver the E Mail Message if it fails The Default value is 3 After the last attempt fails the IVM will generate a Failure report e mail and attempt to deliver it to the Report address assigned in System Wide Parameters Retry interval This is how long the IVM will wait between failure attempts before trying to deliver the e mail message again Adjust message retention N is the default setting This means the IVM will leave the original Voice Message as New The Subscriber can than go in and Delete or Save the Voice Message via the telephone interface at any time up to the number of days specified in the Message Retention timer set on page one of the MClass Y means the IVM will follow the Message Retention to use value set below in place of the Message Retention set on page one Message retention to use Sets the number of days to retain the Voice Message as New after it send
25. Repeat To enter a series of consecutive numbers in the selected field You can use to define the intervals Sort To sort tel numbers Add to Bookmarks Add the current page to the bookmark Help Help topics for current page Close To terminate the page window SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 55 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Page Programming example This section introduces the page programming We will use the 2 4 2 Port Common Data to illustrate this procedure Click on System gt Connect Following screen is displayed System File Options Util Tab Help AL De Port Base 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 9 Conference Message Default 165 213 89 72 10 09 16 V4 52 Office Serv 7400 TUSA 2010 10 26 14 15 38 A Data to display the following screen From the menu click on 2 gt 2 4 gt 2 4 2 Port Common OfficeServ Device Mana E System File Options Util Tab Help allal ole D amp e s a PortBase Card Base Page Search _2 4 2 Port Common Data Functional Tel Number Name Made Busy MOH LCRClass Call Priority Dis
26. When the IPP Registration is set to System Password this option sets the password to be used for check IPP Registration Disable New registration is not allowed System Password Checks whether it is the same as the ITP REGIST PSWD of the program 841 when registering a new phone Phone Password Phone Password Checks whether it is the same as the USER PSWD of the program 840 when registering a new phone Soft Key Version Sets the version of the Soft Menu Update Type Selects MMC COMMAND PHONE CONNECT or AUTO TIME etc Update Interval sec Sets the interval with which the IP phone program is changed Update Time When set to AUTO TIME this option sets the start time to change the IP phone program Frame Count Sets the number of buffering when transmitting a voice packet to the network This system performs as many as voice packet buffering set in this item and sends them as one 1 voice packet SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description Jitter Size Sets the reference to control the Jitter buffering operation when converting a voice packet received from the network to a PCM voice TOS Field Sets the TOS Type Of Service field value ITP Codec Nego When connecting a call path between the IP phone and MGI this option sets whether to use the MGI codec or the IP phone codec Parameter Base Sets whether
27. the OfficeServ System will default to hold on a busy condition if the caller makes no input on the first busy SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 341 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 342 Item Continued Description Retry interval in This is the maximum number of seconds from 1 to 99 seconds OfficeServ System waits when a caller elects to hold before re trying the extension No digit hold The prompt that plays during caller hold options By default this prompt is If you would like to hold please stay on the line No digit The prompt that plays during caller hold options By default this continue holding prompt is To continue holding please stay on the line Announce hold interval prompt The prompt that plays during caller hold options By default this is I will try that extension in a moment Announce hold position The system will advise the caller of his position in the hold queue when selecting to hold for a busy extension there are two parameters for this feature 1st The Hold position will be played when the caller first begins to hold 2nd The Hold position will be played each time the OfficeServ System attempts to connect the call Announce hold time The system will advise the caller of the average hold time when selecting to hold for a busy extension if this parameter is set to
28. 1 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 6 DLI Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the DLI settings Change the DLI settings 4 Save the changes 98 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SLI Data Sets the functions related to the ports of the normal phone Items to be Specified CID Phone Sets whether to send CID information to a normal phone when an RCM2 board is installed Loop Open Sets whether or not to supply power to a normal phone for a certain time if it has been used and has switched to standby mode ISDN Service Specifies the ISDN service type Ring Type Specifies the ring type for a normal phone port VMAA Port Specifies whether to use a normal phone port as the port for a voice mailbox or auto attendant port VMAA or normal phone Normal A voice mailbox or auto attendant equipment can be connected to a normal phone port In this case you must specify the type of terminal connected in order to use the service DRMEF Duration Sets the period of time for which the DTMF tone continues 100 100 ms to 9900 ms First Digit Delay Sets the period of time during which the first digit is sent after 100 ms selecting the voice mailbox auto attendant etc 100 to 9900 ms ISDN Service Type Voice Performs the service using a normal phone Fax 3 Performs the service using a phone to which a G3 Fax is connected Audio 3 1
29. 3 When an existing file is selected the following screen is displayed e Overwrite x ee Selected file is already exist Do you want to overwrite rare To download the file as new click on Yes Otherwise click on No to cancel the download Downloading a newly created file When creating and downloading a new file the following screen is displayed 3 Input Password Password Confirm OK On the lt New DB file gt screen create and confirm the database file s Password to create a new file to download 28 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 4 You can select the desired page to download To download all fields click on All Select 5 Select the desired page and click on Download The following screen is displayed and the program initiates downloading To cancel downloading click on Cancel gt DB Control Download System OfficeServ 7100 Country Download Cancel DB File C Documents and Settings Administrator My Documents 7 100 down odm Group All v v All Select Selected item s 163 163 Menu Description Select Status 2 1 0 System Selection Y Succeed 22 LAN Parameter Succeed ee eee Faa ok System Options Succeed Eea T e E O H 2 2 0 Cabinet Information Succeed 2 3 0 Virtual Cabinet Information Succeed
30. 5 1 to the text that you want to appear here The two communication environments for Link Type From the lt Link Setup gt screen select one of the two following methods e Modem Use the PC s modem to connect to the key phone system COM 1 10 We suggest using an external modem for this purpose e LAN Use the PC s LAN to connect to the key phone system You may use a cross over LAN cable to connect directly to the key phone system s LAN port Alternatively you may use a straight LAN cable to connect to the network Entering the system IP The IP address in the OfficeServ DM refers to the system s IP address to which the OfficeServ DM will be connected It can be verified from the MMC 830 ETHERNET PAR field MODEM Options This menu is used to set additional information regarding the communication environment between the OfficeServ DM and the key phone system Setup xs Site List MODEM Options Dial Retry 1 Dial Duration 90 sec Dial Type DTMF gt PULSE Initial Command AT amp F Apply 36 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Refer to the following table to configure the communication environment Dial Retry Set the number of attempts dial counts for the modem connection Dial Duration Set the connection time uptime for the modem connection Dial Type Set the dial type DTMF PULSE Initial Command Se
31. Call Routing Outgoing LCR LCR Options Sets whether to use the LCR function and changes the LCR time parameter values Items to be Specified Item Description LCR Enable Sets whether to use the optimal route selection function LCR Dial Tone When using optimal route selection function this option is used to connect the station dial tone and other dial tones When set to On a continuous sound similar to the trunk dial tone is connected Extra LCR Tone Gives a different dial tone when a Second LCR is operated Next Group Search When using the LCR this option sets the time needed to sec pass to the next trunk group 1 to 250 sec LCR Advance Time When using the LCR this option sets the time before sec selecting the next allowable route when a station is allowed to route advance 1 to 250 sec LCR Inter Digit Time sec When using the LCR this option sets the maximum time between digits 1 to 250 sec Viewing and Changing the LCR Option Settings 1 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 1 LCR Options from the Tree Viewer View the LCR Option settings 3 Change the LCR Option settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 121 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Routing Digits Enter the routing table to be referred to and the digits of the optimal route selection function that analy
32. If the alarm ring is disabled it is still processed that an alarm generated is stored in the alarm buffer or output to the alarm I O port of those phones Definitions of Alarm Keys and Their Alarm Names Alarm Name Definition MJA01 Power On Restart The MCP is restarted as the power is supplied to it MJAO02 Button Restart The MCP is restarted as the button is pressed MJA03 MMC Reset The RAM area is initialized by the PCMMC or KMMC MJA04 MCP Reset The MCP has restarted due to an exception KKK K KKK KKK IKKE KKK de de AKER ARK ke k k ke kk k kk k Alarm Data Reason BUS ERR Bus error ADDR ERR Address error ILLEGAL Wrong opcode ZERO DIVID Divided by zero PRIVILEGE Privilege violation ENDL LOOP Endless loop MJA05 LCP Reset The LCP has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet 1 2 MJA06 PCM Switching Switching control error Alarm Data MCP BASE ESM 1 ESM 2 or ESM 3 MJA08 FAN Out of Order A power fan sensor error has occurred MJAO09 FAN Recovery The power fan sensor error has recovered MJA10 CPU Overload The current CPU load has reached more than 80 MJA11 CPU Overload Rec The current CPU load has dropped below 80 MJA12 FLASH FORMAT Err Formatting is performed in the NAND Flash as an error has occurred during its operation MJA13 Invalid MMC Halt A halt occurs as the system is activated by an unauthorized MMC MJ
33. It may be changed to any indicating other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt success Prompt for By default this prompt is To send your message with normal normal delivery press 1 It may be changed to any other system prompt or delivery you may replace it with a custom prompt Prompt for By default this prompt is To mark your message urgent press 2 It urgent may be changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it delivery with a custom prompt Prompt for By default this prompt is To request a callback press 3 It may be call back changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt Prompt for By default this prompt is Enter the telephone number where you can be phone reached It may be changed to any other system prompt or you may number replace it with a custom prompt Prompt for By default this prompt is Invalid entry invalid entry Try again It may be changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt Prompt for By default this prompt is is now available It may be changed to any user other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt available Prompt prior to transfer By default this prompt is Please hold while connect your call It may be changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt Prompt prior to record By default t
34. OfficeServ DM User Guide SAM ELECTRONICS COPYRIGHT This manual is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd and is protected by copyright No information contained herein may be copied translated transcribed or duplicated for any commercial purposes or disclosed to third parties in any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd TRADEMARKS Adobe is a trademark and Adobe Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated Install Shield is a registered trademark of Install Shield Software Corporation Internet Explorer Microsoft Windows Windows 2000 and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Netscape and Netscape Navigator are registered trademarks of Netscape Communication Corporation in the United States and other countries All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated This manual should be read before the installation and operation and the operator should correctly install and operate the product by using this manual This manual may be changed for the system improvement standardization and other technical reasons without prior notice For further information on the updated manual or have a question for the content of manual contact the address or homepage below Address Document Center 3nd Floor Jeong bo tong sin dong Dong Suwon P O Box 105 416 Maetan 3dong Yeongtong gu
35. SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide n M r E ey LJ H CHAPTER 3 OfficeServ DM General Functions This chapter describes the general management functions of the OfficeServ DM and how to use its menus Screen Layout The main screen of the OfficeServ DM is as displayed below 3 OfficeSery Device Manager System File Options Util Tab Help Tree Viewer Main Frame E Normal None Status Bar None None MEIER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 23 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Below are details of the screen layout Menu Displays all the functions used in the program Toolbar Displays the most commonly used functions Tree Viewer Displays the page tools and the page indexes Main Frame Displays the selected page function on the screen Status Bar Displays information such as online time user DB file name system type locale version date and time OfficeServ DM Toolbar Icons Below are details of the OfficeServ DM toolbar icons 3 Connect To connect with the key phone system As Disconnect To disconnect from the key phone system Link Control To configure the communication environment Download DB To download a database file Upload DB To upload a database file 1 Pa e Open To open a database file Close To close a database file File Control To uploa
36. SIP STN card must be set in the mmc857 Viewing and Changing SIP Terminal Information Select 6 System Control gt 6 2 Port Status gt 6 2 3 SIP Phone Status from the Tree Viewer View the standard SIP terminal information 3 Change the standard SIP terminal information 4 Save the changes 272 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide WIP Status Displays the information for the registered wireless terminals Terminal Information Items Item Description Current Status Displays whether the wireless terminal is registered Located Displays whether the wireless terminal is connected to the current system WLI Number The number of the WLI connected to the WBS24 in service in the area in which the terminal is being used WBS Number The number of the WBS24 in service in the area in which the terminal is being used IP Offset The location of the IP pool in which the IP address assigned to the terminal is located IP Address IP address assigned to the registered terminal MAC Address MAC address of the registered terminal Phone Type Displays the phone type of the wireless terminal Viewing the Wireless Terminal Information Select 6 System Control gt 6 2 Port Status gt 6 2 5 WIP Status from the Tree Viewer 2 View the wireless terminal information System Resource Displays the system resource DTMFR Display CID Display R2EMFC Displ
37. Select the Time Zone from the list associated with where the IVM will be installed The default Time Zone is Eastern Standard Time DAYLIGHT SAVINGS Honor Daylight Savings in E Mail Date stamp The Default is Y 294 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide aaa GGA LA B B S Gi B e PortBase Card Base Page Search 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 SubscriberList _8 5 System Parameters _ Functional General Management Language E mail Gateway DNS 2 Configuration SMTP Server 3 Call Routing Host ID 4 Group amp Table 5 Features Bot ia 6 System Control SMTP User ID 8 VMAA Password 8 1 Open Block Table Domain 8 2 Save Application Report 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Reply To TimeZone Daylight Saving Yes 8 7 Operating Utilities License Key 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference alaja a x a e a e lel eu hessas 2010 11 14 PMS DNS Enter the domain name server address that the system refers to You have to enter this information to use domain name for SMTP server of Email gateway instead of IP address File Options Util Tab Help
38. Y There are two parameters for this feature 1 The Estimated hold time will be played when the caller first begins to hold 2 The Estimated hold time will be played each time the OfficeServ System attempts to connect the call SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide OutCall EClass Block TEMPLATE ECL General Prompts Hold Controls I OutCall Call Director Outcall Authorizations OnOff Station Block Selection On premise Off premise Long distance 3 Item Description On premise Set to Y to allow the subscriber to make on premise Outcalls The On Premise Station Type Station type to use for on premise out calls If left blank IVM will automatically select a Station type Off premise Set to Y to allow the subscriber to make local Outcalls The Off Premise Station Type Station type to use for off premise out calls Leave blank for auto select Long distance Set to Y to allow subscriber to make long distance Outcalls The Long Distance Station Type Station type to use for long distance out calls Leave blank for auto select Excepted Area Codes These 10 spaces are used to specify area codes subscribers may not call Use these settings to restrict toll calls such as calls to 900 numbers SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 343 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that
39. gt 2 5 3 Customer On Off Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Customer function settings Change the Customer function settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 95 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Preset Forward Sets the Preset Forward settings Items to be Specified Item Description Forward Port Sets the station to which the call is forwarded when a station for which no answer forwarding is enabled does not answer the incoming call Forward Option Sets whether to use no answer forwarding Forward Override If call forwarding is enabled in the station that must ring when a Call is received this option sets whether to ignore its call forwarding setting and received the call if the station option of the calling station is set to On No Answer Forward Delay For no answer forwarding this option sets the period of time after which it is decided that a call has not answered 0 to 250 sec External Forward Delay Sets the period of time for which the station enabling the forwarding rings before the call is forwarded 1 to 250 sec CC Ring Delay If the called station does not answer within the set time the station with the CC button corresponding to the station called is also called However this service is not provided for group incoming calls 0 to 250 sec Viewing and Changing the Preset Forw
40. 202 203 Range Select items with range All Select all items Use Toolbar This menu is selecting display Toolbar option SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 41 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Util Menu The Util menu consists of Package Update File Control DB Import Export DB Comparison Conversion ti Package Update File Control DB Import DB Export DB Comparison DB Conversion Package Update Select Package Update Select Package Update in Menu tab of OfficeServ DM GUI Conference 24 Card Package Update Card 1 C1 3 Package Information Update Information Card IP Address 165 213 89 72 Current Version W100 Disk Total 104857600 Kb Disk Used 53882880 Kbyt Disk Free 50974720 Kbyt Select File Update File m C Select The corresponding firmware s version Select the file to update Click and assign the file to update If the file is selected firmware version will be displayed in File Information Conference 24 Card Package Update Card 1 C1 3 Package Information Update Information Card IP Address 165 213 89 72 Current Version 100 Disk Total 104857600 Kb Disk Used 53882880 Kbyt Disk Free 50974720 Koy Select File Update Fie D icnf_v100 tar amy v Select v Restart
41. CID Trunk Sets whether the analog trunk provides caller ID or not Tone Check For an analog trunk this field sets whether to use the function to check the BUSY tone and cut the trunk if detected This is applied only when the Loop Trunk Tone Disconnect in 2 1 5 System Options is enabled Connect Delay 100 ms When sending a call using an analog trunk this field sets the waiting time until the call path is connected 0 to 2500 ms Requirements The caller ID for the trunk must be provided by the phone service vendor e Before setting the caller ID display options check whether the RCM option card or the RCM2 option card is installed Viewing and Changing the Loop Trunk Data Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 5 Loop Trunk Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the loop trunk data 3 Change the loop trunk data 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 107 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 108 Universal Trunk Data Sets the hybrid trunk type and the leased line DID trunk signaling type Items to be Specified Hybrid Trunk Mode Sets the E amp M DID and R D service type for each trunk of the Hybrid Trunk card Trunk Signal Sets the signal type for each E amp M trunk Requirements The Analog E amp M DID Trunk card must be installed If there is no E amp M trunk No Data will be displayed S
42. Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 1 Trunk Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the trunk settings SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 3 Change the trunk CO number trunk dial type night group by trunk and trunk time parameter values 4 Save the changes Trunk On Off Sets the trunk type and whether to use specific functions for each trunk Items to be Specified Item Description CO PBX Line Sets the trunk type for each trunk i e whether it is a normal trunk or a PBX station Co Line Normal trunk PBX Line PBX station Abandon Call If an incoming call is not connected because the caller replaced the receiver when the call was not answered this field sets whether to save the information for this call 1A2 Emulate Sets whether to use the truck call interrupting function Incoming DND Sets whether to use the truck Do Not Disturb DND function Trunk Forward Sets whether to use the truck call forwarding function E Forward CLI When performing external trunk forwarding this field sets whether to use the station caller ID Repeat CLI When performing external trunk forwarding this field sets whether to use the CID of the called trunk or the CID of the trunk used for the forwarding as the CID information Tandem CLI For a trunk tandem call this field sets whether to put 0 in front of the received caller ID Coloring As To use coloring instead
43. Copyright C 2009 SEC All rights reserved Lox SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 53 OfficeServ DM User Guide op aw ira CHAPTER 4 Using Page Screen This chapter gives an introduction to the page screen which can be set up from within the OfficeServ DM Examples of page programming are also provided Page Screen You can modify the MMC settings from the page screen Below is an example taken from page 2 1 0 2 1 0 System Selection Item Value System Country USA IP Version IPv4 IP Address 165 213 89 72 Gateway 165 213 89 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 WBS Select Dual al 2 a gt el x el e le amp a SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 54 OfficeServ DM User Guide Page Screen Icon Below are details of the page screen icon Icon Details mi Save To save to a file in off line mode or to upload a file in on line mode Reload To refresh a page Print To display a preview of the page to print Click on Print from the preview screen to print Previous To move to the previous page Next To move to the next page Copy To copy the selected text from a field Cut To cut the selected text from a field Paste To paste the previously cut copied text to another field You cannot paste if the data on the clipboard and the target field are of different data type Search To search within a field
44. Description Number Supervision Station Type Activity From To Calls Answered No Answered BUSY Count FBUSY Count ERROR Count Item Description Prompt The number of the prompt spoken to the caller before executing the specified dialing operation Allowable inputs are 0001 9999 Blank indicates say nothing for prompts numbers above 0999 Number This is the DTMF string required for dialing the telephone or extension number Valid dialing characters are 1234567890 abcd amp W You can also enter OfficeServ System registers containing numeric data When using Register information as part of a dialing sequence the register character is always preceded by a sign Supervision This is how the call is handled when transferred Press ENTER for the following pick list options NONE This is a blind transfer A blind transfer indicates that once the call is transferred the system no longer monitors the call for any subsequent condition PARTIAL This is used when the call is transferred and the system checks to identify if that line is busy FULL This is used when the call is transferred and the system stays on the line to make sure the call was answered or not answered NO ANSWER SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 327 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Cont
45. Detect must be set to 0 0 to 2500 ms Ring Detect 10 ms Sets the trunk ringing detection time 10 to 2500 ms Wink Start 10 ms Sets the time to keep up the WINK signal on an E amp M trunk 100 to 300 ms MF DP Interval 100 ms 104 Sets the interval between digits in pulse dialing 100 to 9900 ms SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Requirements e If the opposite party s trunk exchange is S1240 the Co SuperVision Timer must be set to 300ms and the Ring Detect to 50 sec e If the opposite party s trunk exchange is TDX 10 the Ring Detect must be set to 50 sec Viewing and Changing the Trunk Time Parameter Values Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 3 Trunk Timer from the Tree Viewer 2 View the trunk time parameter values 3 Change the trunk time parameter values 4 Save the changes Digits Translation Sets the functions related to a leased line or DID trunk Items to be Specified Item Description ENM Translate When a call is received by a leased line or Direct Inward Dialing DID trunk this field specifies the receiving type Receive Digit If the receiving type is selected as Follow Trunk Ring this field sets the count for the received digits where the receiving service is to be performed Insert Digit SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the digit to insert into the received number
46. OUTBAND 189 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 190 Parameter Continued Description TOS DiffServ Consists of eight 8 bits This option sets the priority to be used in a router or switch on the external networks If the network does not support this this option must be set to the default value T38 Retry Count Sets the retry count in the T38 Redundancy Field T38 G711 Sets whether to apply the T38 if the exit codec of the MGI is G 711 MGI 16 MGI 64 Parameter Parameter Description Echo Cancel The Echo Cancellation is the function to remove echo generated by reflection of voice on the Packet Delay and PSTN This option sets whether to use this function Silence Suppression The Silence Suppression is the function that detects silence during talking and does not transmit those voice packets This option sets whether to use this function Input Filter Sets whether to perform the DSP Input Filtering Input Gain Inputs the call receptivity of the PCM voice that enters the DSP 31 31 Db Voice Volume Sets the volume used when converting voice packets to a PCM voice 31 31 Db Frame Count Selects the audio codec of the MGI card and sets the transmission interval time for VoIP packets Jitter Option Factor Sets the reference to control the Jitter buffering operation when converting voice packets r
47. Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 15 Emergency Dial from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Emergency Dial settings Change the Emergency Dial settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 263 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here System Control l Alarm Report 264 Alarm History Displays the alarms of the system and sets the types of alarms for which the system alarm ring is ringed Alarms are stored in the alarm buffer There are fifty 50 major alarm buffers and fifty 50 additional alarm buffers They follow the First In First Out rule The Remove option allows the current existing alarms to be removed from the alarm memory An alarm is outputted to an alarm port automatically If an alarm buffer is emptied a new alarm enters it If the alarm ring is enabled the system searches all digital phones and rings the alarm ring of those phones in which the system button is assigned If the alarm ring is disabled it is still processed The alarm generated is stored in the alarm buffer or output to the alarm I O port of those phones Definitions of Alarm ID ID Alarm Name Description MJA MCP Error System Error MJA01 POR Restart The MCP restarts when the power is supplied to it MJA02 Soft Restart The MCP restarts as the button is pressed MJA03 MEM Reset The RAM area is initialized by the PCMMC or KMMC MJA04 Wa
48. Specifies the user id registered in mail server Mail Server Password Specifies the user password registered in mail server Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 1 Conference Options from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system CNF 24 Card Configuration Provides information of the CNF24 card s in the system System Selection Items Item Description Max License Displays the total number of conference channels allowed by system Free License Displays the total number of conference channels that can be used by system SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Card Displays the index of CNF24 Card Cabinet Displays the cabinet number of CNF24 Card Slot Displays the slot number of CNF24 Card Conference License Displays the used number of conference channels by Assign CNF24 Card MeetMe Channel Specifies MeetMe Channel for the CNF24 card Version Specifies CNF24 IP version lpv4 lpv6 EPLD Version Displays the CNF24 EPLD Erasable Programming Logic Device version installed in the system PCB Version Displays the CNF24 PCB version installed in the system IP Address Specifies the IP address for the CNF24 card Mac Address Specifies the MAC address for the CNF24 card Card Status Displays the current status of
49. Suwon si Gyeonggi do Korea 442 600 Homepage http www samsungdocs com 2010 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved OfficeServ DM User Guide Overview i Purpose This Guide contains the introduction installation instructions and user guide for the OfficeServ DM a PC version MMC Man Machine Communication program designed to configure and set the OfficeServ key phone system s environment Document Content and Organization This Guide comprises eight Chapters and a list of abbreviations as follows CHAPTER 1 Introduction In this chapter we give a brief introduction to the OfficeServ DM and its core functionalities CHAPTER 2 Launching the OfficeServ DM In this chapter we discuss the installation environment and explain how to launch the OfficeServ DM CHAPTER 3 OfficeServ DM General Functions In this chapter we provide information for the OfficeServ DM menus in detail CHAPTER 4 Using Page Screen In this chapter we give an introduction to the page screens which can be set up from within the OfficeServ DM Examples of page programming are also provided SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 3 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here CHAPTER 5 Call Server Programming In this chapter we describe the call server programming procedure with OfficeServ DM CHAPTER 6 Voice Mail Programming In this chapter we describe the voice mail pro
50. SvMi Options C Connect User Profile EJ Cabinet Configuration 4 Virtual Cabinet C Port Configuration o c Station Port Configuration EI Trunk Port Configuration c Virtual Port Configuration C Numbering Plan Call Routing J Outgoing LCR Incoming o cJ Networking Group Table o cI Grouping o J Station Pairing J Ring Plan System Selection Allows you to select the OfficeServ keyphone system that you want to program System Selection Items iP veson Deveye me P veson oreraa IP Gateway Displays the gateway address of the SCM server Not editable Displays the subnet mask of the SCM server Not editable WES Select The system can only interoperate with one type of AP This field displays the AP type used Not editable System Coding Specify the coding method of the system E g alaw u aw Editable Viewing the System Selection Items 1 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 0 System Selection from the Tree Viewer 2 Check the current items selected on the system SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l About program This menu displays additional information such as the OfficeServ DM program s version copyright policy permission and date Click on Help gt About program to display the following screen Office Serv Device Manager V1 01 2010 09 13 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd
51. Universal Answer Device In special cases such as Night mode the user can forward a call dialed to a subscriber other than himself using the UA code This option specifies the subscriber whose dialed call the user can forward to himself Below are the possible calling targets NONE NO UA When there is no phone number STATION When the target is a station number STN GROUP When the target is a station group number RING PAGE When the target is an external speaker number COMMON BELL When the target is a common bell number Ring Back Message Group Barge in override Type Sets the method to barge in override a call Below are the types of barge in override No barge In No barge in override is allowed With Tone A barge in override is started by sending a warning tone to the subscriber Without Tone A barge in override is started without sending a warning tone to the subscriber MMS SIP Trunk Group Set the SIP trunk group number for the MMS service Operator Group Sets a station group which operates as the attendant DISA Alarm Ringing 232 Selects the subscriber to whom the DISA alarm is alerted when it is received You should have the DISA alarm attached to a station and specify a station for each ring mode SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Wake up Announcement Specifies whether to play the announcement recorded in the auto attendan
52. XML SERVER URL Specifies the server url for the XML LDAP SERVER URL Specifies the server url for the LDAP LDAP BASE DN Specifies the LDAP Base Domain name LDAP AUTH ID Specifies the ID for the LDAP authentication LDAP AUTH PW Specifies the Password for the LDAP authentication SNMP TRAP SERVER Specifies the server url for the SNMP Trap SNMP S G SERVER Specifies the set get server url for the SNMP SNMP COMMUNITY Specifies community name for the SNMP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Phone I O Parameter Select 5 Features gt 5 6 System I O Options gt 5 6 4 Phone I O Parameter from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Phone I O Parameter values Change the Phone I O Parameter values 4 Save the changes System Tone Ring Tone Cadence Changes the tone cadence of the system There are 14 different tones You can set continuous and interrupt tones for each type Except for message wait dial tone and trunk dial tone all tone types are of interrupt tone The tone sound heard continuously without interrupting like toot is called continuous tone The tone sound heard interrupted like toot toot toot is called interrupt tone unit ms The trunk busy tone trunk ringback tone and trunk dial tone are not provided by the system They are the same ton
53. gt 5 8 Diagnostics gt 5 8 1 Alarm Ring from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current alarm key settings View the alarm key settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Maintenance Busy This function can make a station trunk and common resource busy When made busy a station operates as if it is in Halt state and Made Busy is displayed at the caller station Moreover this function can engage not only a station or trunk but also an external broadcasting port AA port and the DSPs that receive STMFR R2MFCM and CID Those DSPs are set to Busy or Idle per chip Status Items Item Description MFR The DSP that receives DTMF CID The DSP that receives CID R2 The DSP that receives R2MFC Conf Group The DSP for conference Viewing and Changing the Maintenance Busy Settings 1 A MeN 5 Select 5 Features gt 5 8 Diagnostics gt 5 8 2 Maintenance Busy from the Tree Viewer Select a status item MFR CID R2 Conf Group tab View the current Maintenance Busy settings Change the Maintenance Busy settings Save the changes Diagnostic Time Sets the system diagnostics time for each day of the week Viewing and Changing the Diagnostic Time 1 Le Select 5 Features gt 5 8 Diagnostics gt 5 8 3 Diagnostic Time from the Tree Viewer View the current Diagnostic Time values SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 225 Error Use th
54. or confirm their response Error prompt This prompt is played if a system error occurs The most common error condition is that the message storage disk is full Example Sorry The message storage unit is full Please hold the line for assistance Invalid This prompt is played to the caller when an invalid DTMF entry is prompt made Repeat The number of times to repeat the query prompt if the caller does Query not begin speaking 0 9 Repeat exit The number of times to repeat the Exit Prompt if no DTMF has been dialed 0 9 Auto replay Set this parameter to Y to immediately play back the caller response Otherwise set to N Last query If set to Y a new message will be created for any subsequent queries during this call session If this is set to N the responses to any additional queries will be appended to the message created during this call session Header This prompt is used when the message is being played back It is prompt followed immediately by the caller s recorded response Valid entries are 1000 9999 with blank indicating say nothing Mailbox The mailbox to which this response should be sent If the same mailbox was previously specified by another QUERY Block during the same call session and the parameter Last Query was set to N in the previous Query Block the voice response to the current query will be appended to the same voice message forming a com
55. should be configured Viewing and Changing LCR GW Route 1 3 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 7 LCR GW Route from the Tree Viewer View the additional optimal route selection settings Change the value of LCR GW Route table according to Gateway of each index Save the changes Incoming Trunk Ringing Sets the subscriber to ring when a call is received from a trunk This function allows a trunk call to ring in a station or station group by ring mode Viewing and Changing the Trunk Ring Receiving Settings 1 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing from the Tree Viewer View the stations station groups by ring mode Change the stations station groups by ring mode Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 127 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Trunk DISA Auto Answer Sets whether to perform DISA service and DISA time parameters for each trunk This function also sets whether to use Auto Answer for each trunk If Auto Answer is set to On you should set the sound source to be heard when using Auto Answer for a trunk Items to be Specified Item Description DISA Service Of Sets whether to perform DISA service for each ring mode of Ring Plan a trunk Trunk Answer Time When receiving DISA it will be answered after the time set in this option has elapsed Alternatively if there is a tr
56. the combined KEY value may be used by another MENU to search for an Extension Mailbox or Announcement 396 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued If N is specified the previous KEY is cleared and replaced by the new value Store key value in Store the resulting KEY from the menu search in the CID FwdlD or TRUNK call session memory register for use as input to subsequent MENU operations To change this value press ENTER to bring up a pick list of appropriate values Highlight and select one N NOTE Digit Assignment Administration and Escape digits should never be set to the same value Menu Input Processor Menu Block TEMPLATE MNU Menu Input Processor Activity Operating Mode oo Derat e No Menu Input Processor Action Type Goto Goto Goto BYE BYE DIR SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Gp Target name 397 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Description Operating Mode Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given a unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are c
57. 0 to 7 802 1 VLAN ID Sets the 802 1Q VLAN The Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is the function to group similar devices into workgroups and perform the switching processing according to the LAN operation policy regardless of the location of user s device 0 to 4095 802 1Q Service Sets whether to use the 802 1Q EC Gain Sets the EC GAIN value 18 38 NLP Sets the NLP value 0 1 2 Echo Tail Length ms Sets the echo tail length 8 to 128 Jitter Delay Time Sets the jitter delay time 0 to 500 Jitter Period Sets the jitter period 1 to 10 Dual Filter EC Option Sets the dual filter option SRTP Enable SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets whether to use SRTP protocol on the whole system 191 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 192 Viewing and Changing the MGI Parameter Values Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 9 MGI Parameter from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current MGI parameter values 3 Change the MGI parameter values 4 Save the changes System IP Options This menu provides various proprietary Samsung VoIP and IP integration options The options set in this menu apply system wide System IP Option Items Item Description Phone TFTP Address Sets the IP address to be connected to when upgrading the program of the IP phone IPP Password
58. 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 30 56 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Display Error Log This is a log of all system errors and other information including startup and System Daily Maintenance The information supplied in this log includes OfficeServ System breeding mailbox lost message file recovered OfficeServ System shutting down and other system information During system maintenance this log will be truncated Only the most recent 150 KB will be kept System File Options Util Tab Help a 0 6 e a 0 o e a PortBase Card Base Page Search H 8 7 1 Display User Log _ 8 7 2 Display Error Log Functional Down 2 Configuration NOTICE Tue Sep 7 3 00 13 2010 a 3 Call Routing System maintainance complete 4 Group amp Table NOTICE Wed Sep 8 2 59 59 2010 5 Features Daily system maintainance 6 System Control NOTICE Wed Sep 8 3 00 10 2010 EUA System maintainance complete 8 1 0pen Block Tabl pnt pane NOTICE Thu Sep 9 2 59 58 2010 8 3 Schedule Table Daily system maintainance 8 4 Subscriber List NOTICE Thu Sep 9 3 00 08 2010 8 5 System Parameters System maintainance complete 8 6 Voice Studio NOTICE Fri Sep 10 2 59 59 2010 8 7 Operating Utilities Daily system maintainance 8 7 1 Display User Log tities NOTICE Fri Sep 10 3 00 05 2010 8 7 2 Display Error Log eas 8 7 3 Activity Log System maintainance complete
59. 2 H 323 trunks 2 SIP trunks 2 Samsung SIP phones 2 3rd Party SIP phones 2 Samsung SIP applications Viewing the License Key Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 4 License Key from the Tree Viewer 2 Check the current license key System Options Sets other system options System Option Items Hotel State Sets whether to use the hotel function Technician Password Changes the password to enter when programming the Technician System The password consists of four 4 digits from 0 to 9 Country Code SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the country code for the city where the system is installed The country code and area code are required when using the CTI function 69 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 70 Item Continued Description Area Code Sets the area code for the city where the system is installed The country code and area code are needed when using the CTI function Carrier Code 718 CARRIER Daily Save DB Saves the system database SYSDB to a smart media card MMC card or copies the database MCDB saved ona smart media card MMC card to the system database The system database can be saved to a smart media card MMC card automatically or manually during operation Each day at the Daily Save Time the database is automatically saved to a smart media card MMC card unles
60. 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application Both Ext and Mbx blocks 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 7 1 Display User Log 8 7 2 Display Error Log 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM B 7 5 Subscriber Import 8 7 6 Backup and Restore 8 7 7 Clear Report Count 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report a 163 a N D Network Mailbox blocks Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 37 48 Select Group Select the Group Number the subscribers will be listed under Group Numbers are convenient for organizing large sets of subscribers into specific groups In special cases e g multiple tenants sharing a switch or when OfficeServ System is connected to more than one switch it is necessary to partition subscribers extensions and mailboxes In such cases several subscribers may have the same Extension or Mailbox Number or the tenants may wish to restrict transfers between the different groups Because OfficeServ System does not allow the same Extension or Mailbox Number to be used more than once in a Group and only allows transfers between members of the same Group it is recommended that all subscribers use Group 01 Values from 01 to 99 are valid entries 2 Select the txt file to import The file name can be any text file
61. 8 7 4 ShutDownVM na NOTICE Sat Sep 11 3 00 00 2010 8 7 5 Subscriber Import Daily system maintainance She AdHno NOTICE Sat Sep 11 3 00 15 2010 8 7 7 Clear Report Count 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report I 2 amp a N oan n X System maintainance complete i Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 35 09 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 299 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 300 Activity Log This screen provides a log of all of OfficeServ System activities These include changing to another mode OfficeServ System hanging up new call and call data or searching on caller ID or entry Everything OfficeServ System does is logged here Usually this will only be used under direction of Samsung Technical Support During system maintenance this log will be truncated Only the most recent 150 KB will be kept a a 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 7 1 Display User Log 8 7 2 Display Error Log B 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 0 MWI Service shutting down 0 Voice port 2 terminating 0 Voice port 4 terminating 0 Voice port 1 terminating 8 7 5 Subscriber Import 0 SMTP Manager shutting down i 5 ae cain 0 Smtp process sh
62. AOM is not applicable SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 145 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 146 Viewing and Changing the AOM Master Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 2 Station Pairing gt 4 2 3 AOM Master from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current AOM Master settings 3 Sets the phone number of the add on module and whether to give an off hook announcement for the station number you want to set as the master 4 Save the changes Ring Group Pair Up to five stations shall be able to be assigned to a ring group When a master station is ringing the member stations of its ring group shall also be ringing simultaneously If a master station cannot be ringing because the forward DND or Lock function etc is enabled its member stations shall also not be ringing However if the master station is unplugged its member stations shall be ringing If an off hook ring occurs a master station due to a camp on call which came in while it was busy its member stations shall also be ringing If no off hook ring is ringing they shall not be ringing either If the forward all DND or Lock function is enabled in a member station it shall not be ringing However if the forward busy or no answer function is enabled this setting shall be ignored When a master or one of its member stations answers a call other rings shall be cleared Viewing and Changing th
63. Answer Disconnect PBX Hold Control Strings Hold Retrieve Call Transfer DTMF Strings Transfer Connect Reject No answer 1 amp amp Phone System Interface Initiate Abort Setup Tear down amp amp amp SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 409 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 410 Item Description Port logon do not use The digit s dialed to initiate or maintain communications with the phone system The Port Logon feature instructs OfficeServ System to pick up the phone and dial the indicated string When starting or if no calls come in for one hour the system assumes it s not connected and checks A comma tells OfficeServ System to go off hook for one second a semicolon places the line off hook and tests for dial tone If the logon fails another attempt will be made in five minutes It is not necessary to reset either the PBX or OfficeServ System in order to reinitialize the link The system is informed if a port is working or if it even exists The setting may be left blank except on electronic sets The comma is recommended The Port Logon dial string is required in true ACD installations Answer do The digits for the system to dial upon answering an incoming call if not use applicable Disconnect The digits for the system to dial upon ending a call if appli
64. Blocks specify the voice prompts and operating parameters to be used when transferring calls to Extension Blocks and what to do in the event of a failed transfer ring no answer or busy It authorizes subscribers to make Outcalls and allows their callers to have them paged via Overhead Paging There is no limit to the number of Extension Blocks the ECLASS Block may be associated with The Operating Modes in the CallDirector section of the ECLASS Block provide the flexibility to handle calls differently for various modes of operation typically at different times of the day The CallDirector uses Event Pointers to pass control of the caller EClass Block TEMPLATE ECL General Prompts Hold Controls OutCall Call Director General YMS Group Label Name TEMPLATE ECL Extension Retention 0 Caller Input Controls Wait for entry Retries on invalid entry Repeat on no entry System Caller Option Prompt Digit NoAnsr Busy FBusy Block Error Other Number Description Yes Yes Leave a message Description Yes Description No Hold T Description Overhead page Description Other options Description Operator Description Escape Description 336 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide General Item Description VMS Group VMS group Label Name The first parameter is the Bl
65. Card Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number Loop Trunk Trunk Data Trunk On Off and Trunk Timer of the Analog Trunk cards Use the Prev and Next buttons to move to any item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Analog Trunk Card Configuration 1 A 3 4 5 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 7 Analog Trunk Card from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the Analog Trunk card information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the Analog Trunk card information Save the changes Universal Trunk Card Displays the Universal Trunk card information Viewing and Changing the Universal Trunk Card Configuration 1 M KR amp N Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 8 Universal Trunk Card from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the Universal Trunk card information Change the Universal Trunk card information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide BRI Card Displays the BRI card information Viewing and Changing the BRI Card Configuration Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 9 BRI Card from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the Cabinet Slot 3 View the BRI card information 4 Change the BRI card information 5 Sa
66. Channel 2 Max Channel 3 Maximum number of channels on the new card Dip Switch Dip switch information for the new card Option Board Option board information for the new card ELPD Version ELPD version information for new card PCB Version PCB version information for new card Viewing the Cabinet Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 0 Cabinet Info from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Cabinet information SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide LCP Card Specifies the mode of each DSP in the CRM board and specifies a relay service for each MISC port D Board The CRM board has two 2 DSPs Each DSP can operate in DTMFR R2MFC or CID modes This D Board tab is used to specify the modes for these two DSPs If the CRM board is not installed NO CRM is displayed If installed the version of the Erasable Programming Logic Device EPLD which is the hardware installed in the system is displayed This version cannot be modified Since the CRM board can only be used in the OfficeServ 7400 Gateway this tab is not displayed for other gateways NOTE Requirements for the D Board The CRM board must be installed in the LP40 card MISC Specifies a relay service for each MISC port External Page Common bell Loud bell or NOT USED can be selected as the relay service This setting is only available in
67. EClass block associated with it OfficeServ System will not present the caller the option to leave a message in the event of a busy or no answer for this extension OPTIONS This pointer is reached because the EClass page 1 of 5 assigned a specific digit to options and allowed the feature for at least one call condition The extension block page 3 of 5 will then show that Other Options has been assigned to that digit On this Call Director page you may assign any destination to this options pointer This is used if a subscriber wants to offer callers the option to press a certain digit to route to an audiotext system list of departments to transfer to or any other condition that may be programmed in the OfficeServ System OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated Target Block It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this OPERATOR This pointer is reached because the EClass page 1 of 5 assigned a specific digit to operator and allowed the feature for at least one call condition The extension block page 3 of 5 will then show that Operator has been assigned to that digit On this call director page you may assign any destination to this operator pointer OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this ESCAPE This pointer is reached because the EClass page 1 of 5 assigned a specific digit to escape and
68. Function that can be specified Function that can be Description specified AAPLAY AA PLAY This option may not be available in certain OfficeServ models AAREG AA RECORD This option may not be available in certain OfficeServ models AB Absence Presence ABSENCE ABAND Checks the information for whether the caller abandoned the call before answering CID ABANDON ABW Connects disconnects to the group agent for auto call distribution ACC Charge Account AG Answer Group Including or excluding in a temporary answer group ALARM Alarm AN RLS Answer release ANSWER RELEASE It can be specified only when it does not exist in the fixed keys BARGE Barge in BARGE IN OVERRIDE BILL Bills the room charge Hotel function BLOCK Locks the off hook announcement OHVA BLOCk BOOK Booking function BOOTH Sets whether to use the booth phone Hotel function BOSS Boss and secretary BOSS AND SECRETARY CAD Displays the call processing status CALL ACTIVITY DISPLAY CALL Multi purpose call button CALL BUTTON An extension number specifies a purpose automatically CAG Control Answer Group Making or deleting a temporary answer group CAMP Station reservation STATION CAMP ON CANMG Message canceling MESSAGE CANCEL CBK Reservation CALL BACK CC Multi ring service and call pick up button by station CALL COVERAGE CHIN Check in Hotel function
69. If set to Y any new messages or those messages not saved will new automatically begin to play when the subscriber logs in to their message Subscriber Services Menu enabled Auto play of If this option is set the sender information and time will be message automatically played for each message If this is not set to Y the info enabled caller can still get this information on demand by pressing 00 while a message is playing SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Message Alert Controls Notification Mailbox Block TEMPLATE MBX General Authorization Alerts MMI amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director Message Alert Message alertis currently on Alert on urgent message only Alert phone number Delivery Schedule Stop ON OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Message Alert allows the subscriber to be notified at an alternate number home cell phone etc of any new messages in their mailbox Item Description Message A Y in this field enables Message Alert capabilities for this mailbox alert is An N disables the Message Alert feature This parameter setting currently on may be overridden by the phone interface Alert on Alerts the subscriber only if the message left was designated as urgent urgent message only Alert phone This is t
70. M Save the changes 208 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Trunk TSW Gain Controls the call sensitivity for each trunk Viewing and Changing the Trunk Gains Select 5 Features gt 5 4 Volume Control gt 5 4 3 Trunk TSW Gain from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current trunk gains J Change the TX and RX gains 4 Save the changes Trunk TMC Gain Controls the reference sensitivity for each trunk You can control the reference sensitivity within the range of 10 20 dB Requirements An analog trunk card must be mounted Viewing and Changing the Trunk TMC Gains Select 5 Features gt 5 4 Volume Control gt 5 4 4 Trunk TMC Gain from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current trunk TMC gains 3 Change the TX and RX gains 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 209 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here SLI2 Gain Controls the receiving sensitivity for each port of the SLI2 card You can control the receiving sensitivity by port but the actual application is performed by card To have the ports operate with new values you should first set the desired sensitivity for each port and then must perform downloading Requirements Applicable for the 16SLI2 card only Viewing and Changing the SLI2 Gains Select 5 Features gt 5 4 Volume Control gt 5 4 5 SLI2 Gain from the Tree Viewer 2 View the
71. MGI card start channel Two 2 ports are sequentially assigned to each one of the channels MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the MGI card Available for MGI64 MGI16 cards only Viewing and Changing the MGI Card Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 2 MGI Card from the Tree Viewer 2 View and change the MGI Card values 3 Save the changes 76 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SVMi Card Sets a message on the voice mailbox card as the hold sound source and also sets each port on the voice mailbox as a receive only or send only port If a voice mailbox card port is set as the hold sound source it does not operate as a normal voice mailbox port You can also set an IP UMS port as the hold sound source If an IP UMS port is set as the hold sound source a system MGI will also always be assigned as a hold sound source If no MGI is available in the system the hold sound source cannot be specified An IP UMS port set as the hold sound source does not operate as a normal voice mailbox port The method used to set the hold sound source message number is also used to specify the voice mailbox card 5000 to 5099 SVMi Card Items Item Description VMMOH Message Specifies the message number to be used as the hold sound source for the voice mailbox port VM In Out Sets the voice mailbox port to receive or send Viewing and Changing the Hold Soun
72. Memory Unmount Settings Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 13 Memory Unmount from the Tree Viewer 2 Change the Memory Unmount settings 3 Save the changes ITP Idle Logout This function is all IP based phone logout now Viewing and Changing the ITP Idle Logout Settings Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 14 ITP Idle Logout from the Tree Viewer a Change the ITP Idle Logout settings 3 Save the changes ITP Forced Logout This function is used to logout the registration of a particular IP phone IP phone should support IDLE MODE function and be login status This is useful for maintenance Viewing and Changing the ITP Idle Logout Settings Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 15 ITP Forced Logout from the Tree Viewer 2 Change the ITP Forced Logout settings 3 Save the changes 280 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide This page is intentionally left blank SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 281 OfficeServ DM User Guide CHAPTER 6 Voice Mail Programming The following section describes all the configurable options and detailed functional definitions in the Voice Mail features System Main Menu The System Main Menu provides easy access to the different areas of OfficeServ System configuration The specific areas can be accessed using the cursor controls or by selecting the designation letter The
73. Mode Block Answers incoming calls for assigned port s by mode as assigned in the Schedule Table Collects and stores CallData in appropriate call session Memory Registers Can speak salutation prompts Port Block Contains all parameters to connect and communicate with the device the OfficeServ System is directly attached to For most applications changes to this block are not required It has been made visible because it contains parameters that define what disconnect signal besides the switch s IPC disconnect Message we will hang up on This is useful when the CO does not provide a consistent disconnect Query Block Speaks a question statement and expects to record a voice and or DTMF response Delivers recorded response to one or more mailboxes for transcription Speak Block The purpose of a Speak Block is to speak a prompt or system information to the caller A Speak Block can contain two prompts in addition to the ability of speaking system information or register contents After speaking to the caller control is passed to another Block based on the target of the NEXT pointer Station Block The station block is responsible for dialing When the OfficeServ System dials or transfers any calls it uses a station block All devices accessible via Touch Tone dialing in OfficeServ System use at least one of these Each contains the call progress information to monitor and process calls to the associated device s SAMSUNG E
74. Name NO ANSR BUSY FBUSY BLOCKED ERROR MESSAGE OPTIONS OPERATOR ESCAPE NO ENTRY INVALID QUE FULL REMOTE FWD SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 357 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Description Operating Mode Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given an unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows one Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes using different Targets for the pointers various Mode references For example the No Answer pointer might route callers to an associate s Extension during the Day Mode but after 5 00 PM it would route them to a Mailbox during the Night Mode Pointers set in the Default Mode are always in effect unless the same Pointer is set in the current Operating Mode The OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode NO ANSR OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block when a ring no answer cond
75. Performs the service using a 3 1 kHz voice phone Modem Performs the service using a data communication phone SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd to which a modem is connected 99 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Ring Types for Normal Phones ICM Ring Normal station ring of 0 4 sec ringing 0 2 sec off 2 sec ringing 3 sec off CO Ring Normal trunk ring of 1 sec ringing 2 sec off Data Ring This is the same as the normal trunk ring of 1 sec ringing 2 sec off but does not have the off hook tone Viewing and Changing the SLI Data Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 7 SLI Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the SLI settings 3 Change the SLI settings 4 Save the changes 100 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Soft IVR Sets whether to use the Soft IVR that OfficeServ SCM Call Server provide basically Items to be Specified Item Description Conference Sets whether to use Soft IVR conference It uses not conference chip of Gateway but conference function of Soft IVR It provides 3 way 8 group and supports G 711A codec Station MOH Sets whether to use Soft IVR station MOH It uses not melody chip of Gateway but MOH file of Soft IVR It doesn t provide for BGM Announcement Sets whether to use Soft IVR Announcement It provides not tone page but announcement of Soft I
76. Port Information Displays the port information Port Information Items Device Displays the station type trunk and virtual station Tel No Sets the dial number Viewing and Changing the Port Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 4 Port Configuration gt 2 4 1 Port Information from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Port Information settings Change the Port Information settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 91 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Port Common Data Sets the common items for the station and trunk Items to be Specified Item Description Station Name Sets the name of the station or trunk Made Busy Sets the station and trunk to the Busy state MOH Specifies the hold sound source to be heard when the station or trunk is on hold LCR Class Sets the grade 1 to 8 of the optimal line selection function used to restrict the range of trunk groups that can be selected in that function Call Priority When all members of the station group called are busy and there are multiple calls on standby this option specifies which of the standby will be connected first if a member of that station group becomes available 1 to 9 Priority 1 is the highest priority Distinct Tone Sets the distinct ring tone of the digital phone 1 to 8 Distinct Ring Sets the ring period of a normal phone 1
77. Port Number 8 9 7 By Day of Week 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference Card Base Page Search _8 9 2 To Subscribers _ Subscribers Functional Refresh Timer sec 1 2 Configuration E 3 Call Routing Reporting 4 Group amp Table Created Subs Calls Calls to Subscribers Extensions Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 45 36 Reporting Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the Report Counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Subs Calls The total number of calls to the subscriber s extensions listed by how the calls were handled completed redirected rejected etc Calls to A listing of how all calls to the subscribers were handled and their Subscribers percentages For example 9 of all calls to subscribers were cases Extensions where the subscriber s extension was busy Total Subs The total number of calls to the subscriber s extensions Calls Caller Hold The total number of minutes callers were on hold Time 310 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Messaging Acti vity 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Sc
78. Report Count Functional Input Password 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 7 1 Display User Log 8 7 2 Display Error Log 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM 8 7 5 Subscriber Import 8 7 6 Backup and Restore 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode Password 8 9 View System Report a AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 38 52 Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 305 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 306 Iniialize VM This operation will set up the system to original configuration 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 7 1 Display User Log 8 7 2 Display Error Log 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM 8 7 5 Subscriber Import 8 7 6 Backup and Restore 8 7 7 Clear Report Count 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Repo
79. Ringing or to follow the receiving location for trunks specified in 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing When a VOIP call is received this option sets whether to use the received Called Party Number as it is or to follow the 3 2 3 DID Ringing or to follow the receiving location for trunks specified in 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing General Response Time 100 ms This is the time for the user agent to wait before sending a cancel for a General Request Request Retry Time 100 ms This is the time for the user agent to wait until it receives a Final Response after sending a General Request Server IP Address Sets the IP address of the SIP server Registration per User When using the SIP server if this item is set to Enable you can register it for each user If set to Disable you can registers a representative number to it Gateway Enable Sets whether to use the SIP server Server Port Sets the port number of the SIP server Regist Trunk Number Sets the representative number to register in the SIP server Proxy Domain Name Sets the domain name for authentication when using the SIP server User ID Sets the user ID for authentication when using the SIP server Regist Password Sets the password to use when authentication is needed to register a number to the SIP Server This is to used when registering the representative number Regist Expire sec This expire time value
80. SIP Trunk SIP Station including 3rd party SIP application e g IP UMS IVR Resource License Insert the license for MGI VMS This parameter is shown in only OfficeServ 7100 Resource License Status If inserted license is valid license details are shown Service License Insert license for H323 Soft phone MGS MOBEX IP Phone WIFI Phone Call Manager SPNET used and CNF24 Service License Status If inserted license is valid license details are shown Temporary License This can have 3 values DISABLE URGENT ENABLE If a license key with an old MAC address is entered even if the MAC addresses differ the old license shall be able to be used for two weeks If a normal license is entered while an urgent license is being operated it shall be disabled automatically The urgent license shall be used just one time on the same H W SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Temporary License TUTORIAL ENABLE A license function for tutorial shall be added It shall be operated only when there is no normal license key But if normal license is inserted tutorial license is changed to disable and the normal license is used automatically After being enabled it can be used for 2 weeks When the tutorial license is enabled the available resources shall be available as follows 2 VM channels 2 MGI channels 2 MOBEX Executive users 2 Soft phones
81. Sets the priority for the call When all members of the station group called are busy and there are multiple standby calls this option is used to decide which standby call will be connected first if a member of that station group becomes available Range 1 to 9 where 1 is the highest priority Distinctive Tone SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd When the external phone number sends a call if the receiving station is a digital phone the tone can be differentiated so that it can be distinguished from other rings 131 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description Distinctive Ring When the external phone number sends a call if the receiving station is a digital phone the ring period can be differentiated so that it can be distinguished from other rings Viewing and Changing the Ringing Settings for Each Send Number 1 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 5 CLI Ringing from the Tree Viewer 2 View the ringing settings for each send number 3 Change the ringing settings for each send number 4 Save the changes CLI Name Translation Enter the name of the received external phone number If the name of the phone number received through a CID trunk differs from the name specified in this table the NO CID NAME message will be displayed The maximum number of caller ID conversion table entries is 2000 Viewing
82. The corresponding firmware s version Upload 42 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Upload the package After check Select click Upload button to start to upload the file To apply the uploaded file Ubigate should be restarted so you have to check Restart to use it immediately The progress bar displays current state f Conference 24 Card Package Update Card 1 C1 3 Package Information Update Information Card IP Address 165 213 89 72 Update Fie Daen var OO Current Version 100 y Restart Disk Total 104857600 Kb g The corresponding firmware s version V100 Disk Used 53882880 Kbyt Disk Free 50974720 Kbyt Lh Transfer 5791744 25733120 Progress bar will be closed if it completes to upload File Control To upload delete a program file to from the key phone system s Smart Media MMC card click on Util gt File Control The following screen is displayed Used i 57 50MB 971 16MB 5 92 Restart Update Slave SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 43 Error Use the Home tab to apply 5 1 to the text that you want to appear here Refer to the following table to perform the file control Field Details Restart Button Restart the system with the new p
83. The table below is compatible web browser version lists we are tested Internet Explorer 6 0 7 0 or 8 0 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 17 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Connecting Web Server 18 A user can launch the OfficeServ DM with a web browser Execute a web browser and type http s OfficeServ System IP address or http s OfficeServ System IP address dm If you want to connect public IP type http s OfficeServ System IP address dmp or http s OfficeServ System IP address dm_public If OfficeServ system is under NAT so private with public IP is used port 21 80 443 and 5090 must be opened to allow user to login OfficeServ DM Windows Internet Explorer ees O E http 165 213 89 72 4 x E sin P si Favorites f Suggested Sites Web Slice Gallery OfficeServ DM fh gt Bly amp we Pagey Safetyy Toos This System is not installed Java Web Start Please install Java Web Start PlugIn Java Web Start Plugin a OfficeServ DM K Samsung iPX Device Manager Ag Local intranet Protected Mode Off fay Q1 Launch the OfficeServ DM If Java Web Start Plugin is already installed in PC you can see the OfficeServ DM Screen SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Java Web Start Plugin Installation Java Web Start Plugin
84. a u Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T4 51a Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 04 04 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide System Timers Daily Maintenance This is the time when OfficeServ System performs routine daily maintenance Daily maintenance will save the system tables and perform message purging The default setting is 3 00 AM Maintenance will not occur until a Itis after the daily maintenance time typically it does not run until 2 to 10 minutes past the actual set time b 23 hours have elapsed since startup or the last daily maintenance interval System Passwords SUBSCRIBER DEFAULT PASSWORD The digits used as the default settings for extension and mailbox passwords The digit input may be from 1 to 8 digits in length When a mailbox or extension password is reset this is the value that the password will be reset to The default setting is 0000 SUBSCRIBER PSWD MINIMUM LENGTH This parameter defines the minimum number of digits used in a subscriber s password A password can be equal to or larger then this value If this value is changed to a larger value on a running system subscribers will be forced to change their password to one that meets these requirements the next time they log in The system will prevent them from doing anything including listening to new messages until they first change their password to meet the minimum requirements A setting o
85. a speed dial name The OCC code refers to the code after which all the numbers or internal numbers are displayed as when they are sent Requirements Each station can store up to 50 0 to 49 speed dials and names in the speed block of the 2 5 1 Station Data Viewing and Changing the Individual Speed Dial and Name Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 7 Station Speed Dial from the Tree Viewer 2 View the individual speed dial and name settings 3 Change the individual speed dial and name settings 4 Save the changes Alarm Reminder Sets or changes three alarm times and messages up to 16 characters long for each station An alarm time should be entered in 24 Hour mode You don t have to enter an alarm time again The alarm message can be used in a digital phone with the LCD When it reaches the set time the alarm rings and the alarm message is displayed on the LCD so that you can check your schedule SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Alarm Type Alarm Type Description Noset Does not ring the alarm Today Rings the alarm once within 24 hours Daily Rings the alarm at the specified time every day Viewing and Changing the Alarm Time and Message Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 8 Alarm Reminder from the Tree Viewer 2 View the alarm time and message settings 3 Chan
86. allowed the feature for at least one call condition The extension block page 3 of 5 will then show that escape has been assigned to that digit On this call director page you may assign any destination to this escape pointer OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this NO ENTRY OfficeServ System goes to the designated target Block when the caller makes no input It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this The wait for input is located on page 1 of 5 of the EClass Block INVALID OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block when a caller makes an invalid input OfficeServ System will not prompt the caller prior to doing this Page 1 of 5 of the EClass block allows for multiple caller mistakes in a parameter called Retries on invalid input QUE FULL The next block to go to if the number of callers allowed to hold in queue is exceeded See EClass page 2 of 5 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 359 Error Use the Home tab to apply Al 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Continued Description REMOTE FWD The Remote Forward pointer is used to display the target extension when Call Forwarding is activated in the extension administration menu This feature can be set by the Subscriber but must first be allowed by administrator See Call Screening MES
87. answered Busy No Answer Forwards calls when the phone is busy or they are not answered Requirements If Busy No Answer is selected each call is forwarded to the station specified by the Busy Forward or No Answer Forward item according to the user situation Therefore to use the Busy No Answer function a phone number must be set in the Busy Forward and No Answer Forward items respectively If the FORWARD item of 4 7 2 COS Contents is set to No no call forwarding can be set but it can be canceled e Calls can only be forwarded to an external number if the EXT FWD item of 4 7 2 COS Contents is set to Yes If only the FORWARD item is set to Yes calls can be forwarded to a station number only Defaults All stations Forward Cancel Viewing and Changing the Call Forwarding Settings 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 6 Call Forwarding from the Tree Viewer View the Call Forwarding settings Change the Call Forwarding settings Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 255 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 256 Station Speed Dial Sets the individual speed dial and its name for each station You can enter up to 24 characters as a speed dial and it consists of 0 9 and A trunk group can be included in the speed dial numbers You can enter up to 11 characters for
88. any messages arriving forward in this mailbox will be automatically forwarded to the destination specified on Mailbox Block page 4 of 5 Delete after forwarding If this parameter is set to Y the new message that is to be Auto Forwarded will be discarded from this mailbox when the forwarding takes place If this parameter is set to N the mailbox will retain a copy of the message that is Auto Forwarded This parameter is only active when Enable Auto Forward parameter is set to Y Auto forward delay HH MM The number of hours and or minutes before a new message is automatically forwarded to another mailbox Auto Forwarding is disabled if this parameter is left blank The range for this is from 0 no forward to 23 59 almost one day SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide E Mail Gateway Mailbox Block TEMPLATE MBX General Authorization Alerts MV amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director Enable E Mail Gateway support No E Mail Gate Way From Deliver MSG Deliver MSG Deliver MSG 1 2 Deliver MSG 3 4 ia Deliver MSG Notify Only Notify Only Notify Only Notify Only Notify Only Item Description Enable E This is a Y or N setting Y enables the E Mail Gateway for that Mail subscriber s Mailbox an
89. are to be reordered added to or changed in page 3 of the System Wide Parameters then this field should be re entered Dial Number The actual number that the OfficeServ System will dial to mailbox complete the transfer OfficeServ System associates two types of numbers with an extension the block identification number called the Key and the Dial Number The Key is the number the caller enters for a particular called party s telephone The Dial Number is the number the telephone system database recognizes as one of its stations When the OfficeServ System receives the Key from the caller it transmits the Dial Number to the telephone system to execute the transfer to the called party s telephone The Key and the Dial Number are usually the same but they can be different When they are different the extension is a virtual extension A virtual extension can be configured with the same set of call automation attributes as a regular extension It is particularly useful when a group of people in an organization share a single telephone Each person in the group can be assigned his own Key in the OfficeServ System subscriber database The Dial Number however will be the same for each virtual extension This allows callers to enter a distinctive Key for each member of the group even though they ring the same telephone A call presentation prompt can be customized for each virtual extension subscriber for example Call for John Smith
90. areas that can be accessed are e A Open Block Table e B Save Application C Schedule Table D Subscriber List E System Wide Parameter F Voice Studio e G Operating Utilities H Override Mode I System Reports e J Site Information e K Status Screen SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 282 OfficeServ DM User Guide 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference pe pe Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 0 Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 4 52 47 Select All Items KN If you want to select all items in 8 VMAA menus please click title of NOTE select SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 283 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Open Block Table 284 The Block Table is used for building OfficeServ System call routing applications This is the most frequently accessed area in the OfficeServ System and determines its behavior when it is routing calls All the prompts and options offered to callers are programmed here Beca
91. as the Escape digit itself Prompts 1 6 These are the voice prompts that the OfficeServ System speaks when the Menu Block is entered Menu prompts 1 6 are spoken in succession and are normally used to prompt the caller for an entry Allowable inputs include any four digit prompt number 1000 9999 A blank entry means say nothing SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 395 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description To use a different or custom prompt highlight the field to be changed and enter the desired prompt number Invalid The prompt spoken when no match is found during a MENU search condition It normally advises the caller that their entry is invalid try again prompt Request The prompt which asks the caller to enter a password when password appropriate The prompt is used when a caller has made an entry prompt that requires a password for access to another Block or perform an administrative function Maximum Indicates the maximum number of digits the caller may enter in caller entry response to the Menu prompts The allowable values are 1 16 This digits should be set to the length of the maximum valid entry in this Menu If set greater the OfficeServ System will wait unnecessarily for additional digits to be entered If the caller enters more than the specified number of digits the excess will be carried fo
92. be re entered Send broadcast MSG allowed Set this parameter to Y if this list is a subscriber administrator Otherwise set to N If this is set to Yes then broadcast messages will be allowed from this list box Extended prompting enabled Set this parameter to Y to use the full set of OfficeServ System menu prompts Otherwise set to N Directory Public A Y in this parameter and the recorded List name allows the listing in the Public Directory Directory User A Y in this parameter and the name recorded in the List allows the listing in the Voice Mail Directory SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description Mailbox greeting allowed When set to yes the caller is allowed to record a greeting for the LIST block This is rarely used If the LIST Block is used a Department Mailbox for Public callers then the Greeting will be useful Subscriber password by Default password in the System Wide Parameters or removed completely Inputs are DEFAULT or NONE Allows the list password to be changed to the default digits specified Retention days remaining The number of days remaining before this block is automatically discarded during system maintenance if there are no list members List Blocks are not automatically deleted for lack of use as long as they contain members Delete all unheard copies of
93. call digits Delete Length Length of a part of the ACCESS DGT to delete After connecting to the opposite VoIP trunk as many digits as is removed from the ACCESS DGT and the remaining is used IP Table Number When sending a VoIP call this option sets the number of the table in which the destination IP address is saved Start Entry of IP Table Sets the location to start searching in the IP table to distribute calls for a specific access code Server Use Sets whether to use Gatekeeper for the access This is applicable only when the Gatekeeper Route is set to Enable in 5 2 1 H 323 Trunk Option SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 185 Error Use the Home tab to apply 5 1 to the text that you want to appear here 186 Viewing and Changing the VoIP Outgoing Digits Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 3 VoIP Outgoing Digits from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current VoIP Outgoing Digits 3 Change the VoIP Outgoing Digits 4 Save the changes VoIP Incoming Digits Sets the digit code conversion settings when receiving an H 323 and SIP VoIP trunk call Items to be Specified Description Table No Index 0 to 62 of the first IP table to refer to when converting an access code to an IP address Access Digit Digits needed to connect to the opposite party This is needed to transmit a call to the opposite system Insert Digit Digit to insert at the front of the ca
94. characters for it The maximum number of agent codes is 300 Viewing and Changing the Auto Call Distribution Agent Codes 1 Z 3 4 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 6 UCD gt 4 6 2 UCD PIN Number from the Tree Viewer View the current auto call distribution agent codes Enter the agent code in the Agent ID field and the auto call distribution group umber in the Group No field Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 153 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Class of Service Port Class Sets the service grade of the ring receiving mode for each station Service grades are divided into 30 grades 01 30 as specified in the 4 7 2 COS Contents Viewing and Changing the Ring Receiving Mode for Each Station Select the 4 Group amp Table gt 4 7 Class of Service gt 4 7 1 Port Class from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current ring receiving mode for each station 3 Enter the service grade 01 30 for each station when its ring receiving mode is 1 to 6 4 Save the changes COS Contents Changes the details of the service grade table Type of Service Grade Table Service Grade Table Description Features Sets whether the function that the system provides can be used or not for each service grade Station Group Sets whether the eighty 80 station groups defined in the system can be called for each service g
95. current receiving sensitivity for each SLI2 card 3 Changes the receiving sensitivity for each SLI2 card 4 Save the changes Trunk Gain Controls the trunk call TX RX sensitivity Viewing and Changing the TRK Gain 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 4 Volume Control gt 5 4 6 Trunk Gain from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current trunk call TX RX sensitivity 3 Change the Type TX Gain and RX Gain for each trunk phone number 4 Save the changes 210 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l System Control System Control Changes the reference and system information for synchronizing the clock to use in the system System Information Sets the message waiting lamp flash frequency for the regular phone You can change also the dial pulse make break ratio and the number of pulses per second for each trunk and the system time variables which are specified and operated by system System Information Items Item Description Make Break Ratio Make Sets the dial pulse make break ratio 1 to 99 Pulse Per Second pps Sets the number of pulses per second 10 or 20 Message Waiting Lamp Cadence Sets the message waiting lamp flash frequency for the regular phone Message Waiting Lamp On Time 100 ms Sets the interval of time for which the message waiting lamp is turned on for the regular phone Default 1 second Message Waiting Lamp Off Time 100 m
96. depending on the type of block being programmed In a Menu Block the Call Director is called the Menu Input Processor and also acts on data entered by the caller In an Extension Block the Call Director is called the Caller Options Processor and also acts on data entered by the caller In a Mode Block the Call Director is called the Call Code Processor and also acts on call type data received from the phone system The Bye Block and the Station Block do not have Call Directors as they are considered the end of a Call Control Path 322 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Event Pointers The Call Director uses EVENT POINTERS to pass control of the call to the next block All Event Pointers consist of an INPUT value an ACTION a Block TYPE and a TARGET The INPUT value is the collection of digits whether received from the caller via DTMF or telephone system or network integration information collected in the block The ACTION is that which takes place when input from the caller equals the INPUT value TYPE is the type of Block to pass control to there are five types of ACTIONS GOTO TRANSLATE PASSWORD then GOTO SEARCH ON and FILE The TARGET is the Name of the Block to pass control to next Modes At any time of the day the OfficeServ System is in a specific operating mode This may be as simple as Day Mode business hours or Night Mode business closed or it can be very comple
97. embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM ADMINISTRATION VMAME Auto answer for the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM AUTO ANSWER EMULATION VMMSG Checks the messages of the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM MESSAGE VT Transfers the voice mailbox VMS TRANSFER WAKEUP Sets the morning call time Hotel function XCHIN Speed check in Hotel function 168 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Buttons for Each Type of Phone Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 9 Key Programming gt 4 9 1 Default Key from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current settings for each type of phone 3 Select the type of phone 4 Select the button number and select a function in the Feature item In case that station number is needed inputs the station number in the Extension item 5 Save the changes Station Key Sets a specific function to a program button of a phone that has the buttons that can be programmed The program buttons 1 and 2 is assigned to the multi purpose button Call by default Below are the functions that can be assigned to the program buttons Some functions underlined with at the latter part can specify and use function extension numbers independently For the trunk and trunk group direct selection function the extension number must be specified For other functions it is possible that the extension number is not specified Function that can be specified
98. fixed keys UA Night ring answer UNA PICK UP VG SVM 800 group messages VM Calls the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM MEMO VMADM Changes the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM ADMINISTRATION VMAME Auto answer for the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM AUTO ANSWER EMULATION VMMSG Checks the messages of the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM MESSAGE VT Transfers the voice mailbox VMS TRANSFER WAKEUP Sets the morning call time Hotel function XCHIN Speed check in Hotel function 174 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Program Buttons for Each Station 1 S Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 9 Key Programming gt 4 9 2 Station Key from the Tree Viewer View the current program button settings for each station Select the station number to change Select the button number and select a function in the Feature item In case that station number is needed inputs the station number in the Extension item Save the changes Program Key Status Display current program key status Viewing the Program Key Status 1 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 9 Key Programming gt 4 9 3 Program Key Status from the Tree Viewer View the current program key status SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 175 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Features Call Restriction 176 Port Use Group Spec
99. information in 3 Save the changes Save Default Key Saves and recovers the button settings for each station When saving the phone button settings they are saved to a buffer that each phone type has Requirements The buffer is also used in the 4 9 1 Default Key and also used when initializing the program for a newly connected phone Therefore use it carefully SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 277 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Saving the Phone Button Settings Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 8 Save Default Key from the Tree Viewer 2 Enter the station number of the digital phone and select Save or Restore as shown in the figure below 3 Save the changes Alarm Buffer Control Manages the alarm buffers of the system Alarms are stored in the alarm buffer There are fifty 50 major alarm buffers and fifty 50 additional alarm buffers They follow the First In First Out rule The Remove option allows the current existing alarms to be removed from the alarm memory An alarm is outputted to an alarm port automatically If an alarm buffer is emptied a new alarm enters it Items to be Specified Item Description Clear Clear the alarm buffer Print Prints the alarm buffer to the alarm port Clearing and Printing the Alarm buffer Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 9 Alarm Buffer Control from t
100. is needed to register a number to the SIP server periodically Generally a value given by the SIP server is used We recommend using the default value Session Timer This the timer value to use when sending and receiving a message periodically to preserve a session after it is set up Whether to use the session timer is predefined for each SIP server We recommend using the default value Session Vendor SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd This option is used to discriminate the slightly different operations of each server We recommend using the default value 183 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 184 Item Continued Description Regist Status Displays whether the terminal is registered to the SIP server SIP Station Expire Sets the registration expire time of the SIP station terminal Time sec We recommend using the default value SIP Peering When making a call in interoperation with the SIP server usually the SIP server IP address is used in the From To header But this option is used when you want use the IP address of the terminal for a specific SIP server Codec Auto Sets whether to set the voice codec automatically Negotiation TLS Port This is the port specified to use the TLS Use TLS Sets whether to use the TLS when performing SIP signaling Proxy Server Address Sets the domain name or IP address of the SIP se
101. is not necessary Directory Block This is a utility that sets up the necessary parameters used in the subscriber s directory list EClass Block This is a class of service block for extensions and contains additional permissions that apply to all extensions in this class Extension Block Represents the subscriber to a caller Houses subscriber s settings personal greetings and call coverage controls such as call blocking and screening Contains Caller Option Processor and Designated Location facility for routing callers to subscriber s current telephone regardless of physical location Multiple subscribers each with their own Extension Object can effectively share a single telephone List Block Delivers recorded voice message to a list of mailboxes May contain other lists as members Mailbox Block Receives records sends and stores multimedia messages Contains default personal greeting name and password for the subscriber This block contains all the parameters for the mailbox including pager and cell phone notification One usually exists for each phone on the system SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MClass Block This is aclass of service block for Mailboxes and contains additional permissions that apply to all Mailboxes in this class Menu Block Speaks prompts to caller and routes on Input from caller entry The Auto Attendant Main Menu is an example of a menu block
102. is set to On and the Auto Answer option of 3 2 2 Trunk DISA Auto Answer is set to On it is answered automatically after the Trunk Answer Time of 3 2 2 Trunk DISA Auto Answer has passed At this time the sound set by the Answer MOH option of 3 2 2 Trunk DISA Auto Answer is played to the recipient and the call is received at the location specified by 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing If the call is not answered and the Auto MOH Disconnect Time of 5 14 2 Confirm Disconnect No Action has passed it is disconnected automatically CID Code Insert Sets whether to automatically insert the country code into the received caller ID CID Display Time sec Set the display time of the caller ID 1 to 25 sec CID Message Receive Time sec Sets the time to detect the caller ID from an analog trunk 1 to 25 sec CID Display Allocation Time 100 ms Sets the time to wait in order to attach the CID receiver after a call is received to a trunk This time must be adjusted according to the time spent by the network to send the CID information 0 to 2500 ms Password Enable Specifies whether the caller must enter a password to send the call on when it is received by a DISA trunk Dial Tone MOH Specifies whether to use the function that sends the hold tone instead of the dial tone to the caller when a call is received by a DISA trunk No Action Ring Station Specifies whether to transfer t
103. ita TS RC e uja lala lm lm eo Item Description Label Name The name of this block A Block name can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block name may not be the same as another Block name Mode The number is identified with the name of the mode Number NEXT The NEXT pointer will only be used if the OfficeServ System does not receive a Call Type IPC message from the phone system when the call is first presented This parameter points to the next Block OfficeServ System will execute after answering a call and speaking the prompts in the MODE Block The logic that is used is the OfficeServ System receives a Call but does NOT receive a Call Typ indicator what should it do NEXT Any DTMF digits entered in the MODE Block will be carried forward to the next MENU block DEFAULT The Default pointer of the MODE Block determines what to do if a condition occurs while operating in this mode and a pointer has not been set This is intended to be a back up precaution in the event of configuration error It is normally directed to a BYE Block which will hang up SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 403 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 404 Item Continued Description This parameter will ONLY be referenced if an application is written with a hole within the application A hole woul
104. no answer condition and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Busy The number of calls processed by this Block which encountered a busy signal and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Blocked The number of calls which encountered call blocking set on this extension and the percentage of the total calls this number represents Rejected The number of calls processed as screened transfers which were rejected by the subscriber and the percentage of the total calls this number represents Redirected The number of callers redirected to another extension by the subscriber and the percentage of the total calls this number represents Hold count The number of callers who elected to hold after encountering a busy signal and the percentage of the total calls this number represents It includes callers who may have elected to hold and subsequently hung up prior to connecting Abandoned The number of calls processed by this Block during which the caller disconnected without selecting any options and the percentage of the total calls this number represents No response The number of calls processed by this Block during which the caller made no entry in response to the available options and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Left message The number of calls processed by this Block during which the caller chose to rec
105. numbers and determines a dial plan to be applied Digits There are 500 entries up to 10 digits can be assigned to each entry These entries are used to find the dial plan that matches the number which a station dials to make a call There are eight 8 different dial plans 1 to 8 They are used in the trunk call charge rate of program 433 and the exact charge is determined according to the charge calculation table of program 749 As the system analyzes numbers with a logical order whenever a new entry is added all the entries are sorted by the number system For example when this program has the entries 1 13 1305 and 140 if 13056 is dialed then entry 1305 is selected because it is the closest to 13506 When this program has the entries 1 13 13056 and 140 if 1305 is dialed no operation occurs until the user dials another digit Viewing and Changing the Cost Dial Plan 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 12 Call Costing gt 5 12 3 Cost Dial Plan from the Tree Viewer View the current cost dial plan Change the cost dial plan Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 231 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here System Features Tenant Options Sets the tenant options Tenant Option Sets the tenant options such as night ringing DISA alarm ringing attendant group and barge in override type etc Tenant Option Items Item Description
106. of the ring back tone a call path must be connected for an incoming trunk If it is not connected the field sets whether to have the coloring heard by sending an ANSBACK message Viewing and Changing Function On Off Settings by Trunk Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 2 Trunk On Off from the Tree Viewer SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 103 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 2 View the Function On Off settings by trunk 3 Change the Function On Off settings by trunk 4 Save the changes Trunk Timer Changes the time parameters to be set and used for each trunk Trunk Time Parameters Trunk Time Parameter display unit Description Answer Back 100 ms Sets the Answer Back detection time 0 to 2500 ms Clear Wait 100 ms Sets the delay time for hook on when re calling a trunk 100 to 9900 ms Co SuperVision Timer 10 ms Sets the interval for trunk checking during a call 10 to 2500 ms Flash Time 10 ms Sets the trunk flash time 20 to 2500 ms No Ring Wait sec Sets the maximum time before recognizing that the call has disconnected because there is no trunk ring signal 1 to 25 sec PRS Detect 10 ms Sets the duration of PRS signal pulse If the PRS signal is reversed when opposite party is answered and maintain the status before the opposite party disconnect the call the PRS
107. operated automatically again to reflect the changes And when System ID or System Key etc is changed all the existing registered terminal information is initialized WLAN Parameter Parameter Description RF Channel Sets the RF channels that the WBS24 uses Up to six 6 channels can be specified and the default is three 3 No 1 No 6 No 11 Codec 1 2 3 4 Codec used for VolP calls between the WBS24 and terminal Any of G 711u G 711a G 726 and G 729 can be specified Register VoWLAN Sets whether to permit a new registration of a wireless terminal WIP Policy Sets whether to use the WIP IP address in static mode or not WLI Slot Sets the location information of the cabinet and slot in which the WLI card is mounted Version Parameter to view the version information of the WLAN module WLAN Switch Option to support the WLAN switch This option is applicable only if the AP TYPE is set to Commercial AP Max AP Channel Used to restrict the number of channels for the Commercial AP This option is applicable only if the AP TYPE is set to Commercial AP Retransmission T1 When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP if there is no answer after transmitting a call it is retransmitted The RE TRANS T1 TIME is the first retransmission interval defined in the RFC2543 Retransmission T2 Maximum retransmission interval defined in the RFC2543 Retransmission T4 SAMSUNG Electroni
108. passes that data to the appropriate Mode Block along with the caller In order to process calls each port must be assigned a Port Block This has been done for you and is hard coded into the system Many of the parameters are not applicable to the Samsung switches while in an embedded environment The Port Block was made visible to allow you to adjust the Disconnect Parameter Many installations have been having trouble getting the CO to provide proper disconnect Changing the disconnect signal in the port block will allow the OfficeServ System to disconnect on an alternate signal type See Disconnect Signal below Parameters prefixed below with DO NOT USE should not be played with These parameters will ultimately be adjusted for use with the Samsung switches or eliminated from view NOTE 406 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide General Port Block TEMPLATE PRT General Set Information Label Name TEMPLATE PRT Line is wink start Call Setup Wait for loop current Rings before answer Phone System Interface Hunt group type Linear Disconnect signal None Mailbox Services Description Toll saver group Toll saver rings Toll saver prompt Description Auto clear MwYyI Item Description Label Name The name of this block A Block name can be any alphanumeric strin
109. pointer if the lt MSG gt pointer is set in the Extension Block 344 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description OPTIONS When a transfer to an extension results in a busy or ring no answer condition the caller is given choices such as To leave a message press 1 to hold press 2 or for additional options press 3 This pointer determines the MENU Block which control will be passed to if the caller presses the digit for additional options OPERATOR This is the block control is passed to if the caller presses 0 for the operator while listening to To leave a message press 1 to hold press 2 or for additional options press 3 ESCAPE This is the Block to go to if a public caller presses the escape digit NO ENTRY This is the block to go to if no entry is made within the ECLASS Block when prompted INVALID This is the block to go to if an invalid entry is made within the ECLASS Block when prompted QUE FULL The next block to go to if the number of callers allowed holding in queue is exceeded See Max in hold queue parameter in the MODE Block OfficeServ System will ignore this pointer if the lt QUE FULL gt pointer is set in the Extension Block USER EXIT The next block to go to if a subscriber presses star to exit from their extension administration menu It is recommended that the named Block
110. port that set it The user must dial into the port that set the indicator 2 Clears when the user dials directly into any voice mail port 3 Clears when the user gets routed into OfficeServ System by any means i e Call Forward 4 Clears when the user reaches OfficeServ System by any means and from any port SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Disconnet signal This parameter was the main reason for making this block visible NOTE again If you are having trouble getting the CO to provide a proper disconnect this parameter can help you Remember the problem is with the CO and this is simply trying to accommodate for the lack of proper disconnect The most common alternatives are Dial Tone Busy Tone and or Reorder Tone It is best not to rely on a dial tone for a disconnect signal Continuous background noise may be misconstrued as a disconnect signal when a caller is leaving a message resulting in the caller being suddenly and rudely cut off Unreliable signals can also cause messages to end with long dial tones Alternately dial tone may not be detectable in a given installation resulting in hung ports phantom calls etc Test before using OfficeServ System must have a reliable disconnect signal to set up conference calls Set Information Port Block TEMPLATE PRT General Set Information PBX Interface Strings port logon
111. presence status Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 261 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here MMS Service Sets the functions related to the multimedia service Items to be Specified Item Description MMS Ringback Sets the function to receive and display the multimedia information from the server instead of hearing the ring back tone in interoperation with the multimedia server MMS Ring Sets the function to receive and display the multimedia information from the server instead of hearing the ring in interoperation with the multimedia server MMS Busy Sets the function to receive and display the multimedia information from the server instead of hearing the busy tone in interoperation with the multimedia server MMS MOH Sets the function to receive and display the multimedia information from the server instead of hearing the MOS that the opposite party held in interoperation with the multimedia server Viewing and Changing the MMS Service Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 14 MMS Service from the Tree Viewer 2 View the MMS Service settings Change the MMS Service settings 4 Save the changes 262 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Emergency Dial Sets the functions related to the emergency dial Viewing and Changing the Emergency Dial Settings
112. saw that name so it didn t matter If you do not want the Recipient to see the label name as it is typed you can use the following syntax Firstname Lastname lt username mailserverdomain domainsuffix gt OR Departmentname lt username mailserverdomain domainsuffix gt This applies to all fields that accept an e mail address System Wide Parameters Report amp Reply To e Mailbox Block From Deliver MSG amp Notify Only 378 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Call Director Mailbox Block TEMPLATE MBX General Authorization Alerts MWI amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director Activity Operating Mode 00 Defautt v Event Call Director Action Type Gp Target Name MSG LEFT NOMSG LEFT ESCAPE GREET DTMF OPERATOR AUTO FWD Item Description Operating Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Mode Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given a unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows each Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes using different Targets for the pointers various Mode references For example the Message Left pointer might route callers to
113. server is assigned SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Authorizations Mailbox Block TEMPLATE MBX General Authorization Alerts MI amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director Activity Authorization Forced messages allowed Workload manager Commitment ollow up allowed Message grouping allowed Mailbox greeting allowed Message alert control allowed Extended prompting enabled Auto play of new message enabled Yes Auto play of message info enabled Yes Item Description Forced This option makes the mailbox capable of sending Forced messages Messages Forced Messages are messages that have either Reply allowed Required or Delivery Imperative When a message is designated as Reply Required the messages recipient MUST reply to the message before the message can be saved or deleted When a message is designated as Delivery imperative the OfficeServ System will take extra steps to deliver it The recipient s pager will be called and then each of his stored telephone numbers will be tried Workload This allows access to the subscriber workload manager in the manager subscriber telephone interface It makes available option 1 dial 1 at the Subscriber Main Menu and will allow the subscriber to group their reminders as Commitments Follow ups or Tasks Commitment If this is enabled subscribers can designa
114. service grade to use by function 4 Save the changes 158 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Toll Restriction Toll Deny Table Press the dial button to restrict trunk sending Level A allows all outgoing trunks Level H restricts all outgoing trunks Therefore the table below is about the Level B to G outgoing trunk grades Up to 500 dial buttons to restrict outgoing trunks can be saved Each button has up to twelve 12 digits For each dial button whether to apply the six 6 outgoing trunk grades is set Dial button Input Value 0 Number you want to restrict A C Meta character X Y Z These are used when checking several dial buttons simultaneously If there is a meta character during dialing the dial corresponding to the item 1 of the meta character table is used End mark of the dial F displayed with E Viewing and Changing the Outgoing Trunk Restriction Dial Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 8 Toll Restriction gt 4 8 1 Toll Deny Table from the Tree Viewer View the current outgoing trunk restriction dial settings 3 Enter a call restriction dial number and set whether to use it for each grade 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 159 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Toll Allow Table Enter the dial button to allow outgoing trunks Level A allows all outgoing tru
115. should be installed to use OfficeServ DM If it s not click Java Web Start Plugin then click the button Agree and Start Free Download to install Download Java for Windows Internet Explorer Windows Internet Explorer os OU se ie java com en download inc windows_new_iejs 2 4 x E sing 2 gt ie Favorites 3 2 S ted Sites Wel Download Java for Windows Internet Explorer fit gt Bl Gl y Pager Safetyy Toos y Java in Action Downloads Help Center Download Java for Windows Recommended Version 6 Update 22 filesize 10 MB Agree and Start Free Download By downloading Java you acknowledge that you have read and accepted the terms of the end user Notthe right operating system See all Java downloads here Installation Instructions System Requirements Windows 7 ws XP 2000 ws Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 Intel and 100 compatible processors are supported A Pentium 166MHz or faster processor with at least 64MB of physical RAM is reco JRE Java Runtime Environment Version Check At least JRE 1 6 should be installed to use OfficeServ DM If an old version of JRE i e lower than the version 1 6 is installed please remove it and replace with a new one SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 19 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Launching the OfficeServ DM A user can see the screen
116. so This parameter allows the installer to select an additional type of disconnect signal which will be used with this system Mailbox This feature is used only for voice mail service bureaus OfficeServ services do System toll saver feature will guess the caller s mailbox based on not use the caller ID CID check to see if the caller has messages and delay pickup if there are no messages Pickup is delayed by waiting additional rings and or playing a prompt before answering Toll saver Sets which mailbox group this functionality will be applied to group do not use Toll saver The additional number of rings the system waits for the Toll Saver rings do not use feature OfficeServ System toll saver feature guesses the caller s mailbox based on the caller ID checks to see if the caller has messages and delays pickup if there are no messages Pickup is delayed by waiting additional rings and or playing a prompt before answering Toll saver The prompt played during the Toll Saver delay Enter the four digit prompt do number of the desired prompt Leave this field blank if no prompt is not use to be played Auto clear This parameter identifies under which conditions the switch will reset MWI do not message waiting indicators This helps OfficeServ System keep use track of MWI status Acceptable entries are 0 The switch never has permission to clear the indicators 1 Clear only by the
117. that handle system integration Direct Station and Trunk and Forward Station and Trunk These should not be changed For specialized applications you can create other menu blocks that can take input from these registers to use within the application Store INPUT in Store the input to this menu in the CID FwdID TRUNK call session memory register for use as input to subsequent MENU search This is used for basic system integration with the phone system The LANG Register is used to store the language option selected by the caller Administrati on Normally the key is used as a prefix for signaling administrative functions When it is the first digit pressed it does not count as one of the digits pressed when compared to Maximum Caller Entry Digits In other words if a caller enters 123 it will count as a total of 3 digits Some applications may require restriction of administrative capabilities on specific ports or MENUs This can be accomplished by setting Administration digit value to blank in the MENU Blocks where administration is not allowed Allowable inputs are 0 9 Q a b c d Escape The Escape digit normally the Q key causes an immediate exit from a request for digit entry When the Escape digit is pressed OfficeServ System will not wait for any subsequent digits to be pressed The INPUT value will include any digits entered before the Escape digit as well
118. the CNF24 card Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 2 CNF 24 Card Configuration from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system Meet Me Contact List Specifies the phone number to join meet me conference System Selection Items Contact Numbers Specifies the phone number to join meet me conference SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 431 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 3 Meet Me Contact List from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system Predefined Groups Specifies the predefined groups System Selection Items Descript Specifies the description for predefined group Trunk Specifies the trunk or station number Tel Specifies the outgoing number if trunk number is inputted in TRUNK Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 4 Predefined Groups from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system Meet Me Members List Specifies the member list for reservation of meet me conference When meet me conference is reserved this list is updated System Selection Items User Name
119. the OfficeServ 7100 Gateway In the OfficeServ 7200 7400 Gateway all MISCs relay ports are fixed to PAGE NOTE The ring can be set to continuous 0 CONTINUOUS or interrupted 1 INTERRUPTED for the ordinary bell For each auxiliary ring the station that rings it can be set An auxiliary ring and a station must be specified as a pair When a station rings the auxiliary ring with which it forms a pair also rings simultaneously SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 75 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing the LCP Card Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 1 LCP Card from the Tree Viewer 2 View the LCP Card MGI Card Allows MGI card parameters to be set and a specific MGI port to be assigned as a dedicated port to a port that needs to call via the MGI MGI Card Items MGI Parameter Description IP Version Sets whether the MGI IP version is IPv4 or IPv6 IP Type If the IP address used by the MGI board in the private network is different from the IP address used in the public network this parameter is used to assign a public IP address to a packet to be transmitted to a public network IP Address IP address of the MGI card Subnet Mask Subnet mask of the MGI card Gateway Default gateway address of the MGI card Public IP Address Public IP address of the MGI card Public Port Public port No of the
120. the QOS check server IVR Server IP Address Sets the IP address of the IP IVR server Requirements If you changed a parameter value related to the system IP address gateway net mask or DHCP mode you have to reset the MCP board to apply the changes Viewing and Changing the System I O Parameter Values Select 5 Features gt 5 6 System I O Options gt 5 6 1 System I O Parameter from the Tree Viewer View the current system I O parameter values Change the system I O parameter values 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 213 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here LAN Printer Sets the various parameter values for using a LAN printer You can print the following eight 8 kinds of information using a LAN printer 01 SMDR 02 UCD REPORT 03 TRAFFIC REPORT 04 ALARM REPORT 05 119 ANI ALI 06 PERIODIC UCD 07 HOTEL REPORT 08 PMS LAN Printer Parameters Item Setting Current Status Displays the current status of the LAN printer Buffered Data Printout Specifies whether to print the data remaining in the buffer Update to LAN Card Specifies whether to apply the changes Printer IP Address Sets the IP address of the LAN printer Printer TCP Port Sets the printer TCP port LAN TCP Port Sets the LAN TCP port Printer Destination Specifies the destination Retry Count Sets the retry count 0
121. the dial number in the 2 8 0 Number Plan 274 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Installing a New Card and Restarting The System Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 1 Pre Install Reset from the Tree Viewer 2 Select a gateway 3 Set anew card and set whether to restart the system 4 Save the changes Virtual Card Change Sets the card type of a virtual cabinet Viewing and Changing the Card Types of Virtual Cabinets Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 2 Virtual Card Change from the Tree Viewer 2 View the card types of the virtual cabinets 3 Change the card types of the virtual cabinets 4 Save the changes Halt Processing Makes the system halted Halt or operated normally Processing Viewing and Changing the Halt Processing Settings Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 3 Halt Processing from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Halt Processing settings for the system Change the Halt Processing settings for the system 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 275 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Memory Dump Displays the values about memory address Performing the Memory Dump Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 4 Memory Dump from the Tree Viewer 2 Press the Start button 3 Save the m
122. the gateway and routing table for which you want to view the optimal route selection routing table View the settings for the optimal route selection routing table Change the settings for the optimal route selection routing table Save the changes Modify Digits Selects a trunk group in the optimal route selection function that analyzes the external phone number dialed by the user connects the call to the lowest cost trunk group automatically and then changes the dial button to be converted inserted or added in order to export the dialed number Up to 200 dial conversion tables can be entered Items to be Specified Item Description Delete Count Sets the number of the digits to be deleted Insert Digits Sets the digits to be inserted before dialing Append Digits Sets the digits to be added after dialing The actual dialing sequence for all digits is Insert Digits Dial Digits Digits to delete Append Digits 124 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Optimal Route Selection Dial Conversion Table 1 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 5 Modify Digits from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the gateway for which you want to view the optimal route selection dial conversion table J View the settings for the optimal route selection dial conversion table 4 Change the settings for the optimal route selecti
123. to the previous one Digit log on as a user administrati on digit The Admin digit controls the following functions In the mailbox or List public mode if entered at any time prior to the beep signaling the beginning of recording a message OfficeServ System will switch immediately to the user mode requesting a password to be entered for the subscriber access to the mailbox When sending a message recorded in the mailbox user mode prefacing the mailbox number with the Admin digit will request delivery confirmation Digit to escape Escape digit and Admin digit should not be set to the same digit 386 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide OutCall MClass Block TEMPLATE MCL General Public Caller Interface Outcan Prompts E Mail Gateway Call Director Controls Number of attemps _ Message Notification and Delivery Alert Busy retry time No answer retry time Callback Authorization YIN Station Type On Premise ves Off Premise Yes Long distance Yes Excepted Area Codes ae masa The following configuration parameters can be entered for Message Alert being called at a designated number and notified of new messages Item Description Number of The number of attempts made to perform notification attempts Busy retry The time between notification outcall attempts in m
124. to 10 Retry Interval Sets the retry waiting time 5 to 250 sec PJL Enable Enables or disables the PJL Printer Language Sets the printer language Paper Size Sets the paper size Font Type Sets the font type Duplex Enable Enables or disables duplex mode Orientation Sets the orientation Printer Tray Sets the printer tray Resolution Sets the resolution Line per Page Sets the number of lines per page 214 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the LAN Printer Parameter Values Select 5 Features gt 5 6 System I O Options gt 5 6 2 LAN Printer from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current LAN printer parameter values 3 Change the LAN printer parameter values 4 Save the changes SMDR Options Sets the printing options for the System Message Detail Recording SMDR SMDR Printing Options Printing Option Description Page Header Specifies whether to print a header at the top of each page Line Per Page Sets the number of lines to print per page Maximum 99 lines Incoming Call Specifies whether to print incoming calls Outgoing Call Specifies whether to print outgoing calls Authorization Code Specifies whether to print changed authorization codes SMDR Start Time Specifies whether to print calls which have finished before the SMDR was started Group In Out Specifies whether to print group in out information
125. to 2500 ms Door Ring Detect Time 10 ms Sets the ringing detection time for the door phone Enter a value in units of 10 ms 10 to 250 ms Door Ring Time sec Sets the period of time that if a door phone is not answered it is disconnected 1 to 250 sec Long Key Detect Time 10 ms Sets the Long key detection time 0 to 1200 ms Long Key Repeat Time 10 ms Sets the time that this interval is regarded as a new Long key press while the Long key is held down continuously 0 to 1200 ms Redial Digit Display Specifies whether to display the redial or speed dial numbers starting from the first number when there are twelve 21 or more numbers Redial Review Dial SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Specifies when the LNR button is pressed whether to redial the number immediately or to show the dialed number and allow the user select whether to redial it or not 247 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description Original Dial Save Specifies whether to send the call logs for the normally processed calls only or all the call logs to the phone large LCD Pair Camp No Ring When set to Off and the receiving station is CAMP On this option uses the off hook service if the station is busy and if the paired station has not rung Intercom Auto Hold Specifies whether to activate auto hold if the DT or DS key is pr
126. to 5 SVMi Ring Back Sets whether to use the ring back service using the VMS message Collect Call Sets whether to use the collect call function Viewing and Changing the Port Common Data Select 2 Configuration gt 2 4 Port Configuration gt 2 4 2 Port Common Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the port common data Change the port common data 4 Save the changes 92 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide CLI Send Number Sets the send number caller number to be sent by station trunk when calling an ISDN trunk You can set four 4 send numbers by station trunk When sending through the R2MFC the first send number is used and up to sixteen 16 digits can be entered in a send number Viewing and Changing the CLI Send Numbers Select 2 Configuration gt 2 4 Port Configuration gt 2 4 3 CLI Send Number from the Tree Viewer 2 View the CLI send numbers Change the CLI send numbers 4 Save the changes Station Port Configuration Station Data Sets the call pickup group branch group display sender information option ring back service and individual speed dial block by station Items to be Specified Item Description Pickup Group Sets the call pickup group for the station 1 to 99 When a call pickup group is set for a station the calls received by other phones can be picked up by the station Branch Group Sets
127. to a caller when the subscriber has blocked their calls By default this is I m sorry that party is not available Error prompt The prompt that plays in an error condition By default this is I m sorry that call did not go through Accept call This is the digit a called party enters to indicate they will accept the call during a screened transfer Allowable digits are 0 9 The prompt indicates the prompt that will play to the called party to remind them of the digit selection Redirect call This is the digit a called party enters to indicate they wish to redirect a screened call to another extension Allowable digits are 0 9 The prompt indicates the prompt that will play to the called party to remind them of the digit selection Reject call This is the digit a called party enters to indicate they wish to reject a call If the call is rejected the blocked greeting is played to the caller The prompt indicates the prompt that will play to the called party to remind them of the digit selection Realtime Greeting This is the digit a called party enters to indicate they wish to record real time greeting After the recording it will be played to the caller SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Hold Controls EClass Block TEMPLATE ECL General Prompts Hold Controls OutCall Call Director Maximum hold queue size Hold Contro
128. to direct it to other blocks depending on the type of call The MODE Block receives call information from the phone system speaks a salutation optional and then transfers control to the next Block A mode can have only one MODE Block Every Call reaching the OfficeServ System is identifies by a call code A call code consists of 2 letters The first letter will indicate how the call arrived and will be D Direct Call A Forward All B Forward Busy N Forward No Answer or T Manual Transfer The second letter indicates the type of call and will be T trunk or S Station OfficeServ System can direct the call to a different Block for each different Call code OfficeServ System applications may contain up to 99 different modes although this many are seldom necessary each corresponding to a particular style of organizational operation As the organization changes its behavior by changing work shifts scheduling inventory and other special events or conditions OfficeServ System automatically adjusts the Call Routing Solutions required to meet callers needs 402 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Call Code Processor Mode Block Day Call Code Processor Prompt Call Code Processor Label Name Day Mode Number Call Code NEXT Call Code Processor Action Target Name DEFAULT DT DS AT AS BT BS NT NS
129. to use the SRTP protocol Viewing and Changing the IP Phone Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 7 Virtual Port Configuration gt 2 7 1 ITP Information from the Tree Viewer 112 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 2 View the IP phone information 3 Change the IP phone information 4 Save the changes SIP Phone Information Displays the information for the registered standard SIP terminals Parameter User ID User ID for the terminal Password User password for the terminal Hold Tone When calling using a SIP terminal this field sets whether to use the hold sound on the system or the SIP terminal itself as the hold sound Call Wait When a second call is received by the SIP terminal this field sets whether to allow it to be received without processing it as a call received when busy Hold Tone Types System Tone Uses the hold sound and the ring back tone in one of a variety of ring back states callback etc as the system tone If the system tone is used for calls such as SIP terminal calls or IP phone calls where MGI is not used an MGI is assigned to enable the hold tone to be heard WIP Tone Uses the tone from the SIP terminal itself Requirements In the 2 1 4 License Key the SIP Stack License key must be entered and the number of SIP phones must be set in the SIP Allowed field SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 113 Error Use the Ho
130. unique system will offer the unique id Duration Select the duration for conference Repeat Select the repeat type of Attendees Input the wanted channel count Owner Station Input the owner station id for the conference Available Channel Display the max channel according to condition Attendee List If click the panel will be displayed the lt Select Conference Member gt window Send Invitation If you have party list you can send the invitation Password Input the password for conference Early Entrance Determine if early entrance is allowed Recording Determine if recording is allowed Paging Determine if early paging is allowed Page Group If you enabled the paging input the page group index Greeting Prompt You can upload personal greeting message file SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide lt Making the Attendee List gt 1 Le J Click the Select button in Conference Reservation window After input the phone number or name click the Search button After check the member for invitation click the Invite Selected button a If you want to add all member click the Invite All button b If can t search the member input the member s information in Attendee List then click the Add button If complete to add member selection click the OK button
131. useful when performing the optimal route selection Trunk Group Assignment Modes Item Description TYPE Specify the type of trunk group This option have 7 kinds of values MIXED TRUNK default Associated in various kind of trunk channel NORMAL TRK ISDN TRK SIP TRK H 323 TRUNK SPNET TRUNK QSIG PRI MODE Select the way searching idle channel of trunk MEMBER Trunk channel member You can input trunk channel corresponding trunk type But in case of MIXED TRUNK type It s possible to input different kind of trunk channel SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 141 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing and Changing the Trunk Group Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 1 Grouping gt 4 1 2 Trunk Groups from the Tree Viewer 2 View the trunk group settings 3 Change the trunk group settings 4 Save the changes Page Groups Sets the members to which internal external announcements are to be announced and sets whether each announcement area can be the destination of internal area announcements In case of the internal announcement you can specify up to 99 members In case of the external announcement up to 8 members The announcement area numbers 1 to 4 are used as the internal announcement areas The announcement area numbers 5 to 8 are used as the external announcement areas For a whole internal announcement or a whole internal extern
132. 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 7 1 Display User Log 8 7 2 Display Error Log 8 7 3 Activity Log B 7 4 ShutDownvM ry 8 7 5 Subscriber Import 8 7 6 Backup and Restore 8 7 7 Clear Report Count 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode Et TES Repa 5 fal 2 al x a e la a u Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 37 03 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 301 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 302 Subscriber Import The Subscriber Import provides an easy way to import large lists of subscribers into OfficeServ System from any existing text file Use an existing text file with all employees listed to quickly create an import file and follow the instructions provided by OfficeServ System in the dialog screens OfficeServ Device Manager See System File Options Util Tab Help ra ES D amp s a Port Base Card Base Page Search i 8 7 3 Activity Log 8 7 4 ShutDownVM 8 7 5 Subscriber Import Submit Functional VMS Group 0 2 Configuration a 3 Call Routing Import Text File 4 Group amp Table 4 Il gt 5 Features Extension blocks only 6 System Control gt Mailbox blocks only B VMAA You can create
133. A Auto Answer Settings 1 a si 4 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 2 Trunk DISA Auto Answer from the Tree Viewer View the DISA Auto Answer settings Change the DISA Auto Answer settings Save the changes DID Ringing When direct dialing a station externally this function changes the number dialed the station number selected based on the number dialed and the name of the number dialed Items to be Specified Item Description Incoming digits Up to 16 digits can be entered for calls received externally If only some of these digits change and the others are identical enter for the changeable digits For example if the digits are 201 202 and 203 enter only 20 or 2 MOH BGM When an incoming trunk call is on hold this option sets the hold sound to be used when giving a different hold sound for calls received externally If this option is set to None the hold sound set for the trunk will be used Ring Plan Dest 1 Dest 6 Sets the station group trunk group to be received for each of the six 6 ring modes B means received digits are deleted starting with the first digit and deleting the number specified in the Delete Count with the remaining digits being received at the end Delete Count Sets how many digits are ignored in the digits received externally before the Ring Plan is referred to Max call When calls are received simultaneou
134. A14 DUAL PWR Error SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd A dual power error has occurred 219 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 220 Alarm Name Continued Definition MJA15 DUAL PWR Recovery The dual power error has recovered MJA16 D PWR FAN Error A dual power fan error has occurred MJA17 D PWR FAN Recov The dual power fan error has recovered MJA18 PoE PWR Error A PoE power error has occurred MJA19 PoE PWR Recovery The PoE power error has recovered MJA20 PoE FAN Error A PoE power fan error has occurred MJA21 PoE FAN Recovery The PoE power fan error has recovered MJA22 PoE Battry Error A PoE power battery error has occurred MJA23 PoE Battry Recov The PoE power battery error has recovered MJA24 MAIN PWR Error A main power battery error has occurred MJA25 MAIN PWR Recovery The main power battery error has recovered MJA26 GW Connected The inter SCM GW link is connected MJA27 GW Disconnected The inter SCM GW link is disconnected MJB01 HDLC Comm Error An error has occurred in communication with the LCP MJB02 Memory Alarm An MCP RAM area diagnostics error has occurred MJBO06 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data IPC Queue type MCP LAN MCP SCP MCP LCP1 MCP LCP2 MJB07 IPC MSGQ Under IPC TX queue full re
135. AN Parameter Values Select 5 Features gt 5 3 Wireless LAN gt 5 3 1 WLAN Parameter from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current WLAN parameter values Change the WLAN parameter values 4 Save the changes 200 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide WLAN IP Pool This menu is used when viewing the IP list assigned to WLAN or when creating a new IP list This IP address is automatically assigned to WiFi phone during a new registration procedure If the IP address is already assigned the assigned terminal number will be shown in the USED field Also the MMC is used to set MAC addresses in the terminal in order to use the wireless LAN not yet implemented Viewing and Changing the WLAN IP Pool Values iL Select 5 Features gt 5 3 Wireless LAN gt 5 3 3 WLAN IP Pool from the Tree Viewer View the current WLAN IP Pool values Change the WLAN IP Pool values Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 201 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Volume Control System Wide Volume Controls the volume or call sensitivity of the phones installed in the system T Switch Gain Controls the volume or call sensitivity of the phones installed in the system There are 121 T Switch gain connection types which control call sensitivity When connecting between trunks this is applied only if 5 4 3 Trunk Gain is set to 0 T S
136. Block to go to after a response has been recorded and confirmed if Digit to confirm response is set This should be the block containing the next question 416 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Activity Calls OfficeServ System shows the total number of calls this Block has processed during the period specified in the following range Query Block TEMPLATE GRY General Call information Call Director Activity From To Activity Calls Abandoned NO Response ESCAPE Count Error Count NEXT Count Item Description From To Indicates the period from the date when the Report Counters were last cleared till the current date Applies to all call counts in this report Calls The total number of calls that this block has processed during the period specified in the following range Abandoned The number of callers who hung up during the time they were connected to this Block prior to completing the Block s function and what percentage of the total calls this number represents NO Response The number of callers who did not record a response or make any entry while connected to this Block and what percentage of the total calls this number represents ESCAPE Count The number of callers who pressed the Escape digit while connected to this block and what percentage of the total calls this number r
137. Blocks generally are used for Multi Tenant environments Number The number representing this LIST It may not be the same as the Number of any other LIST or Mailbox with in a particular subscriber group Extension The name of the Extension that belongs to this list In many applications this parameter will be left blank This parameter s primary use is for an Extension block that is used as a Department extension that when unanswered and the caller leaves a message will actually leave the message for the List The message will then be distributed to all the members of the List Block Mclass The name of the mailbox class of service that defines operating characteristics for this List Language This is a language option You may select from any installed language and from that point on the LIST will respond to the authorized owner in the language selected Authorized owner means a user who has entered a valid password If the Extension parameter is filled in the OfficeServ System will try to resolve these fields to a single value make them match If conflicting information is contained in these fields the Extension Block has priority and the LIST Block will be automatically changed to match This selection is based on the order of the defined languages in page 3 of the System Wide Parameters If the languages are to be reordered added to or changed in page 3 of the System Wide Parameters then this field should
138. CHOUT Check out Hotel function CHOICE Displays the SPOT Choice information SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Function that can Continued Description be specified P CID Selects the CID function CONF Conference CONFERENCE CONP Displays the networking name CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY CR Records the call to embedded IPUMS voice mailbox CALL RECORD CREDIT Checks and changes the charge at which the room is available Hotel function CS Standby status of the auto call distribution group CALL STATUS CSNR Saves the caller ID in the SNR buffer CID SAVED NUMBER REDIAL DGPALM Sets the alarm time for multiple stations DICT Memo DICTATION DIR Directory dial DIRECTORY DIVERT Switches to the secretary DLOCK Door phone ring answering DOOR UNLOCk DND Do not disturb DO NOT DISTURB DNDO Ignores the Do not disturb setting OND OVERRIDE DP Direct pick up DIRECT PICK UP DROP Drops and returns the opposite call when forwarding a call CALL DROP DS Direct station selection button DSS KEY DT Direct trunk selection button DTS KEY EP Call pick up of an established call ESTABLISHED CALLPICK UP EXTEND CNF24 MEET ME CONFERENCE EXTEND EXTMIC Selects the external or internal microphone in a phone to which the external microphone can be connected EXTERNAL MIC FAUTO Forced auto answer by the caller FORCED AU
139. Co Ltd 115 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Numbering Plan Numbering Plan Changes the dial numbers function numbers for calling stations trunks station groups and trunk groups Cabinet Type Cabinet Type Description Virtual Displays the phone type and number of the virtual station Station Group Displays the dial number and group number of the station group Trunk Group Displays the dial number and group number of the trunk group Features Displays the dial numbers to call a function Network LCR Displays the networking dial number and serial number Below are the function types for which the dial number can be changed Function Type Description ACCT Charge Account LCR Optimal route selection Auto Route Selection OPER Attendant calling Operator AUTH Grade change code Authorized Prefix FAUTO Forced auto answer by the caller Forced Auto Answer BARGE Barge in Barge in Override BOSS Boss and secretary CBK Call Back FWD Call Forward CAMP Station reservation Station Camp On CONF Conference DIR Directory dial Directory DIRPK Direct pick up DND Do not disturb DLOCK Door phone ring answering Door Unlock FLASH Trunk flash Flash 116 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued
140. Common Data CLI Send Number SLI Data Station Data Station On Off Customer On Off Data Preset Forward and Hot Line of the virtual SLT Use the Prev and Next buttons to move from item to item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Virtual SLT Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 2 Virtual SLT from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the Cabinet Slot 3 View the virtual SLT information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item 4 Change the virtual SLT information 5 Save the changes Desktop ITP Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number ITP Information DLI Data Station Data Station On Off Customer On Off Data Preset Forward and Hot Line of the Desktop ITP Use the Prev and Next buttons to move from item to item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Desktop ITP Information Select 2 Configuation gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 3 Desktop ITP from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the Cabinet Slot SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 87 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Zz 4 5 View the Desktop ITP information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the Desktop ITP information Save the changes
141. E TAT A ATT 42 Package Update irnia r cies a a a a ieee 42 Pile Gontrolizss 2c02 ee esshen E E E 43 DB Import Export 0 ctsitie ieee Ret ei eh ee ed 46 DB GompariSOn e3241itieeieeasatatliteshctesieal a da acraevsteats teases a R EE a s 47 DB Conversion si cnen naan e ea ied a a e eas 50 E E A 51 Cose Al E e aE 51 Help MNU cccccssceneseecenesseeeeeesseeeeesseneesaseneeeessneeeasseeeesseeeeeasenessaseeeeeeaseeessaseneeeaseeeeeeneeeeees 52 Help TOPICS eihs iste shevine a a ae aa he ete dae adhe ewan ee 52 About programi zeiei erie i st eron aree paa Eae aoaaa coeds aAa aa Ehia ieia 53 CHAPTER 4 Using Page Screen 54 Ee a A A A EE 54 Page Screen Cons ciei eerie eta eaa ant th haan eee 55 Page Programming CXAaMPle cccecsseeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaseeeeeasseeeeesseeeeeaseneesaseeneeeneeeeees 56 Port Bas i 2hietwi i Ris a cays a Re tae ee ee 58 Gard Baseon ascites a a e a k diss e iads E AEn e 59 ETR A TEE A E E T 61 CHAPTER 5 Call Server Programming 64 GonfiguratiO N so ccaiccc ho cisccedecceescei sicevedectececesttevederesadcuvedenscdesvoncesteassatueecleesaecestsdvacendedeenate 64 System Configuratio isoissa isses a irena eead i asinine 64 Cabinet Config ration scine i o a 73 Virtual Cabinet ienee nai nie vd A EE Sete 86 10 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Port GOntiguiration ssi ranea iaa aE aes ad A E EA 91 Station Port Gonfiguratio N seregei ea a rea E ia a 93 Trunk
142. Electronics Co Ltd 155 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 156 Continued Function Description INTERCOM Station call MESSAGE Message MM PAGE Announcement forwarding NEW CALL New trunk call OHVAED Receives off hook announcement OHVAING Performs off hook announcement ONEA2 Emulates trunk call OPERATOR Calls attendant OUT TRSF Forwards to trunk OVERRIDE Barge in Override PAGE 0 Broadcasts in area 0 PAGE 1 Broadcasts in area 1 PAGE 2 Broadcasts in area 2 PAGE 3 Broadcasts in area 3 PAGE 4 Broadcasts in area 4 PAGE 5 Broadcasts in area 5 PAGE 6 Broadcasts in area 6 PAGE 7 Broadcasts in area 7 PAGE 8 Broadcasts in area 8 PAGE 9 Broadcasts in area 9 PAGE Broadcasts in area PGM MSG Answer phone message PICKUP Call pick up PRB Privacy clear call confluence REM HOLD Remote hold RNG PLAN Transfers ring mode SECURE Rejects Barge in Override SET RLOC Exchanges the station subscriber information SSPD TOL Restricts speed dial call STN LOCK The station is locked SYS SPD Common speed dial SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Function Description TRK AREC Records the trunk call to the SVM 800 voice mailbox automatically TRSF RCV Sets whether to receive a call sent and forwarded from the external UNCO CNF Hold a
143. Electronics Co Ltd 293 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Important Note Mail sent with this Reply To address should be blocked by the IT administrator or sent to a inbox that dumps it s data at during preventative maintenance Keep in mind that Voice Messages sent by public callers cannot be replied to via e mail The only purpose for this parameter is because of the requirements dictated by some Mail Servers or IT department policies E MAIL ADDRESS SYNTAX An e mail address can be entered a couple of ways The traditional e mail syntax is username mailserverdomain domainsuffix domain suffix com net org etc in this case the name entered as the Mailbox label name will be displayed in the Inbox From field if the voice message was sent subscriber to subscriber In some cases the number of characters in a person s name is longer than the label name length in a Mailbox Block Until now no one saw that name so it didn t matter If you do not want the Recipient to see the label name as it is typed you can use the following syntax Firstname Lastname lt username mailserverdomain domainsuffix gt OR Departmentname lt username mailserverdomain domainsuffix gt This applies to all fields that accept an e mail address System Wide Parameters Report amp Reply To e Mailbox Block From Deliver MSG amp Notify Only TIME ZONE
144. Features gt 5 14 3 Incoming CID DISA Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Incoming CID DISA Option settings 3 View the Incoming CID DISA Option settings 4 Save the changes ISDN R2 Trunk Options Specifies whether to use the ISDN R2 Trunk functions and changes the system counter and system time variables for the ISDN R2 Trunk functions ISDN R2 Trunk Option Items Item Description ISDN Prog Conn Specifies whether to process the ISDN Progress message DTMF to SO Specifies whether to send the DTMF to the SO station ISDN Inter Digit Time sec SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the maximum time before the next number dial when sending a call to the ISDM trunk BRI or PRI 1 to 15 sec 243 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description TSW CONN Delay Time sec Sets the period of time to wait until the call path is attached to the trunk when a trunk incoming call is forwarded to another trunk 0 to 10 sec Trunk Monitor Specifies whether to disconnect the call immediately or connect to a station which uses the barge in override function when the barge in override function is used for a trunk call and the original caller disconnects 3 1K Audio without HLC Specifies whether to allow ISDN incoming calls when their type is the 3 1K Audio without HLC Viewing and Changing the ISDN R2 T
145. G Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Reporting Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the Report Counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Calls The total number of calls serviced by an application type One caller accessing more than one application such as Voicemail and Fax Applications two applications counts as two callers Minutes Total minutes callers were connected to an application type Connected The total percentages of calls connected to an application type Callers Application A bar chart of the different applications and the percentages of calls Call each application serviced IntraAppls is Intra application which Distribution represents the callers who accessed more than one type of application SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 309 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here To Subscribers System File Options Util Tab Help la a eja a al D amp amp 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode E 8 9 View System Report 8 9 1 By Application B92To Subscribers 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 4 By Call Code 8 9 5 By Hour 8 9 6 By
146. I Data is set to Used can set and use a conference group Viewing and Changing the Conference Group Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 11 Group Conference from the Tree Viewer 2 View the conference group settings 3 Change the conference group settings 4 Save the changes Large LCD Options Sets the options for phone that has a large LCD DS 5012L Items to be Specified Item Description Screen Type Sets whether to display Calendar or Information on the LCD screen in the IDLE state DssKey Type Sets whether to display the phone number or station name on the DS button screen Dial Mode Sets the dialing mode of the phone Enbloc Overlab Screen Mode Sets whether to display the soft menu or AOM button first on the bottom of the LCD when changed to the busty state Calendar Sets whether to display the previous screen status soft menu AOM button screen or the Calendar or Information screen in the IDLE state AOM Cursor Sets the position of the cursor when displaying the AOM button screen 0 to 99 Prev Position Video Mode Sets the video start mode of the video IP phone If set to Auto Start when a call is connected to Video IP phone the video screen is displayed automatically If set to Manual start you can select whether to display video using the buttons of the video IP phone Auto Start Manual Start Video Ring
147. JE10 SVMi Restart The SVMi 20E board has restarted MJE11 SVMi Halt The SVMi card has been halted MJE12 SVMi Down The SVMi card has failed MJE13 MGI Self Restart The MGI board has restarted itself MNF Minor Error Minor error to be stored in the alarm buffer SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 267 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 268 ID Alarm Name Continued Description MNFO1 Card Out No card has been inserted into any of the slots Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF02 Card In A card is inserted into one of the slots Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF04 Trunk Fault A faulty trunk which cannot provide the service has been detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF05 Trunk Recovery A trunk which can provide the service has been detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNFO06 Trunk Disconnect A faulty trunk which cannot provide the service has been detected by the external occupation test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF07 Trunk Connect A trunk which can provide the service has been detected by the external occupation test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF10 E1 Out Of Srv The E1 line is out of service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF 11 E1 I
148. L General Public Caller Interface OutCall Prompts E Mail Gateway Call Director Wait for caller entry Public Caller Interface Retries if invalid entry Repeat prompts no entry Record silence timeout Digit to initiate fax receipt Digit for operator assistance Digit to skip greeting ol o o s spy a Digit to escape Digit log on as a user Item Description Wait for This is the number of seconds from 1 to 99 that the OfficeServ caller entry System waits for an entry during the message editing and message retrieval operation The time begins at the end of speaking the prompt that requests an entry from the caller Upon entry of the first digit the time is reset so that the caller has the full Wait for Caller Entry time to enter another digit Retries if This specifies the number of times from 0 to 99 a caller may re invalid entry enter his password if an invalid password was entered This also applies if a caller makes an invalid entry while recording editing a message Repeat The number of times from 1 to 99 to repeat prompts while the prompts no caller is recording editing a message If the caller does not respond entry to the prompts after this number of attempts the OfficeServ System will go to the next Block specified by lt Pub Msg gt Record This is the amount of time in seconds that OfficeServ System will silence list
149. LAN 7100 165 213 89 41 09 12 03 V4 46 OfficeServ7100 KOREA 2010 03 13 14 49 32 Port Base The Port Base tab consists of Functional Mode and KMMC Mode In Functional Mode the page names are displayed And in KMMC Mode the KMMC Numbers are displayed Port Base Card Base Page Search Port Base Card Base Page Search p m Kaun 2 Configuration 1x 2 1 System Configuration 2x 2 2 Cabinet Configuration 3xx 2 3 Virtual Cabinet 4XX 2 4 Port Configuration 5x 2 4 1 Port Information 500 2 4 2 Port Common Data 5 14 6 UCD Forward Wakeup Options 2 4 3 Send CLI Number 501 2 5 Station Port Configuration 502 2 6 Trunk Port Configuration 503 2 7 Virtual Port Configuration 504 2 8 Numbering Plan 505 3 Call Routing 506 4 Group amp Table 507 5 Features 510 6 System Control 511 9 Conference 512 515 6xx 7XX 8xx Oxx 58 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l Card Base The Card Base tab displays the structure of the current system Click on System Cabinet Card to display the following screen Port Base Page Search _ Page Search Cabinett 16DLI2 Unlike the Port Base Card Base only displays the port corresponding to the given card The corresponding menu is also displayed on the upper section of the screen ajal elj lala TAN aan Tavi CE 2008113 150650
150. LATE MBX General Authorization Alerts MAMI amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director Activity General VMS Group Label Name TEMPLATE MBX Number Extension Mclass Language Mailbox Controls Announce only mailbox Send broadcast MSG allowed User LIFO message ordering New message beep s Public Yes Directory User Yes Subscriber password esse Retention days remaining days 0 Item Description VMS Group VMS group Label Name The name of this block A Block name can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long including spaces A block name may not be the same as another Block name MBX EXT or LIST Numbers may not be duplicated within the same group OfficeServ System stores the subscriber name in either lastname firstname or firstname lastname When entering the subscriber name it is suggested you follow one for mat or the other for the entire application If the name is entered as firstname lastname OfficeServ System will NOT automatically re sort it to lastname firstname but the subscriber would still be able to be accessed correctly from the directory However by mixing and matching formats with in an application would cause the list of blocks to appear to be out of order This format lastname firstname vs firstname lastname is only important because the directory
151. LI Fault A faulty SLI board which cannot provide service is detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF 19 SLI Recovery An SLI board which can provide service is detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF28 LAN Printer Err An LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP board Alarm Data Data Type SMDR MNF29 LAN Printer Rec SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd The LAN printer error that occurred in the MCP board is cleared Alarm Data Data Type SMDR 223 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 224 Continued Alarm Name Definition MNF30 SPNet Link Error An SPNet link connection error has occurred Alarm Data Link ID Index of 3 3 1 System Link MNF31 SPNet Send Error An SPNet message sending error has occurred Alarm Data xx yyyy zz xx SPNet TRK index yyyy SPNet TRK No zz MMC 820 Link ID index MNF32 SVMi Ready The SVMi Card Ready has started MNF33 SVMi Request The SVMi Card Request has started MNF34 SVMi Ready End The SVMi Card Ready has ended MNF35 SVMi Request End The SVMi Card Request has ended MNF36 SVMi HDD Alarm An SVMi Card HDD alarm has occurred MNF37 Manual Reset Req Card Manual Rest Request MNF88 Card Active Card Active notification Viewing and Changing the Alarm Key Settings Select 5 Features
152. LIP table in 2 4 3 CLI Send Number to use when sending a call Channel Select Sets the channel to use when sending a call Use Channel Sets the number of available channels SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 109 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description Auto Time Update Sets whether to update the system time automatically for ISDN calls When an exact time value is transmitted from an ISDN trunk the system time is updated if this option is On Channel Any When set to Yes an available channel is selected from the Channel card terminal regardless of the PRI the subscriber selected and the call is sent through the selected channel When set to No the call is sent through the channel that the subscriber selected Incoming Normal Connects a received call to the designated Mode representative number DDI Connects a received call directly to the receiving number Requirements Check the following items before setting the PRI For the TEPRI board set the number 2 jumper on the TEPRI board to PRI mode For the TEPRI2 board set the number 2 jumper of the module that corresponds to the port to be used in the two 2 TEPRI2 board jumper modules to PRI mode After these are set reset as in 6 3 1 Pre Install Reset for the settings to be validated Viewing and Changing the PRI Trunk Data L 110 S
153. Ltd All rights reserved Information in this Guide is proprietary to SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd No information contained here may be copied translated transcribed or duplicated by any form without the prior written consent of SAMSUNG Information in this Guide is subject to change without notice SAN ELECTRONICS
154. N NOTE If the applicable pointer is not set or the Supervision parameter is set to none the OfficeServ System will go on hook after dialing This is a typical situation for transferring callers to the Console for assistance 330 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Directory Block A Directory Block defines necessary information about how the system Dial by Name Directory will function Note that in order for the directory feature to work the included subscribers must have recorded their names and entered DTMF values for them This information includes the maximum number of digits the caller may enter to search for an individual s name the maximum number of names matching the caller s entry and also whether or not to speak the extension number of the matching name to the called party The directory will search on extensions first if no match is found then it will search mailboxes Search Information Directory Block TEMPLATE DIR Search Information Prompts Call Director Label Name TEMPLATE DIR Input Controls Maximum entry digits Wait for first digit Wait for subsequent digits Repeat prompts if no entry Retries ifno match Search Controls Maximum number of matches Search based on first name Include unnamed objects Speak name on exit Speak key value on exit Verify before exit Search Targets Type Gp T
155. NU Input Processor Operating Parameters Take INPUT fram Store INPUT in ENTRY Digit Assignment Administration Escape Caller ENTRY Options and Other INPUT Parameters Description 4 Description 2 Description 3 Description Prompt f are 4 Description 5 Description 6 Description Invalid condition prompt 0009 Description Request password prompt 0011 Description Maximum caller entry digits 4 Wait for first entry digits 3 P te a Key Value Append to KEY register Store KEY Value in 394 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Description Label Name The name of this block A Block name can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block name may not be the same as another Block name Take INPUT from The value which the IVM uses to search INPUT values in the input processor on Menu Input Processor page ENTRY If a menu is expecting DTMF digits from the caller this should be set to ENTRY KEY The search is based on input that has been stored in the KEY register that existed upon entry to the current menu block After all lt TRANSLATIONS gt operations have been performed and a match has been found the new search value is stored in KEY register for later use CID FWDID TRUNK These are used in the menu blocks
156. OAS card s in the system Viewing and Changing the OAS Card Configuration 1 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 14 OAS Card from the Tree Viewer View the OAS Card information Change the OAS Card information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MPS Card Provides network configuration of the MPS card s in the system Slot Information Sets the MPS card parameters Slot Information Items MPS Parameters MGI Parameter Description IP Version Specifies MPS IP version lpv4 lpv6 IP Address Specifies the IP address for the MPS card Subnet Mask Specifies the IP subnet mask This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices subnet that are within direct reach of the MPS without having to go through the designated network IP gateway Gateway Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local subnet IP Type Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network Local RTP Port Start Specifies local rtp port The default value is 30000 and the value range is between 10000 and 60000 Public IP Address 1 Public IP Address is only used for VoIP signaling protocols in a NAT network NAT system binds IP Address with Public IP and processes a voice stream Public RTP Port 1 Public RTP Port wh
157. OM field A question mark may be used as the INPUT value to apply to a set of caller entries An INPUT value of lt 2 gt will match any 3 digit entry beginning with the digit 2 An INPUT value of 4257 will apply to all 4 digit entries beginning with the digit 4 ending with the digits 57 and having any value SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 399 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here in the second digit The Wild Card is placed in the INPUT value to indicate that any digit entered in that position will qualify as a match The character may also be used in a translation to indicate that the translated value should include the character which is in the position of the corresponding in the pointer INPUT value A dot is used in the translation value to indicate that the corresponding in the INPUT value should be discarded When searching for a match to a caller entry or for a particular pointer OfficeServ System follows a consistent sequence MENU Blocks require a more elaborate search than other Blocks However the pattern is consistent It looks for the most specific match A direct digit match on an INPUT value takes precedence over a wild card match Also a wild card pointer with a lesser number of characters will precede one with a greater number A match on a pointer in the current mode of operation takes precedence o
158. Options Item Description DN1 Extension No The first dial number of the station DN1 Trunk No The first dial number of the trunk DN2 Extension No The second dial number of the station DN2 Trunk No The first dial number of the trunk CID Number Whether to provide the caller ID Separator Separator symbol Disconnect Signal Disconnection signal Call Type Direct Call Direct calls All Forward Call Calls which are always forwarded Busy Forward Call Calls which are forwarded if busy No Answer Forward Call Calls which are forwarded if there is no answer Recall Calls recalled Direct Trunk Call Direct trunk calls Overflow Call Overflow calls DID Call Internal direct calls Message Call Message calls Progress Dial Tone Dial tone Tone Busy Tone Busy tone Ringback Tone Ringback tone DND Tone DND tone Handset Answer Tone Handset answer tone Speaker Answer Tone 228 Speaker answer tone SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Voice Mailbox VM and Auto Attendant AA Options 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 9 Voice Mail gt 5 9 3 VMAA Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Voice Mailbox VM and Auto Attendant AA options 3 Change the Voice Mailbox VM and Auto Attendant AA options 4 Save the changes Call Costing Trunk Rate S
159. PNET i e when the IP network has a defect This should be a trunk but not a VoIP trunk Max Count When the number of digits in the Max Count is entered the call is set up No MGI Sets whether to use MGI for IP calls Requirements The link ID of the other system must not be entered in the 3 3 1 System Link and the digits entered in the Access Number and Tel Number items must be entered in the LCR table SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the System Node Information Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 3 Networking gt 3 3 3 Extra System Link ID from the Tree Viewer 2 View the system node information 3 Change the system node information 4 Save the changes Networking Options Sets the various options needed for networking Items to be Specified Item Description Ext No Sets whether to include the station number in the name field of the Q Sig message CID Number Sets whether to send the trunk CID number with the node number attached when sending it to the voice mail card SPNet Digit Send Sets the SPNET dialing type and MCP or MGI signaling Incoming Call Auto Timer When set to Off the call time will not be displayed for the networking station call Optimize Time sec Sets the time when the optimal route for a call is found and the route is reconnected after the call is set up through Q Sig 0 to 250 sec Dial Mode Set
160. Port onfig ratioN se enssins era a ade itai adad Nei 102 Virtual Port Configuration ienie Gee E a Es ies 112 Numbering Plan serae r einai NAA 116 Call ROUTING wisccccticistencicctecesteraeviredtentcuictd ccteet bececute vaceeicn ue ccedancdedcvvnusenndieeceesueceaumuesacdscabeecad 121 Qutgoing LOR dsan e ein hes Ain a A sinew cle elie 121 INCOMING aeiiae Pe catet ee costes aa a Bean Be dag tee aa niin a deel 127 N wOrkING sssecec ncctchensctteecsancepidnctiadeast sce sbei paddunaeecevalsensuadcea tedachagptasdeaasbagiasaningadaeie 134 GrOUp Be Tales ioe as ccc ste cea gncce sect nt cnntaucesuughnuadeuscdecstuesstuesest T TET 139 GlOUPING S tates Ane Ae ea ee as oe ces ei 139 Station Pairing NRE oA eee iiss ie ee Ne oe Deer aerated iets 144 Ring ma te Ta EE A ei ee eae 147 System Speed Dials ie eaa aae e id epee a aea 149 Account Authorize COdC cee ceeececeneeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeteaeeeeaeeteaeeesaeeceaeeesaeeseaeetatessaeeeates 150 ULADI E E tette haces iia ee tate Annee 152 Class of Service inime tien elise arin ain eE ETEA A de senescent 154 Toll REStriCtlOn iiini ein ha eee eee ek 159 Key Programming 2 icsticscecseesepedianstdcacteceseieessisvaveccuvedoes seiienacadcadptandeazsbastssassajesnetes 163 r A E A 176 Cal Restriction a ea ar eenaa aan e a aa eaa a a a wean 176 eE OE E TRA EROAA ATASE 179 MEEA N EE E Ana A et el et eh Se 199 Voluime Gontrol ais te ea tices tse ei eer et aed 202 System Control ts 8 diag dees ait ded
161. Q Under IPC TX queue full recovery has occurred in the MCPz2 Alarm data IPC Queue type MCP LAN MCP SCP MCP LCP1 MCP LCP2 MJC DSP Error System DSP Error MJCO1 DTMF Fault An error has occurred in the DTMF resources of the system Alarm Data Location of the DSP to receive the DTMF MJC02 Tone Fault An error has occurred in the tone resources of the system Alarm Data Location of the DSP to receive the tone MJCO3 CID DSP Fault CID DSP Fault MJCO6 AC Pwr Loss AC Pwr Loss MJCO7 AC Pwr Recovery AC Pwr Recovery MJC08 Low Battery Low Battery MJCO9 Low Battery Rec Low Battery Rec MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI board has restarted Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJC17 WLI Block The system has detected an error with the WLI SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd board and has prohibited its use Alarm data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy 265 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 266 Continued ID Alarm Name Description MJD DTRK Error ISDN or E1 board error MJDO01 Sync Failure The clock of the TEPRI board was out of sync MJD02 Sync Recovery The out of sync clock error on the TEPRI board is now resolved MJDO3 Red Alarm The PCM carrier of the TEPRI board is not detected for 250 ms Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD04 Red Alarm Rec The PCM carrier of the TEPRI board has been detected Alarm Data Cabi
162. Recall Pickup settings and their timer settings Change the current Transfer Recall Pickup settings and their timer settings Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Confirm Disconnect NoAction Timer Changes the system time variables related to the Confirm Disconnect No Action timers which are specified and operated per system Confirm Disconnect No Action Time Variables Time Variable Description Alert Tone Time 100 ms Specifies the period of time for which the alert tone is maintained 100 to 2500 ms Confirm Tone Time 100 ms Sets the period of time for the confirm tone to be used Enter a value in units of 100 ms 100 to 250 ms Page Tone Time 100 ms Sets the period of time for which a confirm tone rings when hearing an announcement Enter a value in units of 100 ms 100 to 2500 ms CRD Tone Interval sec Sets the interval of the tone which is heard when a call recording is performed using the SVMi 20E card 0 to 250 sec CO CO Disconnect All Sets the option used to prevent binding of trunks by operating timers for all trunks CO CO Disconnect Time min Specifies the maximum allowable call time between trunks 1 to 250 min Trunk Auto MOH Disconnect Time min When the TRK AUTOMOH option is set to On an incoming trunk call can be answered automatically and an MOH can be connected to it In this case the caller hears
163. Refresh Timer sec 15 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing Reporting 4 Group amp Table Created Staate Calls Total Count Minutes Port Utilization 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscribers 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 4 By Call Code 8 9 5 By Hour 8 9 7 By Day of Week 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen H F BAR 9 Conference a E a Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 49 04 E E Reporting Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the Report Counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Calls The total number of calls that came in on a specific port Total Count The percentage of all calls received on a specific port Minutes The total connect time in minute of all calls on a specific port Port Utilization A listing of the ports and the percentage of calls handled by each port represented by a bar chart 314 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide By Day of Week System File Options Util Tab Help lal a ols D
164. S From the Windows Taskbar click on Start gt Settings gt Control NOTE Panel gt Add Remove Programs 446 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide ABBREVIATION AA AOM BGM BRI CID CLI COS CPU CTI DB DGP DHCP DID DISA DLI DM DND DSP DTMF SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Auto Attendant Add On Module Back Ground Music Basic Rate Interface Caller ID Service Calling Line Identification Class of Service Central Processing Unit Computer Technology Interface Database Digital Phone Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Direct Inward Dialing Direct Inward System Access Digital Line Interface Device Manager Do Not Disturb Digital Signal Processor Dual Tone Multi Frequency 447 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here E ENM Ear and Mouth EPLD Erasable Programming Logic Device FTP File Transfer Protocol HDD Hard Disk Drive ID Identifier IP Internet Protocol ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ITP IP Telephone IVR Interactive Voice Response JRE Java Runtime Environment KMMC Keyset MMC LAN Local Access Network LCD Liquid Crystal Display LCP Local Control Processor LCR Least cost Routing M MAC Media Access Control MCP Main Control Processor MGI Media Gateway Interface MMC Man Machine Code MMS Man Machine Subsystem MOBEX Mobile Extention 448 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Offic
165. SAGE Pointer The MESSAGE pointer may also be specified in the associated ECLASS block However the MESSAGE pointer in this extension block will take precedence NOTE QUE FULL Pointer The lt QUE FULL gt Pointer may also be specified in the associated ECLASS block However the lt QUE FULL gt Pointer in the EXT block will take precedence Activity Extension Block TEMPLATE ExT General Authorization Additional Information Caller Options Processor Call Director Activity From Answered No answer Blocked Rejected Redirected Hold count Abandoned No response Left message Operator Other option Avg hold time in sec To Total Activity 360 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide This page will keep track of this extension blocks activity It contains the following statistics Item Description From To Indicates the period from the date when the Report Counters were last cleared until the current date Applies to all call counts in this report Total Shows the total number of calls this Block has processed during the period specified in the following range Answered The number of calls processed by this Block which were answered by the called party and what percentage of the total calls this number represents No answer The number of calls processed by this Block which encountered a ring
166. Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscribers 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 4 By Call Code 8 9 6 By Port Number 8 9 7 By Day of Week 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S 2010 11 14 PM 5 Reporting Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the report counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Calls The total number of calls that came in during a specific hour Total Count The percentage of all calls received during a specific hour Minutes The total connect time in minutes of all calls during a specific time period Port Utilization A listing of the time periods and their port utilization by percentage By Hour SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 313 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here By Port Number System File Options Util Tab Help lalla als d amp e a la Port Base Card Base Page Search _8 9 6 By Port Number faucionas
167. Sensitivity Control ITP DGP ITP Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT ITP Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK ITP Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK ITP Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP ITP Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP ITP Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 203 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Connection Type Continued Description Tx Rx ITP SVMi ITP Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN ITP Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT ITP Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS ITP Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP ITP Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP DGP VoIP Trunk Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT VoIP Trunk Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK VoIP Trunk Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK VoIP Trunk Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP VoIP Trunk Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP VoIP Trunk Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi VoIP Trunk Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN VoIP Trunk Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT VoIP Trunk Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS VoIP Trunk Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP VoIP Trunk Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Co
168. Specifies the name of meet me member Tel Number Specifies the phone number to call for conference Email Address Specifies the email address to receive the invite mail 432 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 5 Meet Me Members List from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system Email Address Specifies the email address for station users System Selection Items Email Address Specifies the email address for station users Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 6 Email Address from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system CNF 24 Voice Management Display the current prompt files and upload files System Selection Items Card Select the card to manage Language Set Select the language to use Comments Display the description of prompt File Display the prompt file name SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 433 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 1 Conference Admin gt 9 1 7 CNF24 Voice Management from the Tree Viewer 3 Check the current items selected on the system C
169. TO ANSWER FLASH Trunk flash FLASH FWRD Call forward CALL FORWARD SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 165 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Function that can belepeciiled Description GPIK Group pick up GROUP PICK UP HDSET Headset mode HEADSET MODE HLDPK Hold pick up HOLD PICK UP HOLD Hold HOTEL Hotel function IG Whether to include the group or not IN OUT OF GROUP INFDSP Displays the SPOT View information INQIRE Views the caller information for a hold call CID INQUIRE ISPY Checks the call status of other station CID SPY LANREQ Sends a control message to the LAN card LAN REQUEST LISTN Group listening GROUP LISTENING LNR Redial LAST NUMBER REDIAL This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys LOG Searches the last receiving sending call CALL LOG MCONF CNF24 Progressive Conference MGC CNF24 Predefined Conference MJOIN CNF24 Reserved Room Conference Join MACR MACRO MMPA Announcement forward answering MEET ME PAGE ANSWER MMPG Announcement forward MEET ME PAGE MOBEX MOBEX MS Sends a specific sound to the opposite party of a key MANUAL SIGNALING MSG Message MESSAGE This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys MUTE Drops the transmission MUTE This can be specified only if it does not exist
170. Table 286 The Schedule Table determines when the OfficeServ System will automatically change Modes A mode is a set of operating rules for a specific situation like DAY Mode or NIGHT Mode These changes may be based on Port Number Date or Day of Week and Time of Day The Schedule Table contains one record for each scheduled change This selection of modes may be automatically set by this schedule table or manually overridden via a touch tone phone using the MANUAL MODE SELECTION function When a call comes in the schedule table is checked to find out which mode rules to apply to the call session If the entry says DCS AUTO then the OfficeServ System will change between mode 1 Day Mode and Mode 2 Night Mode whenever the phone system changes between Day and Night operation The OfficeServ System selects a mode from this schedule based on an Order of Precedence Schedule table entries which select the mode based on Date takes precedence over Day of Week DOW Each entry defines a start time for that specific mode The mode will continue until the next scheduled start time for a particular port In the example screen shown if an additional entry is made which selects Holiday Mode when Date 12 25 it will take precedence over the other records In other words the OfficeServ System will switch to Holiday Mode on December 25 at Midnight regardless of what Day of Week it happens to be The information contained within the Schedul
171. To do so the E LCR in the Features Cabinet of the 2 8 0 Number Plan must be entered Next Route When digits matching the In Digit are entered this option specifies the trunk group to be used For LCR when digits matching the In Digit of the table are entered they follow the 3 1 2 Routing Digits with the converted Out Digit The E LCR tables can be used from No 1 to 200 The 200th table does not have the items for entering In Digit Out Digit and User LCR No This 200th table specifies the trunk group number or LCR to be used if the digits entered after pressing the E LCR code do not match any of those in In Digit Requirements To use the E LCR at least one from E LCR1 E LCR2 E LCR3 and E LCR4 must be entered in the Features Cabinet of the 2 8 0 Number Plan Viewing and Changing the Additional Optimal Route Selection Settings 1 126 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 6 Second LCR Digits from the Tree Viewer View the additional optimal route selection settings Change the additional optimal route selection settings Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide LCR GW Route Enter number of Routing Table selected by gateway that provides best route selection function to connect the cheapest station group automatically after analyzing external number dialed Requirements GW Routing of 3 1 2 Routing Digits
172. Translation to Follow DID Translation based on the station direct dial conversion table Viewing and Changing the Station Direct Dials Conversion Table Select 3 Call Routing gt 8 2 Incoming gt 3 2 3 DID Ringing from the Tree Viewer 2 View the station direct dials conversion table 4 Change the station direct dials conversion table 5 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MSN Ringing Provides a method of assigning an incoming MSN call to a specific station If any entry in the MSN DIGIT TABLE matches an incoming call s called party number either the specific station is alerted if it is programmed to accept the call or the call is cleared if it is programmed to reject the call Viewing and Changing the MSN Ringing Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 4 MSN Ringing from the Tree Viewer 2 View the MSN Ringing 3 Change the MSN Ringing 4 Save the changes CLI Ringing Sets the options to be processed based on the external phone number type received Items to be Specified Item Description CID Number Enter the number received externally Ring Plan Dest1 Dest6 Displays the station group received for each of the six 6 ring modes Call Reject When an external phone number sends a call this option sets whether to allow the call to be connected or disconnected immediately Call Priority
173. VR about several error case while using phone Viewing and Changing the Soft IVR Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 8 Soft IVR from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Soft IVR settings 3 Change the Soft IVR settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 101 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Trunk Port Configuration 102 Trunk Data Sets the trunk CO number trunk dial type night group by trunk and trunk time parameters Items to be Specified CO Number Enter the Central Office CO trunk number Dial Type Specifies the trunk dial type Night Group Specifies the night group for each trunk 0 to 9 Only trunks that belong to a night group operate in Ring Time plan Override RTO mode They operate in that mode until it is changed to ring mode when the night group mode is released DTMF Duration Sets the period of time for which the DTMF tone continues Set a value in units of 100 ms 100 to 9900 ms First Digit Delay Sets the period of time during which the first digit is sent after selecting the trunk Enter a value in units of 100 ms 100 to 9900 ms Pause Time Trunk Dial Types Specifies the waiting time to allow the opposite party time to prepare DTMF Multi Frequency type PULSE Dial pulse type R2MFC R2MFC type Viewing and Changing the Trunk Data Select 2
174. X phone shall be limited to PRI BRI and SIP trunks e MOBEX Number The phone number of an external device such as a mobile phone to be ringing e MOBEX Phone An external phone that has a MOBEX number e MOBEX User A user of a MOBEX phone e MOBEX Station A virtual station to which a MOBEX number is assigned e Master Station A station that assigns a group of MOBEX stations to which a simultaneous call is to be made Parameter Parameter Description Dial Number The trunk number of an external device such as a Trunk Number mobile phone to be ringing Dial Number The outgoing digit of an external device such as a Outgoing Digit mobile phone to be ringing Incoming CLI Number The CLI of external MOBEX phone It is possible to input 0 9 number and maximum 16 letters Executive User Choose to use exclusive option or not Executive License Priority License Priority of Executive User Executive License Max License Max Number of Executive User Master Station A station that assigns a group of MOBEX stations to which a simultaneous call is to be made Status Set MOBEX station to be active or not Viewing and Changing the Mobile Extension Select 2 Configuration gt 2 7 Virtual Port Configuration gt 2 7 5 Mobile Extension from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Mobile Extension 3 Change the Mobile Extension 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics
175. a call record when the OfficeServ System answers and then another record when the station forwards or recalls 2 records for 1 call Also the calculations are made by each module of software and may seem to be inconsistent if a comparison to another statistic is assumed For this reason we suggest you use these reports as a guideline only or to observe trends over time We can explain how each number is generated but because each application is different we may not be able to explain apparent inconsistencies By Application OfficeServ Device Manager System File Options Util Tab Help Port Base Card Base i Page Search 4 Functional Refresh Timer sec 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing Reporting 4 Group amp Table Created 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode E 8 9 View System Report B 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscribers 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 4 By Call Code 8 9 5 By Hour 8 9 6 By Port Number 8 9 7 By Day of Week 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen m m 9 Conference S Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 44 46 Calls Minutes Connected Callers Application Call Distribution SAMSUN
176. a DTMF tone in response response to the exit prompt 1 99 s The time interval begins after the prompt has been played Digit to playback The DTMF digit that causes OfficeServ System to play back response the voice response just recorded to the caller Digit to change response The DTMF digit that will cause OfficeServ System to repeat the query and allow the caller to change his response SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description Digit to confirm If this is set to a valid DTMF digit OfficeServ System will response automatically play back the response just recorded by the caller then play the exit prompt which should ask the caller to confirm the response by pressing this digit Example Dial 3 to confirm your response or 2 to change it Terminator digit The digit to enter to indicate the caller DTMF entry is complete This is usually the pound key Escape digit If the caller presses this key typically at any time during the query or exit prompt any response to this query that may have been recorded will be canceled and OfficeServ System will proceed immediately to the Block indicated by the lt ESCAPE gt pointer This will have no effect on responses to other queries recorded during the current call Call Director Query Block TEMPLATE QRY General Call Information can Director Activity Operating Mode 00 Default l
177. ack such as DISA Direct Inward System Access a feature which enables employees at remote locations such as their homes a telephone booth or a customer s office to use their company s system to process telephone calls or Least Cost Routing of outgoing long distance calls DIAL Blocks may also be used in conjunction with an Extension Block to create various types of extension hunt groups This is accomplished by setting up the Event Pointers in the Blocks to hunt through the designated extensions until an appropriate service provider is located Each Dial Block is associated with a Station Block which can be used to provide circuit specific cadence filtering for unique remote off premises devices like answering machines fax machines tie lines auto attendant or voicemail systems excessively noisy trunks paging systems or even attendant consoles The Dial Block can play a prompt to the caller prior to connecting the call and can activate a variety of other Call Processing or Service Provider Objects based on the configuration of its Event Pointers One of these the Answer Pointer can be set to play customized prompts initiate a caller dialog or invoke menu options after the call is answered 326 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide General Information Dial Block TEMPLATE DAL General Information Call Director Label Name TEMPLATE DAL Prompt To Transfer Description
178. added to or changed then it should be done first before any mailbox language options are set Load Language Select the prompt to load and press save button then it will be installed on the system The installed prompts will be displayed in the list after completion If the prompts that you want is not available you have to upload it via management interface or ftp This will take a few minutes so do not turn off the system Email Gateway The Parameters set in the SMTP Server section on this page are used for sending mail to the address set in the Report field The REPORT is used for sending error reporting to the ON or OFF site system administrator These SMTP Server parameters are NOT used for Subscriber E Message Delivery and or Notification See MCLASS SMTP Server settings for use with individual or groups of subscribers HOST ID Enter the IP address of the Host Mail Server that the IVM will use to send the E mail error report to the ON OFF site System Administrator SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide PORT The default recommended port to use is 25 Most Mail Servers look at port 25 for receiving and sending Mail SMTP USER ID OPTIONAL This is the User ID the IVM will use to log on to the Mail Server and Identify itself as a Client associated with sending Mail PASSWORD OPTIONAL This is the password associated with the IVM s User ID for logging into the Mail S
179. ai tind tee dl ee a ee aa 211 System V O Options messina ereet dete aslis ei en dees ee 212 System Tone Ring a e a a a hee dee hgh Sa aeaa een antes 217 DIAQNOSUCS f2 cscceeceeci E a aed ed eee nee eke ee 219 Volee Malls vcs P eealecsalachbtdpcnsddcs vec chieeeacddesvaedebesantadansetedzesaaptag ssateaseinagtudacna ess 227 Call Gosting s ii scisre ei ee Att a ed i ee 229 SYSIEMFCAtUIES 3a e aise r thar N E eet ees ae 232 Timer Option Features 0 ceeeecceseseeseeeeseeeeeeeceaeeesaeeseaeessaeeseaeeesaeeseaeeesaeessaeeeates 237 Station Features ics secession aaea a aaa a tiie eae 249 System COI O ie Aer ee niin elie eae ee eel erates 264 Alarm Report soccccovast niet eoienel an a a aeta ea a a tiie a edie 264 Port Status a a a aaa aa ee a aa aA E de aE E N tied 270 C mMMaNd Se e r a a aa aa E iid teas aa A Ea a ea a EA Re 274 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 11 TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTER 6 Voice Mail Programming 282 System Main MOM surrisi snn essct cules este esvetcscteev este entesesctsetncesseneedieencdedsauecehancesudedveaseeniegin 282 Open Block Talolesczce44sccshicviasd T E th a a aaas 284 Save Applications nnna ie sedate Sin ide ie a A aa eri 285 Schedule Tablet sec er eaaet eaaa ae re aa a a aie ia ee 286 Subscriber Listen inan E a Mie cin ENE AETAT O dean 289 System Parameter Sneinen weds e e dade E ea EEE cee te Sh ene 290 VENEEN OEP E E E AEE 296 Operating Utilities Iesi oaa eaaa eee ee 298 Overri
180. ailable 0769 Description Prompt prior to transfer 0770 Description Conversation Record Controls Description Prompts prior to record 0771 Description Beep before recording No These prompts play to a public caller Leaving the prompt field blank will prevent these prompts from playing tem Prompt prior Used in the system wide record facility for a public caller leaving a to record message By default this prompt is Please begin speaking at the tone To stop recording press 2 or simply hang up It may be changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt This field is left blank by default at the request of our dealers The system prompt recorded for this field is Prompt number 0760 Prompt Played when a caller has chosen to record something when the disk indicating is full By default this prompt is Sorry The message storage unit is full error it may be changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt Prompt Confirms that a message has been erased By default this prompt is indicating Message discarded it may be changed to any other system prompt discard or you may replace it with a custom prompt 388 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description Prompt By default this prompt is Message sent
181. al announcement the members of the announcement area number 0 are used Viewing and Changing Internal External Announcement Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 1 Grouping gt 4 1 3 Page Groups from the Tree Viewer View the current announcement group settings Change the announcement group settings 4 Save the changes 142 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MGI Groups Sets an MGI port for each user type that must use an MGI port for calling Port Type Port Type Description Local ITP MGI port to use when calling with a private type IP phone Public IP ITP MGI port to use when calling with a public type IP phone VoIP Networking MGI port to use when calling with a VoIP networking call Public IP MGI port to use when calling with a networking call using a Networking public type IP address VoIP Trunk MGI port to use when calling with a H 323 or SIP trunk Public IP Trunk MGI port to use when calling with a trunk using a public type IP address ITP Paged MGI port to use when the IP phone interoperates with the announcement function Viewing and Changing the MGI Group Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 1 Grouping gt 4 1 4 MGI Groups from the Tree Viewer View the current announcement group settings Change the User type and Member item values for a port type 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 143 Error Use the Home ta
182. aller will still be able to access a list of caller options that match the selections that have been allowed in EClass System Caller Options Digit Assignment but the subscribers greeting will have to announce these Additionally any other options that have been assigned in the extension Caller Options Processor Extension Block page 3 of 5 will be available to callers SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Option This column contains texts fields for a description of what the caller Description will experience as a result of pressing the To Select column digit in the Caller Options Processor target generator Example I m in the facility if you would like to page me please press 3 To Select The fields in this column are Event Pointers They are activated by the administrator at time of installation for each mailbox subscriber through the extension telephone interface in System Caller Options Type Type indicates the type of block targeted Gp GP represents the group number if appropriate and will always be 01 Target name Target Name specifies the block to pass control to Call Director Extension Block TEMPLATE EXT General Authorization Additional Information Caller Options Processor Call Director Activity Operating Mode 00 Default v Event Call Director Action Type Gp Target
183. allowable inputs are 0 99 seconds Retries on invalid The number of times from 0 to 99 that the OfficeServ System will allow the caller to reenter his password if an invalid password was entered Repeat on no entry The number of times from 0 to 9 that the OfficeServ System will repeat prompts if no entry is made by the caller This only effects prompts associated with the ECLASS Block To have the caller Leave a message at the tone after hearing an Extension call condition greeting see the User Guides for information on the extension greetings this parameter should be set to 0 Other Number No digit is assigned for this This controls the ability of the OfficeServ System to allow callers reaching extensions to dial another extension SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 337 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 338 Continued Item Description Leave a This is the digit a caller enters to indicate they wish to leave a message message Allowable digits are 0 9 but cannot be the same as the hold digit Hold This is the digit the caller enters when he elects to hold for an extension that is busy Allowable digits are 0 9 but cannot be the same as the Digit to Leave Message Digit to Request Paging or Digit for other options This digit is active after a call transfer that results in a busy condition Other This is the digit the
184. alues Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 12 SIP Stack Ext Trunk Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current SIP Stack Ext Trunk Options values 3 Change the SIP Stack Ext Trunk Options values 4 Save the changes 194 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SIP Carrier Options Sets SIP Carrier Options Viewing and Changing the SIP Carrier Options Values Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 13 SIP Carrier Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current SIP Carrier Options values J Change the SIP Carrier Options values 4 Save the changes SIP Users Sets SIP Users Viewing and Changing the SIP Users Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 14 SIP Users from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current SIP Users values o Change the SIP Users values 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 195 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here SIP Destination Sets SIP Destination Viewing and Changing the SIP Destination Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 15 SIP Destination from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current SIP Destination values 3 Change the SIP Destination values 4 Save the changes MGI Options Sets MGI Options Viewing and Changing the MGI Options Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 16 MGI Optio
185. am when this option is set to DISABLE SPA Options 1st participant can hear SPA when this option is set to ENABLE Join Alarm Options Current participants can hear join alarm tone when a new member joins Meet me conference Leave Alarm Options Current participants can hear leave alarm tone when one of participants leaves Meet me conference End Alarm Options Participants can hear conference end alarm tone when current Meet me conference is terminated Early Ent Time SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Participants can join Meet me conference earlier than reserved time 429 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 430 Item Continued Description Mail Server Options Greeting mail is sending when this option is set to ENABLE Mail Max Retry Specifies the number of times to repeat when sending the mail is failed Mail Retry Interval Specifies the time interval to repeat when sending the mail is failed Mail Day Saving Time Using day saving time when this option is set to SUMMER TIME Mail Time Zone Offset Specifies time zone for mail server Max Rec Time Specifies the maximum number of recording time Mail Server IP Specifies the Mail Server IP address Mail Server Port Specifies the port no of Mail Server Local Domain Specifies the local domain name Mail Server User ID
186. an operator during the Day Mode but after 5 00 PM it would route them to a Bye block Pointers set in the Default Mode are always in effect unless the same Pointer is set in the current Operating Mode OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 379 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Continued Description MSG LEFT This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if the caller leaves a message The target block allows the caller the option of returning to the beginning of the application or sending the caller to the Bye block if the organization or individual does not want to give the caller additional options NOMSG LEFT This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if the caller does not leave a message or if this is an announcement only mailbox The target block may allow the caller the option of returning to the beginning of the application or sending the caller to the Bye block if the organization or individual does not want to give the caller additional options ESCAPE This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if the caller presses the escape digit while listening to the mailbox greeting or whil
187. and 8 matches Search based on first name When an extension is set up generally people are listed by last name comma and first name This parameter determines which part of the name label that will be searched for a match Example name is entered in the subscriber list as Smith John If this value is set to N no the directory will search on Smith if this value is set to Y yes the directory will search on John Include If this parameter is set to YES Search Targets with no recorded unnamed name will be included in the directory listing played to the caller In objects this case the OfficeServ System speaks the number of the Search Target This could for example be an extension or mailbox number Speak name If this parameter is set to YES the selected object s name is played on exit to the caller prior to exiting the directory If no name is recorded the selected object s number is played to the caller This could for example be an extension or mailbox number Speak key If set to YES the selected object s number is played to the caller value on exit prior to exiting the directory Verify before exit If this parameter is set to YES the system requests the caller to confirm the object selection before transferring the caller to that object If set to NO confirmation is not needed SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Type This is a list o
188. and Changing the Caller ID Conversion Table Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 6 CLI Name Translation from the Tree Viewer 2 View the caller ID conversion table Change the caller ID conversion table 4 Save the changes 132 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Door Ringing Sets the subscriber to ring when a ring is received from a door phone This function rings a door phone call in a station group and sets the ring receive mode separately If the Door Phone Interface Module DPIM does not exist in the system the There is no DPIM connected message will be displayed The Door Phone Interface Module DPIM for the door phone can be connected to the port of any digital phone Viewing and Changing the Door Ring Settings Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 7 Door Ringing from the Tree Viewer 2 View the door ring settings 3 Change the door ring settings 4 Save the changes DISA Password Skip CLI This function allows DISA calls to be received without entering the DISA password based on the CID number received by the DISA trunk Up to 500 CID numbers can be set When a DISA call received matches a CID number entered the call can be sent without entering the DISA password even if the Password Enable item of the 5 14 4 Incoming CID DISA Options is set to On Viewing and Changing the DISA Allowed Caller ID Settings Sele
189. and received for calls using the IP phone Phone Type Sets the phone type SAMSUNG SIP STANDARD Current Status Displays the current connection status of the IP phone Clear Reg amp Deletes the information of the registered IP phone and Software Upgrade sets whether to upgrade the software No Clear Registration SW Upgrade Viewing and Changing the ITP Phone Information Select 6 System Control gt 6 2 Port Status gt 6 2 2 ITP Status from the Tree Viewer 2 View the ITP phone information Change the ITP phone information 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 271 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here SIP Phone Status Displays the information for the registered standard SIP terminals Terminal Information Items Item Description IP Address IP address assigned to the registered standard SIP terminal Current Status Displays whether the standard SIP terminal is registered Phone Type Displays the manufacturer of the standard SIP terminal If the terminal is not a standard Samsung SIP terminal the registration is restricted as many as the number which is set according to the license key entered in the 2 1 4 License Key Disconnected Samsung SIPP Non Samsung SIPP Requirements A license key must be entered in the 2 1 4 License Key The number of SIP Phones must be set in the SIP Stack License Allowed and the
190. ard Settings Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 4 Preset Forward from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Preset Forward settings Change the Preset Forward settings 4 Save the changes 96 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Hot Line Sets the hot line and the related parameters Items to be Specified Hot T S Enter the station number to be set as the hot line Hot Outgoing Digit Enter the off hook trunk selection dial Off Hook Delay Enter the delay period to wait before sending when the hot line is set 0 to 250 sec Trunk Pair Enter the trunk number to connect to the hot line trunk Viewing and Changing the Hot Line Settings 1 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 5 Hot Line from the Tree Viewer 2 View the hot line settings 3 Change the hot line settings 4 Save the changes DLI Data Sets the CID Block Log Block Text Message Group Message BGM Micro Phone Ring Back Station Name and Group Listen by Speaker items for each station Items to be Specified CID Block Assigns the entries to save a caller ID to each station Since the number of entries that are not assigned is displayed they can be added or removed for each station Up to 50 entries can be assigned in units of 10 Log Block Assigns the buffer to save the dialing information for SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd outg
191. as twelve 12 program buttons 02 7 BTN SETS Phone that has seven 7 program buttons 03 6 BTN SETS Phone that has six 6 program buttons 04 32 BTN AOMS In case that an add on module that has thirty two 32 program buttons is connected 05 40 64 BTN AOMS In case that an add on module that has 40 to 64 program buttons is connected 06 20 BTN SETS Phone that has twenty 20 program buttons 07 28 BTN SETS Phone that has twenty eight 28 program buttons 08 18 BTN SETS Phone that has eighteen 18 program buttons 09 8 BTN SETS Phone that has eight 8 program buttons 10 99 BTN SETS Phone that has ninety nine 99 program buttons 11 38 BTN SETS Phone that has thirty eight 38 program buttons 12 21 BTN SETS Phone that has twenty one 21 program buttons 13 14 BTN SETS Phone that has fourteen 14 program buttons 14 DS 07S SETS DS 5014S 5007S 5000S Personal Phone The program buttons 1 and 2 is assigned to the multi purpose button Call by default Below are the functions that can be assigned to the program buttons Some functions underlined can specify and use function extension numbers independently For the trunk and trunk group direct selection function the extension number must be specified For other functions it is possible that the extension number is not specified SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 163 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 164
192. ation Data Station On Off Data Customer On Off Data Preset Forward and Hot Line of a DLI board Use the Prev and Next buttons to move to any item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual 78 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the DLI Card Configuration 1 A J 4 S SLI Card Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 5 DLI Card from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the DLI card information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the DLI card information Save the changes Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number SLI Data Station Data Station On Off Data Customer On Off Data Preset Forward and Hot Line of an SLI board Use the Prev and Next buttons to move to any item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the SLI Card Configuration i Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 6 SLI Card from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the SLI card information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the SLI card information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 79 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 80 Analog Trunk
193. auto call distribution option If there is no UCD group is displayed in Group No and No Data is displayed as the control information Control Information Control Information Description First Message Sets the message to send when all members of the auto call distribution group are busy Second Message When all members of the auto call distribution group is busy this option sets the message to send repeatedly until a member to be served appears Retry Count Specifies the number of times to repeat sending the second message Exit Code When you are hearing a message because all members of the auto call distribution group is busy this option sets a dial 0 9 to press to connect to the FINAL DEST without waiting Final Destination Sets the station group or auto attendant table number to receive the call when there is no member to be served even if the caller has waited as many as Retry Count To input the table number of the auto attendant you must press the A button Wrap Time Sets the memo time to prepare without processing the next call immediately after a member of the auto call distribution group finishes a call Next Time When a member of the auto call distribution group does not answer this option the time 00 99 sec to disconnect the ring and ring the next member If the time is set to 0 sec it will not be applied Recall Time Sets the time for
194. ay and Conf Group and the numbers of the used and unused resources You can only view this information Viewing the System Resource Status Select 6 System Control gt 6 2 Port Status gt 6 2 6 System Resource from the Tree Viewer 2 View the system resource status SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 273 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here MPS Status Displays the system resource about MPS You can only view this information Viewing the MPS Status Select 6 System Control gt 6 2 Port Status gt 6 2 7 MPS Status from the Tree Viewer 2 View the MPS status Commands Pre Install Reset Replaces the card installed in the system to a card of other type and then deletes the information of the previous card Then this function notifies the system that the new card can start and restarts the system using the software When mounting a new card to the slot if the type of this new card is different from that of the existing card this function sets the information so that it matches the new card When mounting a new card to prevent the information from being removed this function the system that the new card can start and has the system initialize it The types of the existing and new cards are displayed so that you can Va check both of them The dial number of the existing card remains after this program is performed therefore you have to change
195. ayed Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given a unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows one Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes Pointers set in the Default Mode stay in effect unless overridden by the same Pointer set in the current Operating Mode The OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be Blued grayed on a Black and white monitor out to denote that they were not set in the current mode but will operate as indicated NEXT This points to the next Block the OfficeServ System will execute after speaking the prompts If the next Block is a MENU any DTMF digits entered in the Speak Block will be carried forward to the MENU Block 422 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Station Block The Station Block contains all the information needed to call or transfer a caller to a particular phone number The bulk of the Station Block defines the various call progress signals It also contains any additional dial strings needed to reach a particular station like dialing 9 to access a trunk or adding digits after the call to activate a beeper One of the handiest features of the S
196. b to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Pickup Groups According as Pickup Group Ring Service is enabled or disabled the way of assignment of stations into call pickup groups is different In case Pickup Group Ring Service is enabled in 2 1 5 System Options it allows that the maximum 32 stations can be assigned per call pickup groups But in case Pickup Group Ring Service is disabled in 2 1 5 System Options it allows that call pickup groups can be assigned per stations It is the same as before An unlimited number of members can belong to each group Stations can only be in one pickup group at any given time Viewing and Changing the Pickup Groups Settings 1 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 1 Grouping gt 4 1 5 Pickup Groups from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Pickup Groups settings 3 Change the Pickup Groups settings 4 Save the changes Station Pairing 144 Station Pair Sets the station pair which operates like a phone connected to the same port If the information for call forwarding service grade optimal route selection grade Do not disturb or station lock etc is changed in a station pair member the same information is changed in the other station pair member Viewing and Changing the Station Pair Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 2 Station Pairing gt 4 2 1 Station Pair from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current station pair settings 3 Enter the numbe
197. be preserved Warning For this data to be saved the OfficeServ System must lock its ports temporarily Any idle ports are immediately locked As ports become free they are also locked When all ports are locked the data will be saved and the ports placed back online The system will politely Lock all ports before performing the save If any port is off hook engaged in a call the system will wait until the caller hangs up before locking that port OfficeServ Device Manager ae System File Options Util Tab Help B DS D amp B B B PortBase Card Base Page Search 8 2 Save Application Functional 2 Configuration Save Application 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0pen Block Table B 2 Save Application Continue 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference This action requires all ports to be locked The system will lock each port as it becomes idle Ports will remain locked during the save process Do you want to continue to save Q3 a mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 0 Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 4 55 41 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 285 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Schedule
198. be the initial MENU Block to allow the user to return to the beginning of the application DIRECTORY This is the block to go to if the caller presses the digit associated with the Directory Assistance SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 345 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Extension Block The Extension Block is one of the two Blocks Extension Mailbox that describes a subscriber The Extension Block controls the operating characteristics specific to a subscriber s extension This includes all the caller options and transfer instructions It is important to understand that in the OfficeServ System the only function of a mailbox block is to take a message and perform notification All other subscriber features and options are provided by the extension block General Extension Block TEMPLATE ExT General Authorization Additional Information Caller Options Processor Call Director Activity General VMS Group Label Name TEMPLATE EXT Number Mailbox Eclass Language Extension Controls Dial Number mailbox Alternate Number Supervision Lebel Subscriber Password Account code Station Auto Login No Public Yes User Yes Directory Retention days remaining Day 90 Item Description VMS Group VMS group Label Name The name of this block A Block nam
199. been recorded lt Delete gt You can delete the selected history lt Delete All gt You can delete all history SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide In Progress If click the In Progress button you can see the conference list in progress And after select the range by dragging click the List button you can see the selected list c Conference In Progress Se lt 2010 08 14 00 00 2010 08 14 23 59 gt Select Card CNF ID Subject Members Start Time End Time Owner Station Id C1 S3 200 CNF24 5 2010 08 14 02 00 2010 08 14 04 00 2001 Detail ance Close lt Detail Reservation gt You can see the detail of selected conference lt Cancel Reservation gt You can cancel the selected conference And you can send the mail with reason SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 441 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here This page is intentionally left blank 442 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide CHAPTER 8 Troubleshooting This section describes how to handle the problems that may occur while using OfficeServ DM If the OfficeServ DM becomes abnormal first check the following If the problem still exists contact a local service center Can t execute OfficeServ DM with Web Browser When Web Browser is not allowed to execute OfficeServ DM check if Web Browser set
200. below if OfficeServ DM is launched 3 OfficeSery Device Manager System File Options Util Tab Help EN 5 Message Normal None None None EEPL TUB ik Sh pai bse ac 20 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Registration site list for OfficeServ System You must register site list before connecting OfficeServ System Click on System gt Link Setup The following screen is displayed Site List MODEM Options LAN MODEM Site Name Destination Data Port compon cot gt File Port Baudrate 38400 v Default Im lolle Apply 165 213 89 72 7 Default Port Delete Close Site Name Destination Data COM File Baudrate FTP Port 2 Input Site Name and Destination about OfficeServ System J Click on Apply for registration 4 Click on Close for completion SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 21 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Connect to OfficeServ System Click on System gt Connect The following screen is displayed ID Password Tenant No admin Tenant 1 ia Cancel Enter the correct ID and Password then click on OK The initial value for the ID password is set to admin samsung by default 22
201. cable do not use Hold do not These are hold controls as associated with the port These controls use tell the system how to hard hold but do not enable OfficeServ System to do a hard hold If left blank PBX hard hold is not used only consultation hold is used The controls to enable or disable hard hold can be found in the EClass Block Retrieve do not use The digit s dialed by the system to retrieve a caller from hard hold Transfer do not use The digits to dial to place a caller on consultation hold when transferring a caller from one extension to another and get a dial tone Connect do The digits to dial to complete a call transfer and connect the caller to not use the called party Rejected do The digits the system dials to abort a call transfer if the called party not use rejects the call No answer The digits the system dials to abort a call transfer which resulted in a do not use no answer condition Busy do not use The digits the system dials to abort a call transfer which resulted in a busy signal Error do not use The digits the system dials to abort a call transfer if an error occurs such as no dial tone Initiate do not use The dial string used to initiate a conference call SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Abort do not use The dial string used to abort a conference call if the s
202. caller enters to indicate they wish options other options than leaving a message or holding Allowable digits are 0 9 but cannot be the same as the Digit to Leave Message Digit to Hold or Digit to Request Paging Operator This is a digit that the caller enters to transfer to an operator Control is passed to the block indicated by the Operator pointer Escape This is the digit the caller enters to exit immediately from the current process Control is passed to the block indicated by the Options pointer This digit is also used by the Subscriber when exiting from the Extension Menu Control is passed to the block specified by the USER EXIT pointer Allowable digits are 0 9 Q and SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Prompts EClass Block TEMPLATE ECL General Prompts Hold Controls OutCall Call Director Prompts and Digits Digit Prompt Description Target herald prompt 0739 Description Forward herald prompt 0740 Description Blind xfer prompt 0701 Description Monitored xfer prompt 0702 Description Find me xfer prompt 0742 Description Call screening 0700 Description No answer prompt 0714 Description Busy prompt 0715 Description 0716 Description Block prompt 0717 Description Error prompt 0718 Description Accept call 0708 Description Redirect call lovo9 Description Rejec
203. calling in from their cell phone and does not want to stay on the phone any longer then they have to so they can save minutes on their phone The IVM will beep once for a single message and twice if there is more then one message Directory Public User A Y in these parameters and the subscribers name recorded in the mailbox allows this object to be listed in either of the appropriate Directories The Public directory is the directory that callers access the User directory is the directory that subscribers access Subscriber password Allows the mailbox password to be changed to the default digits specified by Default password in the System Wide Parameters or removed completely Inputs are DEFAULT or NONE In the IVM products subscribers usually have both an Extension Block and a Mailbox Block but may have only one of them Since each of these blocks have a password option if different password values are entered in each of these blocks extension and mailbox the OfficeServ System will try to resolve these two password fields into one value The extension password will override the value in the mailbox field Retention days remaining days The number of days remaining before this block is automatically discarded during system maintenance This only applies to unused mailboxes MCLASS When enabling email gateway for a subscriber make sure the MCLASS with the appropriate mail
204. chedule the call will be transferred to the extension blocks dial number and the extension night greeting will play if recorded SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 355 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 356 Caller Options Processor Extension Block TEMPLATE ExT General Authorization Additional Information Caller Options Processor Call Director Greeting meoo Event Caller Options Processor Option Description To Select Target name 1 2 3 4 S 6 8 gt elal alale u la Item Description Greeting Two greeting options are available in the OfficeServ System Extension Block They are NONE and BASIC If the greeting is NONE the subscriber may not record a greeting in their extension they may however if allowed record a mailbox greeting The caller will be played a list of caller options that match the selections that have been allowed in EClass System Caller Options Digit Assignment These may include any or all of the following Dialing another number leave a message hold have the subscriber paged on the overhead paging system select other custom options or reach the operator If the greeting type is BASIC the caller may record custom greeting s according to the features allowed in extension block Authorizations The c
205. command the system dials to abort a call transfer if the called party rejects the call Error The digits string command the system dials to abort a call transfer if an error occurs such as no dial tone Initiate The digits string command used to initiate a conference call Set up The digits string command used to set up a conference call after the second station answers SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Abort The digits string command used to abort a conference call if the second station does not answer Tear down The digits string command needed to tear down a conference call and drop the second station SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 427 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here This page is intentionally left blank 428 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide CHAPTER 7 Conference Card Programming Conference Conference Admin Conference Options Permits the adjustments of CNF24 card options and is used in case of Meet me conference System Selection Items Item Description Password Options User who wants to join Meet me conference doesn t have to input password when this option is set to DISABLE Greeting Options Participant can t hear greeting announcement when this option is set to DISABLE Whoami Options Participant doesn t have to record who
206. conference among trunks VM AREC Records the call to the embedded voice mailbox automatically VM AME Sets auto answer mode to embedded voice mailbox VM REC Records to embedded voice mailbox VMS PSWD Password of SVM 800 voice mailbox VMS REC Records SVM 800 voice mailbox Viewing and Changing the Service Grade Settings 1 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 7 Class of Service gt 4 7 2 COS Contents from the Tree Viewer mA R amp B N SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Select a service grade View the settings for the selected service grade Change the settings for the selected service grade Save the changes 157 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Networking COS Specifies the service grade table to be applied when using the networking function Defaults Service Function Setting Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber N Completion of Calls on No Replay Call Intrusion Intrusion Capability Level Intrusion Protection Level CONP LEVEL Transfer By Rerouting DND Announcement Offer DNDO Capability Level DNDO Protection Level Path Retention Others lt IZI NINI ZIZ VJ N N N I ZJZ Viewing and Changing the Networking Service Grades Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 7 Class of Service gt 4 7 3 Networking COS from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current networking service grade table Enter the
207. covery has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data IPC Queue type MCP LAN MCP SCP MCP LCP1 MCP LCP2 MJC01 DTMF Fault An error has occurred in the DTMF resources of the system Alarm Data Location of the DSP to receive the DTMF MJC02 Tone Fault An error has occurred in the tone resources of the system Alarm Data Location of the DSP to receive the tone MJC03 CID DSP Fault CID DSP Fault MJC06 AC Pwr Loss AC Power Loss MJC07 AC Pwr Recovery AC Power Recovery MJC08 Low Battery Low Battery SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Alarm Name Continued Definition MJCO09 Low Battery Rec Low Battery Rec MJC16 WLI Restart The WLI board is restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJC17 WLI Block The system has detected an error of the WLI board and prohibited its use Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD01 Sync Failure The clock of the TEPRI board has been out of sync MJD02 Sync Recovery The clock out of sync error of the TEPRI board is recovered MJDO03 Red Alarm The PCM carrier of the TEPRI board is not detected for 250 ms Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD04 Red Alarm Rec The PCM carrier of the TEPRI board is detected Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD05 Yellow Alarm A frame transmission error has occurred in the TEPRI board Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJDO6 Yello
208. criber The digits the extension user enters to gain access to the Password extension user menu In the IVM products subscribers usually have both an Extension Block and a Mailbox Block but may have only one of them Since each of these blocks have a password option if different password values are entered in each of these blocks extension and mailbox the OfficeServ System will try to resolve these two password fields into one value The extension password will override the value in the mailbox field Valid entries for this field are NONE No password and DEFAULT Password will be set to the default of 0000 This field will not display the subscribers password Account code Entered if the subscriber has an access code used for long distance access This access code can be inserted in any dial string using A Station If there is no entry entered here the system will automatically search the Station options for the appropriate Station block required to send the call This block is used to dial the Dial Number If there is an Alternate number it will select a station block automatically Auto Login A Y in this parameter enables the subscriber to login without a password when logging in from their extension 350 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Directory public user A Y in these parameters and the subscribers name recorded in the mailbox allow
209. cs Co Ltd This is defined and used for several uses in the RFC 2543 For example in an unreliable transmission protocol one of them is the time to wait after the USA User Agent Server receives an ACK message 199 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Parameter Description General Linger In an unreliable transmission protocol the server cannot Timer ensure that the client has received the last answer after it sent it In this case until the retransmission that the server requested is received it must retransmit the answer during this time For example it is the time to wait after sending a 200 OK message for an INFO message Invite Linger Timer In an unreliable transmission protocol the client cannot ensure whether the server has received the ACK message after the client sent an ACK for an INVITE Final Response At this time this is the time to wait after sending an ACK for the Final Response Cancel General No The time to wait before canceling a request related to the SIP Response Timer Cancel Invite No The time to wait before canceling an SIP INVITE Request Response Timer General Request The time to wait before the last answer for a request related Timeout Timer to the SIP is received Provisional Timer When receiving a Provision Response the user agent must wait for this time before it is timed out Viewing and Changing the WL
210. ct 3 Call Routing gt 3 2 Incoming gt 3 2 8 DISA Password Skip CLI from the Tree Viewer 2 View the DISA allowed caller ID settings 3 Change the DISA allowed caller ID settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 133 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Networking System Link ID Sets the system node number to be used for networking You can enter up to 12 digits as the node number In the system where the MCP board is installed an IP address can be entered for networking that uses VolP The IP address can also be set for the Self node for each opposite node in order to give a different Self node IP address to the opposite nodes based on whether the node to be connected to is connected to a private or public IP network Items to be Specified Item Description IP Type For networking using VoIP this option sets the IP address for the Self node to be sent to the opposite node System ID Enter the node number of other system connected The network can consist of up to 99 systems For the Self entry enter the node number of the Self system IP Address For networking using VoIP enter the IP address for signaling System Name Enter the name of the other system connected Up to 11 characters can be entered Time Sync Sets whether to update the time information between systems automatically No MGI Sets whether to use MGI
211. ction is not used if the number of Level 2 calls which notify the LED of their waiting level is zero 1 to 25 UCDS Visual Alarm 10 sec The alarm message is displayed and the LED is turned on if the period of time a call has spent waiting in the UCD group exceeds this time 0 to 990 sec UCDS Audio Alarm 10 sec An alarm is sounded if the period of time a call has spent waiting in the UCD group exceeds this time Enter a value in units of 10 ms 0 to 990 sec Periodic UCD Report sec Sets the interval with which the UCD statistic data is sent to the I O 3 to 99 sec Intercom External Forward Specifies whether to forward external calls from a station When set to Off only trunk calls are forwarded to the external When set to On the station calls are also forwarded to the external Preset Forward Busy Specifies whether to forward a call immediately if it is received by a station for which the busy forwarding is not activated but the system no answer forwarding is activated VMAA Chain Forward Specifies whether to send the first or last forward station number as the station number when a call is forwarded to the voice mailbox Trunk Auto MOH Specifies whether to have the MOH heard when answering an alarm Alarm Reminder Sets the maximum ringing time for an activated station alarm which is not answered Specifies the number of times the alarm is sounded 1 to 99 Ala
212. ctronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Mailbox Block The Mailbox Block is used to implement the Voice Mail messaging features on OfficeServ System It also controls the operating characteristics specific to an individual mailbox such as whether the Mailbox is announce only or if the subscriber has Mailbox Administration capabilities This Block maintains the message notification details The Mailbox is where a subscriber receives sends and manages messages The public caller may record a message after hearing a personal greeting from the Mailbox User and choose to review re record send or discard his message Event pointers are used to provide the flexibility to handle messaging differently for various modes of operation typically at different times of the day The Mailbox Group Number is convenient for organizing Mailboxes and or Subscribers into application specific groups This number must be the same as the Group Number for the MClass used to control this Block In most applications the default value of 01 is normally used Values from 01 to 99 are valid You select which group the Mailbox Block belongs to before you create the Mailbox Block In a Multi Tenant installation groups in the OfficeServ System can be used to partition the application between tenants SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 369 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here General Mailbox Block TEMP
213. ctronics Co Ltd 5 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Revision History 00 11 2010 First edition 6 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SAFETY CONCERNS In order to ensure product safety and proper operation information followed by the following icons should be carefully read before installing or using the product Symbols Caution Indication of a general caution Restriction S Indication for prohibiting an action for a product Instruction Indication for commanding a specifically required action A CAUTION SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 7 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here A Caution when installing uninstalling the OfficeServ DM Existing data may be lost during installation uninstallation of the OfficeServ DM Backup all data before proceeding Caution when uploading A When uploading the card slot of the user s PC database should be identical to the key phone system s card slot Depending on the condition it may be necessary to reboot after the upload a message will be prompted To protect memory data from accidental deletion ensure that the MCP card s backup switch is set to ON 8 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd TABLE OF CONTENTS OfficeServ DM User Guide Overview 3 PUPDOSG cae iatecs sess cae sedcesedvonet
214. cts the external or internal microphone in a phone to which the external microphone can be connected EXTERNAL MIC FAUTO Forced auto answer by the caller FORCED AUTO ANSWER FLASH Trunk flash FLASH FWRD Call forward CALL FORWARD GPIK Group pick up GROUP PICK UP HDSET Headset mode HEADSET MODE HLDPK Hold pick up HOLD PICK UP HOLD Hold HOTEL Hotel function SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 171 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 172 Function that can be specified Continued Description IG Whether to include the group or not IN OUT OF GROUP INFDSP Displays the SPOT View information INQIRE Views the caller information for a hold call CID INQUIRE ISPY Checks the call status of other station CID SPY LANREQ Sends a control message to the LAN card LAN REQUEST LCR Optimal route selection AUTO ROUTE SELECTION LISTN Group listening GROUP LISTENING LNR Redial LAST NUMBER REDIAL This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys LOG Searches the last receiving sending call CALL LOG MCONF CNF24 Progressive Conference MGC CNF24 Predefined Conference MJOIN CNF24 Reserved Room Conference Join MACR MACRO MMPA Announcement forward answering MEET ME PAGE ANSWER MMPG Announcement forward MEET ME PAGE MOBEX MOBEX MS Sends a specific sound t
215. d N disables the functionality Gateway support From Put in the E Mail address the Subscriber would like to receive Replies to if a recipient of a Voice Message from him wishes to reply via e mail When filled in with a valid e mail address the receiving party will see the Sending subscriber s name as it appears in the Mailbox Label name If left blank all Voice Messages sent by the subscriber will show VM in the From of the receiving parties Inbox Deliver MSG Enter the e mail address or addresses that the subscriber wishes to have E Message Delivery sent to A subscriber or mailbox can have up to 5 different E Mail addresses assigned Notify Only Enter the e mail address or addresses that the subscriber wishes to have E Message Notification sent to A subscriber or mailbox can have up to 5 different E Mail addresses assigned SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 377 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here E MAIL ADDRESS SYNTAX An e mail address can be entered a couple of ways The traditional e mail syntax is username mailserverdomain domainsuffix domain suffix com net org etc in this case the name entered as the Mailbox label name will be displayed in the Inbox From field if the voice message was sent subscriber to subscriber In some cases the number of characters in a person s name is longer than the label name length in a Mailbox Block Until now no one
216. d Source of the Voice Mail Box and Using a Port for Receiving or Sending Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 3 SVMi Card from the Tree Viewer Select a gateway and cabinet number 3 View the SVMi hold sound source and whether the port is to be used for receiving or sending 4 Change the SVMi hold sound source and whether the port is to be used for receiving or sending 5 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 77 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here WLI Card Sets various parameters related to interoperation of the WLI board Depending on the parameters when they are changed the WBS24 wireless station will operate automatically reflecting the changes Parameter Parameter Description IP Address Sets the IP address of the WLI card Gateway Sets the gateway address of the WLI card Subnet Mask Sets the net mask of the WLI card Status Displays the status of the WLI card WBS Status Displays the Alive operation status of the WBS24 installed on the system Viewing and Changing the Wireless Parameter Values Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 4 WLI Card from the Tree Viewer 2 View the wireless parameter values 3 Change the wireless parameter values 4 Save the changes DLI Card Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number DLI Data St
217. d be defined as an event that occurs that an event pointer was not programmed to handle DT Direct call originating from a Trunk DS Direct call originating from a Station AT All calls forwarded originating from a Trunk AS All calls forwarded originating from a Station BT Forwarded on busy originating from a Trunk BS Forwarded on busy originating from a Station NT Forwarded on no answer originating from a Trunk NS Forwarded on no answer originating from a Station TT Manually transferred Trunk Call TS Manually transferred Station Call RC Record Call Request If no Call Code is given or the Call Code does not match any programmed the NEXT pointer is used SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Prompt Mode Block Day Call Code Processor Prompt Salutation Prompts Description First prompt Second prompt Third prompt Fourth prompt Fifth prompt Sixth prompt SALUTATION PROMPTS The prompt numbers to be spoken when OfficeServ System answers a call in this mode The prompts are only spoken if the call uses the NEXT pointer or is a Direct Trunk DT call The prompts are spoken in sequence beginning with the prompt in the First position These should include prompts that are only spoken upon answering e g Thank you for calling ABC company and are not repeated for the duration of t
218. d delete a program file 3e Bookmark To manage bookmarked files displays the page index a History To delete a previously opened page displays the page index Exit To terminate the program DPF Information To display the program s version and its creation date 24 Data To setup data configuration SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide System Menu The System menu provides functions such as connecting disconnecting uploading downloading the database and controlling the connection l Link Setup Using the System menu j The System menu s Link Setup can only be used in off line mode NOTE the Download DB Upload DB can only be used in on line mode i Connect This menu is used to connect the OfficeServ DM to the key phone system Click on System gt Connect The following screen is displayed ID admin Password Tenant No Tenant 1 x OK Cancel Enter the correct ID and Password then click on OK The OfficeServ DM downloads the initial data and switches to on line mode Entering the password After unsuccessful login attempts the program automatically go to the Normal screen The initial value for the ID password is set to admin samsung by default SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 25 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear her
219. de Mode iis s cune ate teen a hai mt 307 View System Reports nic cc enaaiiieheh ei tothe ate held di eee 308 Site NOMAN eeens eee ses aa neeaaea a aatia ea haan een eh 316 EIE OERS 1R AAT A EE 316 Explanation of Default Configuration s ssussenssnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 318 Application DESiGN ideene eiaa ee eters erase nee i ae 318 Import Basic Concepts eaei roaraa eS RAA a htt attendees 319 Configuration BIOCKS s sssnssnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnn nananana 325 Bye BOCK merreerioena erin nnna ex tec aana a eea a aa reed eng edn eG 325 Dial BlOCK jiii ia aa e a E a ES 326 Directory BOCK Te e ei cies dade keine ea a eae et 331 BEIE SARNE at Aoi E E AEAEE 336 Extension Blocks visited Aoi tater ee AA td ieee R 346 LIStiBlock ananman etic ee aes ee a eee E 363 Mailbox Blok eseina entiere aeara a fetes al eve See eli 369 MGlass Blockin eiea ineie aa eaa ea aaaea N yeh les Peel 383 Menu Boek a T r T a a a aA a A A E E SAER EER 394 Mode Blok sv se iceste irinte eie a es Bee ee ee 402 POM BIOG Kisser cetvoveceuttorss aivns viet oe ateeeeeandes ente naa ia estar vlad cetera teh 406 QUery Block ie e Soild ee dinners 412 Speak Blockers dena ated tReet ee ieee eee tee ida ght ieee eal tee 419 Station Block 2 sec ici tiensesitet T T AE 423 CHAPTER 7 Conference Card Programming 429 GOMPEFON COS sied onse es ake checks orobe rosana oeeo ve sa ceeetaeved
220. deconesesaussdbocdeatuedentssdbeceateesccteateheccuseendeete 429 Conference Admins iii iais aee aieeaa e AaW ea daa haa es 429 Conference Management cccccceeceecseeeseceeteneeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseaeeeeaeenes 434 12 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide CHAPTER 8 Troubleshooting 443 Can t execute OfficeServ DM with Web BrowSet cccsssssssseeeecccsssnsseeeeeeeceesnseeeeeeseoes 443 Current Installed Java Web Start is lower than the version 1 6 sssssscsssssssssssesees 446 ABBREVIATION 447 PTE Like oe Med Bh T ee RN dee SO REN Dor te he he Cee ea oh oR SA Oh Ree 447 Be Mitac ccc ls cdot cecunddh cate oea adente debe tenderent actie A dv untte total tel a i E 448 Iie Seg a te Sb 28 eter Balt Ld 3b 3 EAEE oh ee cede MAR an PERE oe 3 ok SAE nt 449 Wiest ccdeca Lin fa elect cctsin asd ea a duc oneal Sad teas coven a a Sedeeteae aaa 450 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 13 TABLE OF CONTENTS This page is intentionally left blank 14 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide CHAPTER 1 Introduction This chapter gives a brief introduction to the OfficeServ DM and its core functionalities Introduction to the OfficeServ DM The OfficeServ DM is a PC version MMC Man Machine Communication program designed to configure and set the OfficeServ key phone system s environment The OfficeServ DM comprises two parts environment setting and
221. ded again No Item Cost Allows the item code and cost entry to be skipped when checking the Hotel feature SMDR Log All Allows the SMDR records to be saved in the Hotel feature if the requirements of admin and normal station are satisfied and the cost is 0 AOC Call Cost Specifies whether to charge the ISDN line in the AOC when the Hotel feature is enabled Check in Restrict Specifies whether to restrict the phone if the phone deposit is not entered at check in Check in Forced Auth Code Specifies whether to set the phone allocated to the room to FAC mode at check in SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the SMDR Alarm Hotel Option Settings 1 2 z 4 Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 7 SMDR Alarm Hotel Options from the Tree Viewer View the current SMDR Alarm Hotel Option settings View the SMDR Alarm Hotel Option settings Save the changes Station Phone Group Options Specifies whether to use the Station Phone Group functions and changes the system counter and system time variables for the SMDR Alarm Hotel functions Station Phone Group Items Item Description Group All Log Out Specifies whether the function which excludes all members from a station group temporarily can be used or not Door Lock Open Time 100 ms Sets the door open time Enter a value in units of 100 ms 100
222. delete one of them You can select ranges such as MON FRI to cover week days only or SUN SAT to cover all seven days as used by SYSTEM AUTO Start 288 The Hour and Minute when a change in mode should occur The hour must be specified in 24 Hr format i e 1 30 P M is entered as 13 30 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Subscriber List To access the subscriber list from the System Main Menu press SUBSCRIBER LIST Then select a group number the default subscriber group is 01 You can have up to 99 different subscriber groups on the OfficeServ N System system These are typically useful in multi tenant environments but also have other useful applications where you need to isolate some members of an application from others This area of configuration is used to quickly view or edit the subscriber list You will see a list of subscribers along with their extension and their mailbox number Entering a New Subscriber To enter a new subscriber press ADD button Type in the subscriber s last name enter a comma and type the subscriber s first name Then create or select the extension and mailbox for this subscriber OfficeServ System stores the subscriber s name in last name first name format When entering the subscriber s name this format should be followed This format is only important because the directory feature will search on a specific field f
223. e Disconnect During on line mode click on System gt Disconnect to disconnect from the system and switch to off line Download DB This menu is used to download the key phone system s database to the user s PC Click on System gt Download DB On the following screen create a new file or select an existing one gt DB Control Download System OfficeServ 7100 Country Download Cancel DB File Group All Al Select Selected item s 163 163 Menu Description Select Status 2 1 0 System Selection Y 202 LAN Parameter Pia lay System Options 2 2 0 Cabinet Information 2 3 0 Virtual Cabinet Information 2 4 1 Port Information 2 6 8 PRI Trunk Data 2 8 0 Numbering Plan Fo US LCR Options adie Network Dial Translation shee Networking Options 335 Remote Station Dial Translation 4 14 1 Station Groups 4 1 2 Trunk Groups 4 2 1 Station Pair SS GS BS BS BS 8 BS ISU IS BS IS BS Ss 2 Create anew file or select an existing one 26 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide s smem SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 27 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here
224. e Gatekeeper manually according to the prefix select MANUAL For other cases select AUTO SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description URQ Reason Mode When the Gatekeeper transmits a URQ message to the gateway the gateway disables the Gatekeeper connection according to the REASON code RRQ Fail Time sec Sets the interval to transmit a RRQ again when the gateway transmits a PRQ to the Gatekeeper and it fails GRQ Send Sets whether the gateway sends a GRQ message Gatekeeper State Displays the status of the Gatekeeper Viewing and Changing the H 323 Trunk Option Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 1 H 323 Trunk Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current H 323 Trunk option settings 3 Change the SIP Option settings 4 Save the changes SIP Options Sets the SIP parameter values SIP Option Item Description Gateway Call ID Sets the caller ID to account DIL Number If the dial digits is not included in the received call this option specifies the number to which the call is made to be received Signal Port Sets the UDP port number for signaling Caller ID Type Sets the caller ID type to send to the receiving side when sending a call It can be displayed only if it has the same type as the caller sent MFR Alloc When an incoming VoIP trunk call is sent directly to other tr
225. e Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 226 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide a 4 Change the Diagnostic Time values Save the changes i Voice Mail SVMi Create Subscriber Sets assigning download option of station group number and mailbox Download option has 4 values NONE EXT MBX BOTH BOTH value means that both extension number and mailbox are downloaded Viewing and Changing the SVMi Create Subscriber Settings 1 2 4 4 Select 5 Features gt 5 9 Voice Mail gt 5 9 1 SVMi Create Subscriber from the Tree Viewer View the current SVMi Create Subscriber settings Change the SVMi Create Subscriber settings Save the changes SVMi Auto Record When a station is busy the new call can be recorded automatically to the voice mailbox card This function sets the information used for this operation Viewing and Changing the Auto Voice Mailbox Recording Options i Select 5 Features gt 5 9 Voice Mail gt 5 9 2 SVMi Auto Record from the Tree Viewer View the current auto voice mailbox recording options Change the auto voice mailbox recording options Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 227 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here VMAA Options Sets the variables related to the voice mailbox VM and auto attendant AA Voice Mailbox VM and Auto Attendant AA
226. e ROP port SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description Use Loud Bell For Page Cabinet 3 Sets whether to use the LB port of the MISC card in Cabinet3 as the ROP port Loop Trunk Tone Disconnect Checks and disconnects after receiving a busy tone from the loop trunk SLI2 PRS Service When a station connected to the SLI2 card sends an external number this option sets whether to send the Polarity Reverse Signal PRS to the port when the opposite party s answer is recognized External BGM MOH The BGM or MOH sound source can be either an internal sound source or an external sound source This option sets which of them is used Viewing and Changing the System Options Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 5 System Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the System Option values currently set Change the System Option values 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 71 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here SVMi Options Sets the information related to the voice mailbox card SVMi Option Items VMS Day Night Ring Plan 1 Sets the ring conversion mode between the Ring Plan 2 system and the voice mailbox Ring Plan 3 Ring Plan 4 Ring Plan 5 Ring Plan 6 Warning Destination Sets the station or station group to rin
227. e Ring Group Pair Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 2 Station Pairing gt 4 2 5 Ring Group Pair from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Ring Group Pair settings J Sets Ring Group Pair settings 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Ring Plan Ring Plan Time Sets the start time and end time for automatic switching to Night mode You should select the ring mode for each day of the week and enter the start time and end time for the selected ring mode When it reaches the start time of a ring mode of a day of the week the station changes to that ring mode When it reaches the end time it changes to other ring mode If the end time is earlier than the start time the ring mode changes at the end time of the next day of the week The ring mode change button RTO or RP button is not needed but if you want to change the ring mode manually and forcibly it is convenient to use the mode change button If the Day Night mode is changed manually using the RTO mode change button the specified mode is preserved until you change it to other mode manually Enter the hour and minute in 24 hours mode when entering the time 01 SUN Sunday 02 MON Monday 03 TUE Tuesday 04 WED Wednesday 05 THU Thursday 06 FRI Friday 07 SAT Saturday Requirements e When specifying the ring mode it is convenient to specify the whole time to Night mode and
228. e Table screen shown in this section is for discussion and display purposes only One page contains the Schedule Table parameters The parameters are grouped by category as follows ear ar AEA ag OfficeServ Device Manager System File Options Util Tab Help B 8 6 D amp B lalla PortBase Card Base Page Search 3i 8 3 Schedule Table lB Functional Add lI Delete 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing Delete _No Mode Name Ports Date Weekday Start 4 Group amp Table w j 1 5 Features oO 2 6 System Control 5 8 VMAA F 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 1 B 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference e a E Bju mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 0 Office Serv MP205S AS 2010 11 14 PM 4 56 24 OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Description Mode Name This is the mode block which will start the application To create a new mode press ADD button Select a new or existing mode block The Mode Name column is automatically filled in To finish scheduling this mode fill in the rest of the line with the following information Ports The port number 1 through 6 sets a mode change for a particular port If there are no other entri
229. e can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block name may not be the same as another Block name MBX EXT or LIST Numbers may not be duplicated within the same group 346 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide ltem Continued Description OfficeServ System stores the subscriber name in either lastname firstname or firstname lastname When entering the subscriber name it is suggested you follow one for mat or the other for the entire application If the name is entered as firstname lastname OfficeServ System will NOT automatically re sort it to lastname firstname but the subscriber would still be able to be accessed correctly from the directory However by mixing and matching formats with in an application would cause the list of blocks to appear to be out of order This format lastname firstname vs firstname lastname is only important because the directory feature will search on a specific field lastname or firstname If you did not put a comma after the lastname in the lastname firstname format or put a comma after firstname in the firstname lastname format the directory search would not be accurate and subscribers entered out of format could not be accessed from the Directory Number The number that must be entered by the caller in order to access the subscriber extension It does no
230. e leaving a message in the mailbox When the Escape digit is pressed IVM will immediately exit the process it s in and go to the block defined in this pointer GREET DTMF This is the Block that the OfficeServ System passes control to if the caller enters any valid DTMF while listening to the mailbox greeting If defined the Admin digit escape digit digit to skip the greeting and the operator digit are not considered valid for this pointer The target block is a menu which performs a search operation to match the caller ENTRY to the INPUT value of a pointer or Number of an Extension Mailbox or Announcement OPERATOR This is the target Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if the caller presses the Operator digit while listening to the mailbox greeting or recording a message AUTO FWD This is the Mailbox to forward new messages to when the time has expired in the Auto Forward Message After parameter The target must be another mailbox and may not point back to itself 380 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Activity Mailbox Block TEMPLATE MBX General Authorization Alerts MM amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director Activity Activity Data last accessed Activity Public Subscriber Totals Mailbox access count Message sent Message received Total connect minutes Current message cou
231. e mailbox greeting USER EXIT The Block proceeded to if a mailbox user presses star Q to exit from their mailbox It is recommended that the named Block be the initial MENU Block to allow the user to return to the main options DIRECTORY The Block to go to if the caller presses the digit associated with Directory Assistance SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 393 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Menu Block The Menu is used to speak something to the caller collect a caller s DTMF entry and pass control to another Block Amenu can accept entries from 1 to 16 digits in length The Menu performs a search operation to match the caller ENTRY For example a Menu prompt may be You may dial an extension directly or for sales press 1 for service press 2 If the caller presses 1 a pointer with an Input value of lt 1 gt directs the caller to an extension group within the phone system called SALES If the caller entered 223 the MENU may be configured to search for an extension or mailbox When a match is found the OfficeServ System looks to see if it should translate the input into a new value before performing the search OfficeServ System then transfers control to Block defined in the target name field This is all done in the in the Menu Input Processor General Menu Block TEMPLATE MNU General Menu Input Processor Activity Label Name TEMPLATE M
232. e system Total Message Count The total number of messages in the system This includes new and saved messages Avg The average number of messages per mailbox Messages Mai Ibox Disk Space The total disk space available in hours and minutes Available SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 317 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Explanation of Default Configuration Application Design 318 Creating an application consists of linking the appropriate Blocks into a set of Call ControlPaths which for a particular caller or group of callers represents a Call Routing Solution The number of ControlPaths needed to establish a satisfactory Routing Solution depends upon how many alternatives or variations the organization wishes to provide to satisfy the anticipated needs of the caller s The default application is built using Blocks Each block has a specific purpose and are chained together to build the application This allows the caller to pass from one to the other as the call is processed The default configuration in the OfficeServ System has been designed to simplify installation and reduce the amount of time it takes to learn the application Many of the configuration options have been disabled or fixed at a default value When a call is answered it is processed by a number of blocks behind the scenes These blocks are hidden for reasons of simplicity The ca
233. eServ DM User Guide MOH MPS MSN NAT OAS OS PBX PC PCB PRI PRS SIP SLI SMDR SMTP SVMi TMC TSW UCD UMS VM VMS VolP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Music on Hold Multi Programming System Multiple Subscriber Number Network Address Translation OfficeServ Application Server Operating System Private Branch eXchange Personal Computer Printed Circuit Board Primary Rate Interface Personal Response System Session Initiation Protocol Subscriber Line Interface Station Message Detail Recording Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Samsung Voice Mail integrated Trunk Module Controller Time Switch Universal Call Distribution Unified Messaging System Voice Mail Voice Mail System Voice over Internet Protocol 449 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here W WIP Wireless IP Phone WLAN Wireless LAN WLI Wireless LAN Interface 450 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd WEEE SYMBOL INFORMATION Correct Disposal of This Product Waste Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human hea
234. eceived from the network to a PCM voice If this option is set to a value less than 4 emphasis is put on the packet loss processing If set to a value larger than 4 emphasis is put on the packet delay Min Jitter Delay ms Selects the jitter delay value Max Jitter Delay ms Selects the maximum jitter delay value Loss Check Time sec Sets the loss check interval for RTP packets FAX ECM When using the T 38 fax this option sets the additional recovery function for fax transmission errors FAX Count Sets the maximum allowable number of the Internet FAX channels SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Parameter Description DTMF Type Sets whether to send DTMF signals along a voice channel INBAND or using a separate message OUTBAND TOS DiffServ Consists of eight 8 bits This option sets the priority to be used in a router or switch on the external networks If the network does not support this this option must be set to the default value T38 Retry Count Sets the retry count in the T38 Redundancy Field T38 G711 Sets whether to apply the T38 if the exit codec of the MGI is G 711 802 1 Priority Sets the priority field for Ethernet frames composed by the 802 1 standard The priorities of packets are divided into the packets that must be processed urgently and the packets that have a time and those packets are processed
235. econd station does not answer Set up do not use The dial string used to set up a conference call after the second station answers Tear down do not use The dial string needed to tear down a conference call and drop the second station SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 411 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Query Block Query Blocks are used to create a voice questionnaire The OfficeServ System can be configured to ask the caller a series of questions record the caller s voice responses and combine the responses into single or multiple voice message s that is are placed into one or more specified mailbox es Common applications are order entry caller opinion surveys and information requests To send the voice response to more than one mailbox send the response to a list When the mailbox user reviews a message recorded by QUERY Blocks each of the responses is played back in the order it was recorded preceded by a playback prompt if used to identify it The operation can be configured to offer callers the options of playing back changing or confirming their response with DTMF commands or it can be programmed so that it requires no DTMF entries at all When used in conjunction with MENU Blocks sequences can be created which involve both voice and DTMF responses e g Dial 1 to order nails or 2 to order bolts The Operating Modes i
236. ed Retrieve public caller allowed Allowed When this option is available a subscriber that accesses their mailbox while another caller is leaving a message will be given the opportunity to immediately connect with that caller Busy greeting Allows a subscriber to record a busy greeting This option can allowed only be set by the subscriber if the extension has Greeting type of Basic Designated If this is set to Yes then a subscriber can use the Access location allowed Manager Menu digit 4 from the Main Menu to set an alternate number where they can be reached This number can be an internal or external location When this feature is activated OfficeServ System will perform a full supervised Confirmed transfer If there is no answer at the designated location the transfer will be aborted and the caller will be returned to the OfficeServ System to follow the No Answer call condition rules for that subscriber Stored phone This allows the subscriber to enter a list of up to 9 personal numbers phone numbers where the subscriber can be reached Examples allowed of this would be cell phone branch office home etc These numbers may be quickly entered into the designated location Alternate or positions 1 5 may be used by the find me feature See Stored Numbers Extended A Y in this parameter allows the subscriber to use Extended prompting Subscriber Prompting Extended Prompting plays al
237. ed they will be able to access and program the Personal greeting menu from their telephone There are 9 personal greetings available and any greeting may be assigned to any call coverage condition The call coverage conditions are NO ANSWER Your telephone has rung but it did not answer BUSY Your telephone is busy must be allowed by Administrator SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued BLOCKED A subscriber has blocked calls to their extension must be allowed by administrator NIGHT The subscribers personal availability schedule reports that the subscriber is an unavailable extension must be allowed by administrator CALL SCREENING The subscriber has selected the call screening option must be allowed by Administrator If a subscriber records only the greeting assigned to the No Answer Call Coverage Condition then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage Conditions No Answer Busy Blocked Night and Rejected Caller In this case the greeting should be very general Availability Schedule If allowed by setting Scheduling to Y a subscriber may define an availability schedule During the time a subscriber is according to this schedule available the call will be transferred to the extension blocks dial number and the no answer greeting will play if recorded If the subscriber is not available according to this s
238. editor PTR Files are stored as TXT files Each line of a pointer file appears and acts exactly like a pointer on the OfficeServ System Menu s Input Processor screen This operates as an extension to the input pointers on the MENU Block Also a single pointer file can be used for more than one MENU Block Type Is the three character abbreviation for the type of block targeted Below are a few examples MBX represents Mailbox EXT represents Extension MNU represents Menu Gp Group name Target Specifies the block to pass control to when the input value is matched Name with the input from the defined input source Input Value Column The Input value is a defined event pointers that directs the OfficeServ System to other Blocks The Input Processor contains Input Pointers that determine which Application Block receives control of the call next Upon finding a match it examines the type of action specified in that pointer and passes control to the object named in the pointer s target These pointers may go directly to an object with or without requiring the caller to enter a password translate the Input Value to a new value or search a large array of objects for one matching the Input Value The input value can be any digits that are to be processed by the Menu These can be digits dialed by the caller or digits passed from previous blocks The origin for these digits are determined by the contents of the input FR
239. eeaseecteascseesh ateunesterees O EEE aR EAE Ea RESNA 3 Document Content and Organization c ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseaeeeeaeeseaeeseaeeteaeeseaeete 3 CONVENTIONS spiscine apee eo a aE r pE a E Ea E ae ROEE eai PEER ESSERE iR 5 Console Screen Output eccceeeeeeseeeeseeeceaeeeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseaeesaeessaeeesaeessaeeesaeessaeeesaees 5 Revision HISTO 5 2cccsiccscicce cs cpadaecnechldi ca egtced ce slater svar bendedta naps adhe AE E EAEE 6 SAFETY CONCERNS 7 SIAN eT KAPE NEE ete cathe E tees E E EE A 7 CHAPTER 1 Introduction 15 Introduction to the OfficeServ DM cccsecsseesseeeseeesseeenseeenseeenseaenseasaeeesneeesseeeenseaeneees 15 Functionalities and Characteristics scssssssesescrsssesseessessseeseesesessssenseeennsssnnans 15 CHAPTER 2 Launching the OfficeServ DM 17 ENViIrOnMe nt cseceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaseeeeeenseeeeesseeeeeaseeeeeesseeeseaseeeeseseeeeseaseneesaseeeseaseneeeesseneeeneeeeneas 17 Connecting Web Server vis ccscicesssceccssiccsseccecendscerecucntsadenccdsasuev ccnen eave tecuevevdecescenesectennveeseneaed 18 Java Web Start Plugin Installation ceccsseseseeesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeenseeenseeenseeesseeeaseasaeeeenseaenes 19 Launching the OfficeServ DM ccssceseessseeseseessseeenseeseseeenseesaseesseeaseeeeseseessseeseeeeseenees 20 Registration site list for OfficeServ System ccceeceseeeseeeeeseeseeeeneeeeeseeenseeseeeeeneeeeeeees 21 Connect to OfficeServ SyStem
240. eeting if recorded their Primary Greeting if recorded or be directed to the Call Director on page four for instructions on where to send the call for that call condition FULL SUPERVISED OfficeServ System transfers the call and waits until the call is answered If the call is not answered NO ANSWER the call transfer is aborted pulling the call back and follows the extension Blocks No Answer call condition rules This can be play the subscriber s Primary No Answer Greeting if recorded or be directed to the Call Director on page four for instructions on where to send the call for that call condition Each of the next supervision levels are simply Full Supervision levels with added functionality beneficial for the Subscriber being called PROMPT A prompted supervision level performs a Full Supervision call transfer If the call is answered it plays a prompt to the called party Transferring a call after the answering party says hello This is useful if simply trying to identify a call is being transferred by the OfficeServ System ANNOUNCE This supervision level is very similar to the Prompted supervision In this case the called party hears There is a call for Extension 2001 or There is a call for Jane Doe After the that the call is handled in the same manner as a Full Supervision transfer CONFIRM This level not only performs a an Announced Supervision but also now allows the Subscriber the option of acc
241. effect after you restart Internet Explorer X M Reset custom settings Reset to Medium default k Reset CE e Downloads gt Automatic prompting for file downloads This must be Enable 444 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Downloads gt File Download This must be Enable Security Settings Trusted Sites Zone xi M Settings e Downloads Disable gt Enable i File download O Disable Enable e5 Font download O Disable Enable O Prompt a Enable NET Framework setup O Disable Enable _ Miscellaneous e Automatic prompting for file downloads rress data snurres arrose domaine Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer Fa M Reset custom settings SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Reset to Medium default 7 Reset cesi 445 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Current Installed Java Web Start is lower than the version 1 6 At least JRE 1 6 should be installed to use OfficeServ DM If current installed Java Web Start Version is lower than 1 6 you can see the picture below Java Web Start 1 4 2 09 Java Web Start Unexpected Error L Unable to launch OfficeSer DM Starting app In this case you must uninstall an already installed Java program and reinstall Uninstll Procedure gt K
242. el function RTO Fixes ring mode RING PLAN OVERRIDE SETDND Sets releases the Do Not Disturb function of other station REMOTE SET DND SETMG Leaving a message SET MESSAGE W O RING SG Direct station group selection STATION GROUP SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 167 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Function that can 3 Ha Description be specified SLOCAT Checks the locations of the hotel staff STAFF LOCATER Hotel function SMDR Displays prints and removes the call charge SNR Saved number redial SAVED NUMBER REDIAL SP Monitors the auto call distribution groups SUPERVISOR SPD Speed dial SPEED DIAL SPKR Speaker SPEAKER This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys STATE Sets the status of the boss STORE Saves the caller ID in the individual speed dial buffer CID STORE SYSALM System alarm SYSTEM FAULT ALARM TCLIP Allows the phone to send the calling line ID differently for each call Temporary CLIP TG Direct trunk selection button TRUNK GROUP TIMER Timer TIMER TRARPT Processes the statistics data TRAFFIC REPORT TRSF Transfer TRANSFER This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys UA Night ring answer UNA PICK UP VG SVM 800 group messages VM Calls the embedded IPUMS voice mailbox VM MEMO VMADM Changes the
243. elect 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 8 PRI Trunk Data from the Tree Viewer View the PRI trunk data Change the PRI trunk data Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide T1 Trunk Data Sets the service type and signal type for each E1 trunk whether to create and detect the CRC4 when serving the E1 or PRI and whether the analog trunk provides the caller ID Items to be Specified Item Description CRC6 On Off When serving the E1 or PR this field sets whether to create and detect the Cycle Redundancy Check CRC4 Coding Mode Sets the T1 coding mode Signal Mode Sets the T1 signal mode ANI Trunk Sets whether the analog trunk provides caller ID or not Channel T1 Line Sets the E1 trunk service mode T1 Signal Sets the signal type to be used when the E1 trunk is used as DID or E amp M Requirements e The CRC6 On Off setting can be used in a network where the CRC4 frame service is available AnANl trunk can only be specified if the phone service vendor provides its caller ID To use the E1 trunk the TEPRI board or TEPRI2 board must be installed in the system For the TEPRI board set the number 1 jumper on the TEPRI board to E1 mode and the number 2 jumper to E1 T1 mode For the TEPRI2 board set the number 1 jumper of the module that corresponds to the port you want to use in the two 2 TEPRI2 board jumper modules to E1 mode a
244. eling MESSAGE CANCEL CBK Reservation CALL BACK CC Multi ring service and call pick up button by station CALL COVERAGE CHIN Check in Hotel function CHOUT Check out Hotel function CHOICE Displays the SPOT Choice information CID Selects the CID function CONF Conference CONFERENCE CONP Displays the networking name CONNECTED NAME DISPLAY CR Records the call to embedded IPUMS voice mailbox CALL RECORD 170 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Function that can Continued be specified Desctlptien CREDIT Checks and changes the charge at which the room is available Hotel function CS Standby status of the auto call distribution group CALL STATUS CSNR Saves the caller ID in the SNR buffer CID SAVED NUMBER REDIAL DGPALM Sets the alarm time for multiple stations DICT Memo DICTATION DIR Directory dial DIRECTORY DIVERT Switches to the secretary DLOCK Door phone ring answering DOOR UNLOCk DND Do not disturb DO NOT DISTURB DNDO Ignores the Do not disturb setting BND OVERRIDE DP Direct pick up DIRECT PICK UP DROP Drops and returns the opposite call when forwarding a call CALL DROP DS Direct station selection button DSS KEY DT Direct trunk selection button DTS KEY EP Call pick up of an established call ESTABLISHED CALLPICK UP EXTEND CNF24 MEET ME CONFERENCE EXTEND EXTMIC Sele
245. emise and On Premise Each of these Station Block types comes with factory preset settings which should not be changed If you want to change any of these parameter settings press copy button and enter a new name for the Block You now have a new Station Block Make the necessary parameter setting changes to the new Block and assign it as necessary Save the original five Station Blocks with their factory default settings for future reference and use SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 423 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here General Station Block TEMPLATE STN General Override Strings Label Name TEMPLATE STN Matching Dial Strings 2 Prefix and Sufix Prefix Sufix Transfer Controls Simultaneous xfers Conference calls Internal station Monitor transfer Call Progress Parameters Max Time of Waiting for Answer 30 Rings for no answer 3 lBusy cycles for busy 3 Sience duration 6 Max Time of waiting for Silence 6 Item Description Label Name Label name Matching Dial There are two ways for the OfficeServ System to select a Strings station block The station is specifically selected by a Mailbox or Extension Block or Automatic selection This Matching Dial String area is where the automatic selection takes place If a Station Block has not been explicitly assigned to a ph
246. emory dump status Port Clear Initializes forcibly the items related to call processing or DB for a station or trunk Type of Port Initialization Type of Port Initialization Description Call Clear Initializes the call processing part DB Initial Initializes the DB Initializing a Station Trunk Port Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 5 Port Clear from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the number of station trunk you want to initialize and set the type of initialization 3 Save the changes 276 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Set Relocation Exchanges all the information that each station has Requirements The phone information auto exchange is available between the same type of phones only If the phone type is not the same the Invalid device type message is displayed when saving the changes Exchanging the Phone Information Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 6 Set Relocation from the Tree Viewer 2 Set the station number to exchange the phone information with 3 Save the changes Copy Station Key Copies the button settings for a phone to other phone Copying the Phone Button Setting Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 7 Copy Station Key from the Tree Viewer 2 Set the station number From of the original digital phone to copy from and the station number To to paste the copied
247. en Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference a el x a e a a Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 44 14 The Override Mode has one page which contains all parameters The parameters are grouped by category as follows Port This parameter specifies which port s are to be set active to a specific Mode block Mode This field is used to pick which Mode block is to be asserted SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 307 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here View System Report 308 Management Information The OfficeServ System architecture provides a large number of counters to track specific events occurring in an application and on a system wide basis this allows an administrator to quickly view activity and parameter value settings The OfficeServ System offers activity data and parameter value settings that provide management information on volume of calls call connect time messaging status and resource utilization Note that there are many applications that may be created that introduce complexity to the reporting process For instance blind transfers will cause
248. en to caller silence before assuming the caller has stopped timeout talking SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 385 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Continued Description Digit for operator assistance The Operator digit when defined allows the caller while listening to the subscribers personal greeting or recording a message to press a specific digit to transfer to the operator defined by the OPERATOR pointer Digit to skip greeting The digit to skip the greeting when defined allows the caller while listening to the subscribers personal greeting to enter a specific DTMF digit to skip the greeting and enter record mode Digit to escape The ESCape digit controls the following functions when using a mailbox In the mailbox public mode if entered while the mailbox greeting is being played or any time prior to the caller beginning to speak the message is canceled and OfficeServ System exits the mailbox using the lt PUBESC gt pointer If entered after the caller begins it will terminate the recording just as with any other DTMF tone Used to exit from the opening menu of the mailbox or List box user mode OfficeServ System will use the lt USER EXIT gt pointer to determine where to go next In the mailbox or List box user mode the Escape digit is generally used as a cancel key to abort the current operation and return
249. epresents SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 417 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Error Count The number of calls processed by this Block which encountered a condition which OfficeServ System could not recognize or were terminated due to a processing error and what percentage of the total calls this number represents NEXT Count The number of calls processed by this Block during which the Block completed its function and the caller was passed to the Target of the Next pointer and what percentage of the total calls this number represents 418 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Speak Block The purpose of a Speak Block is to speak a prompt or system information to the caller A Speak Block contains two prompts in addition to speaking system information After speaking to the caller control is passed to another Block based on the target of the NEXT pointer This Block is commonly used to speak a salutation to the new caller and is useful for verifying caller input before passing control of the caller to the next Block An administrator may select system prompts or record customized prompts in the Voice Studio for use in this Block Up to three prompts may be played but only the first and third prompt positions in the sequence are prompts The second position speaks a unique index or Register value which may be any o
250. epting redirecting rejecting or record a real time greeting for the call If the call is rejected it is considered to be a Blocked call condition The call transfer is aborted pulling the call back and follows the extension Blocks Blocked call condition rules SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 349 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description This can be play the subscriber s Blocked Greeting if recorded Primary Greeting if recorded or be directed to the Call Director on page four for instructions on where to send the call for that call condition This level of supervision is automatically used in all Designated location Follow Me and Find Me applications or whenever the Alternate Number Field is used SCREEN The system requests the name of the caller rings the subscriber and announces who is calling The subscriber has the option of accepting redirecting rejecting or record a real time greeting for the call If the call is rejected it is considered to be a Blocked call condition The call transfer is aborted pulling the call back and follows the extension Blocks Blocked call condition rules This can be play the subscriber s Blocked Greeting if recorded Primary Greeting if recorded or be directed to the Call Director on page four for instructions on where to send the call for that call condition Subs
251. erver verifying it is the Client it said it was DOMAIN OPTIONAL The Domain is used as part of the authentication process between the IVM and the Mail server Based on the Local Domain Name and Domain ID the mail server can validate that it is accepting mail from this Client Optional parameters are associated with Authentication to the Mail Server Mail Servers that are on a Local non Public IP often do not require authentication REPORT If an E Mail fails or is rejected by the Mail server a Failure is generated after the total number of Attempts parameter in the MCLASS has been exceeded a Failure Message is generated and sent to the recipient entered in this field This is usually the ON Site Systems or IT Administrator The Recipient could be an OFF Site Administrator as well Important Note If the LAN is down if the SMTP Server is Down or for numerous other Network failures it may not be possible for the IVM to notify the Administrator of a failure REPLY TO Many Mail Servers will require a Valid Reply To address E Mails with a Blank or Non Formatted Reply To could be considered SPAM and blocked by the Server This parameter only applies to E Mails sent that do not have a valid or known From address as in a Public Caller See the Mailbox Block From parameter of an individual subscriber for creating Valid From addresses for subscribers sending voice messages to other subscribers SAMSUNG
252. es provided by the local or long distance service providers Viewing and Changing the Tone cadence of the System Select 5 Features gt 5 7 System Tone Ring gt 5 7 1 Tone Cadence from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current tone cadences of the system View the tone cadences of the system 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 217 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Tone Source View the external tone source e g a music source instead of the normal system tone TONE for certain calls Viewing and Changing the Tone Source Select 5 Features gt 5 7 System Tone Ring gt 5 7 2 Tone Source from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current tone source 3 View tone source 4 Save the changes Ring Cadence View the ring cadences of the regular phone Viewing and Changing the Ring Cadences of the regular Phone Select 5 Features gt 5 7 System Tone Ring gt 5 7 3 Ring Cadence from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current ring cadences of the regular phone e View the ring cadences of the regular phone 4 Save the changes 218 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l Diagnostics Alarm Ring Sets the type of alarm used by the system alarm ring If the alarm ring is enabled the system searches all digital phones and rings the alarm ring of those phones in which the system button is assigned
253. es in the Schedule Table for this port it will run the specified mode continuously If this field is set to All this entry will be used by all ports which do not have specific port entries Ultimately the schedule is assigned to a port or group of ports If you have an entry for All ports to go into the Holiday Mode and an entry for ports 5 6 to go into the Emergency Service Mode at the same Date DOW and or Time then ports 5 amp 6 will NOT follow the mode setting set for ALL ports They will go into Emergency Service Mode and stay there until the net scheduled mode change that included or addressed ports 5 6 specifically Date Month and day of month mm dd when the change of mode will occur If a date is entered in this field no option will be given to make an entry in the DOW Day of Week field This entry will take a higher order of precedence over records based on DOW only on the date specified Therefore to guarantee a particular mode setting over a three day period a date entry should be created for each day of that period SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 287 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Week day Day of Week when a mode change is to occur regularly on specific day of the week Either the Date or Weekday column may be filled in If you should manage to make entries in both columns OfficeServ System will realize a conflict and automatically
254. eset Request MNF38 Card Active Card Active notification Viewing the Alarm History Select 6 System Control gt 6 1 Alarm Report gt 6 1 1 Alarm History from the Tree Viewer 2 View the alarm history Programming Logs Displays the times when the system programming mode was enabled or disabled and the ports station number or input and output ports which were programmed In case of the WebMMC PCMMC this function displays input and output ports in case of the MP40 MCP card the LAN port is displayed If the end time is not saved Illegal End is displayed The self station that is viewing the programming logs in the program mode is displayed as Current Saves the latest eight 8 pieces of information Viewing the System Programming Time Select 6 System Control gt 6 1 Alarm Report gt 6 1 2 Programming Logs from the Tree Viewer 2 View the system programming time SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 269 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Port Status Connection Status Displays the connection status of a station or trunk and displays the phone type of the station The opposite party is displayed during talking All members are displayed during a conference And during dialing or when the opposite party is not displayed only Busy is displayed Phone Types of Virtual Station
255. essage from the Tree Viewer 2 View the programmed messages J Change the programmed messages 4 Save the changes Large LCD Idle Display Specifies the announcement data to be displayed on the large LCD phone Viewing and Changing the Announcement Data to Display on the Large LCD Phone Select 5 Features gt 5 13 System Features gt 5 13 4 Large LCD Idle Display from the Tree Viewer View the announcement data display on the large LCD phone e Change the announcement data display on the large LCD phone 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 235 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Customer Access WMMC IT DM Sets the menu for user level 2 and 3 Viewing the Customer Access WMMC IT DM Select 5 Features gt 5 13 System Features gt 5 13 5 Customer Access WMMC IT DM from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Customer Access WMMC IT DM 3 Change the Customer Access WMMC IT DM 4 Save the changes Menu Use Status Displays the menu use status Viewing the Menu Use Status Select 5 Features gt 5 13 System Features gt 5 13 6 Menu Use Status from the Tree Viewer 2 View the menu use status 236 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Timer Option Features Transfer Recall Pickup Options Specifies whether to use the Transfer Recall Pickup function or not 1 ON 0 OFF You can also
256. essed during an intercom call One Touch Forced Specifies whether the one touch account code button Account Code can be used in Forced Account Code Input mode Area Code Delete Specifies whether a phonebook can be sent with the area code deleted or not Display Delay Time sec Sets the period of time for which the LCD message such as an error message remains displayed 1 to 250 sec Manual Signaling LED On Set the period of time for which the LED of the phone Duration sec of the opposite party remains turned on when the MS key is pressed 0 to 10 sec Display KSD Name Specifies whether to display the name of the speed dial for the transformer substation Viewing and Changing the Station Phone Group Option Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 8 Station Phone Group Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Station Phone Group Option settings View the Station Phone Group Option settings 4 Save the changes 248 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Station Features Station Options Changes the lock status DND status subscriber password and station name for each station Items to be Specified Lock Status Locks the phone so that others cannot use it when you are away DND Status Activates the DND function Initialize Password Sets or changes the personal password Station Name Changes the user name fo
257. et Information 2 4 1 Port Information 48 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Comparing the data Example On the page with modified fields click on Details The following screen is displayed 3 2 2 15 MPS Card Record SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 49 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here i DB Conversion This menu is used to convert form Installation DB file to OfficeServ DM DB File 50 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Tab Menu You can select the alignment method from the Tab menu You can focus the menu when you select in Tab menu Close All 2 1 0 System Selection 2 1 1 System Information Close All Click on Tab gt Close All to close all opened windows SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 51 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Help Menu l Help Topics This menu displays help topics for the menu of OfficeServ DM Click on Help gt Help Topics to display the following screen 52 E Help Topics ui About program The Help menu is used to display the information of the OfficeServ DM Configuration A System Configuration System Selection A System Information Ly LAN Parameter LA system Time C License Key LD system Options LC
258. eta Characters for Call Restriction Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 8 Toll Restriction gt 4 8 3 Toll Wild Characters from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current meta characters for call restriction 3 Sets whether to use for each meta character dial 0 to 9 4 Save the changes Toll Pass Codes Sets the special code that is excluded from the restriction targets when restricting outgoing trunks Special Code Description PBX ACCESS CODE When the system is connected to a PBX this options sets the code to press to use that PBX five 5 codes four 4 digits SPECIAL CODE Code to be only for special use as it must be pressed to call with CO ten 10 codes four 4 digits TOLL OVERRIDE Urgent sending code that ignores call restriction and forced input code etc eight 8 codes fourteen 14 digits Override Use Trunk Group Trunk group to send the urgent sending code when it is pressed Viewing and Changing the Toll Pass Codes Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 8 Toll Restriction gt 4 8 4 Toll Pass Codes from the Tree Viewer View the current setting for Toll Pass Codes 3 Change the setting for Toll Pass Codes 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 161 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Trunk Toll Type Sets the restriction grade in call restriction for each trunk This function al
259. ettings Hybrid Trunk Mode E amp M Trunk Signal Immediate Start Viewing and Changing the Universal Trunk Data Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 6 Universal Trunk Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the universal trunk data Change the universal trunk data 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide BRI Trunk Data Sets the options for each Q Signaling BRI trunk and BRI trunk used for networking Requirements Check the following items before setting the BRI For the TEPRI board set the number 2 jumper on the TEPRI board to BRI mode For the TEPRI2 board set the number 2 jumper of the module that corresponds to the port to be used in the two 2 TEPRI2 board jumper modules to BRI mode After these are set reset as in 6 3 1 Pre Install Reset for the settings to be validated Viewing and Changing the PRI Trunk Data Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 7 BRI Trunk Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the BRI trunk data J Change the BRI trunk data 4 Save the changes PRI Trunk Data Sets the options for each Q Signaling PRI trunk and PRI trunk used for networking Items to be Specified Item Description Q Sig Trunk Specifies the Q Signaling PRI trunks to use for networking The data should be set in TEPRI card units CLIP Table Sets the number of the Calling Line Identification Presentation C
260. ewing and Changing the Trunk Call Groups Where Call Is Available 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 1 Call Restriction gt 5 1 5 Trunk To Trunk from the Tree Viewer View the current trunk call groups where call is available Select the trunk call group to receive the call and the trunk call group where call is available and set whether the call can be sent for each trunk call group Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide VoIP Options H 323 Trunk Options Sets the system parameters related to H 323 processing and H 323 Gatekeeper parameters H 323 Trunk Option Item Description GATEWAY CALL ID Sets the caller ID to account DIL Number If the dial digits is not included in the received call this option specifies the number to which the call is made to be received Signal Port Sets the IP port number for H 323 signaling Call ID Type Sets the caller ID type to send to the receiving side when sending a call It can be displayed only if it has the same type as the caller sent MFR Alloc When an incoming VoIP trunk call is sent directly to other trunk without passing via a station the DTMF signal is detected which enters from that trunk At this time this option sets whether to assign the DTMF Receiver Real Ringback When calling with a VOIP trunk this option sets whether to have a virtual tone heard or have a ring back tone received from the opposite pa
261. f 0 equals NO minimum password length Valid values can be set from 0 to 8 the default is 0 SYSTEM ADMIN This affects both the GUI and the TUI With the GUI Graphical User Interface this password gives the administrator access to all parameters It is the highest level password and enables the administrator access to shutting the system down With the TUI Telephony User Interface this password along with the remote login procedure gives the administrator access to recording system prompts and overriding the scheduling by engaging a specific mode This password is also required to access System Wide Parameters Without this password you would not be able to set the other system level passwords SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 291 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 292 Multilingual Voice Prompts Support The Multilingual Voice Prompt Support page shows a list of all installed languages Languages are defined by Language and Locale or dialect KEY CODE The key code is the digit entered by the caller and used by the OfficeServ System to identify a language selection This key code is used in a language selection menu that must be built specifically for your application DEFAULT SYSTEM LANGUAGE This sets the default operating language of the system All language selection is based on the order of the defined languages in this page If the languages are to be re ordered
262. f digits up to a maximum of eight 8 to be converted Mail Box Enter whether to assign the voice mailbox automatically Wait Length Enter the digit count for the number to be entered when using the entry Max Digit Enter the number of digits until the optimal route selection function starts to operate Station Display Sets whether to display the number in the station format SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 135 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 136 Viewing and Changing the Optimal Route Selection Station Dial Conversion Data Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 3 Networking gt 3 3 2 Network Dial Translation from the Tree Viewer 2 View the optimal route selection station dial conversion data 3 Change the optimal route selection station dial conversion data 4 Save the changes Extra System Link ID Specifies the information for the system to be communicated with via the Samsung Protocol for Networking SPNET This system interoperates with the optimal route selection function and has a total of 2000 tables The SPNET is a VoIP networking function developed by Samsung and is not a standard protocol Items to be Specified Item Description Node ID Sets the ID for the other system ID Address Sets the IP address for the other system Tel Number Sets a trunk number to use as a detour when communicating with another system via S
263. f the Block Type priority for this particular directory system to search By default the directory will search for extensions first and then mailboxes Gp For each Type that is entered you must select the Group Number where the selected Block Type should be search for In almost all standard installations you will only search in group 01 Prompts Directory Block TEMPLATE DIR Search Information Prompts Call Director Directory Control Prompts Description Enter name Target name prefix Description 0132 Description No matches found 0128 Description Invalid entry 0131 Description Press 9 for more names 0126 Description Press 0 for new names 0129 Description Press to exit 0130 Description Selection Prompts Description Press one 0118 Description Press two 0119 Description Press three 0120 Description Press four 0121 Description Press five 0122 Description Press six 0123 Description Directory Activity Accessed Target Found Escape No response Disconnect None Found els ujal alale u le This page contains a list of the prompts that the OfficeServ System plays to the caller when the directory feature is being used Enter name The prompt asking the caller to spell the called party s name This is the prompt you would change if you wanted
264. feature will search on a specific field lastname or firstname 370 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description If you did not put a comma after the lastname in the lastname firstname format or put a comma after firstname in the firstname lastname format the directory search would not be accurate and subscribers entered out of format could not be accessed from the Directory Number This is the number of the mailbox It can not be the same as any other mailbox block or list block This is the number that is used to give the block a unique identity It is also the number that is used to call the mailbox and can be referred to as it s Key Value Extension The extension number to which the mailbox belongs Mclass This is the name of the mailbox class of service that defines operating characteristics for this Mailbox Language This is a language option You may select from any installed language and from that point on the extension will respond to the authorized owner in the language selected Authorized owner means a user who has entered a valid password The Extension block also has a Language field and the OfficeServ System will try to resolve these fields to a single value make them match If conflicting information is contained in these fields the Extension block has priority and the Mailbox block wil
265. file management The former configures the environment to use the system s internal devices and the latter manages the database files and system program files Functionalities and Characteristics Integrating Managing the System Database The OfficeServ DM integrates and manages the OfficeServ key phone system s environment database Uploading Downloading the Database The OfficeServ DM can be used to download or upload the database to the user s PC or to the OfficeServ key phone system Uploading Deleting the Program The OfficeServ DM can be used to upload the program to the OfficeServ key phone system or to delete a file from the system SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 15 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here This page is intentionally left blank 16 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide on CHAPTER 2 Launching the OfficeServ DM This chapter describes the environment for running the OfficeServ DM and how to launch the OfficeServ DM Environment This section provides the minimum requirements for OfficeServ DM Minimum Requirements Below are the minimum requirements for the OfficeServ DM to function properly PC CPU Pentium IV 2 4 GHz or faster Main Memory 512 MB or more HDD Drive At least 1 GB of free space OS Microsoft Windows XP or later Modem 1 200 115 200 baud rate Compatible web browser
266. for IP calls Audio Codec Sets Preferentially used CODEC for SPNET Requirements The Self entry represents the self node and must be specified to use the networking function The others are the items for displaying the station numbers These can be left unspecified 134 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the System Link Numbers Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 3 Networking gt 3 3 1 System Link ID from the Tree Viewer 2 View the system link numbers 3 Change the system link numbers 4 Save the changes Network Dial Translation Specifies the dial number conversion data so that a station within another system connected through a trunk can be called using the same number system To call a station within another system connected via networking the user must usually dial the system link number and station number However by using the data that this program specifies the user can call an additional system link number by adding it to the station number entered In this event the call will be sent using the 3 1 2 Routing Digits This program can also be used if the system is not connected via networking when multiple optimal route selection function codes are needed In this case this program gives the speed dial effect Items to be Specified Item Description N LCR Number Enter the number of Network LCR Translation Digits Enter the number o
267. g in the event of a voice mailbox card alarm Alarm Threshold Sets the conditions for the voice mailbox card alarm Halt Status Sets whether to stop the voice mailbox card in operation Viewing and Changing the SVMi Options Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 6 SVMi Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Feature Option values currently set J Change the Feature Option values 4 Save the changes Connect User Profile Sets the User Profile about Admin and User Gateway Information Items Admin Sets the Admin Password User Sets the User ID Password and Level 72 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Connect User Profile Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 7 Connect Uesr Profile from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Connect Uesr Profile Change the Connect Uesr Profile 4 Save the changes f Cabinet Configuration Cabinet Information This window displays the status of the daughter boards for a card installed in the system This information can be viewed only Using this window you can easily view the information for the daughter cards mounted in a card without removing it Cabinet Information Displays the information for the cabinet Cabinet Information Items Item Description LP Version Displays the software version installed in the LP card Fan Status Displays
268. g up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block name may not be the same as another Block name Line is wink In a wink start situation the CO transmits a signal to say a call is start do not coming in OfficeServ System issues a wink to acknowledge the call use The wink for loop current is used in DID installations in which case the wait for loop current is set to Y for yes The setting N for No acknowledges a flash hook Wait for loop If this parameter is set to Y for Yes incoming calls are signaled via current do a loop current If set to N for No incoming calls are signaled via a not use ring signal Rings before This is the number of rings for the system to wait before going off answer do hook to answer a call not use Hunt group How are the calls presented to the OfficeServ System By default type this is set to Linear SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 407 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description Disconnect Disconnect supervision is generally transparent to the installer and signal the user When a calling party hangs up a signal IPC Message is sent to OfficeServ System indicating the caller has dropped and the OfficeServ System should hang up it s appropriate Port The OfficeServ System will by default only hang up if the switch tells it to do
269. ge the alarm time and message settings 4 Save the changes User Programmed Message Selects one of twenty 20 reasons on your station when you leave your seat 20 If an absence message is selected it is displayed on the LCD when the phone is in the standby state If another station makes a call to the phone the absence message is displayed on that station so that the caller can know that you are absent from your seat and the reason for this absence Requirements The user can enter the absence message numbers 16 to 20 The PGM MSG item of 4 7 2 COS Content must be set to Yes before you can set an absence message If you do not change the default of the PGM MSG item you cannot change or set an abSence message you can only cancel one Viewing and Changing the Absence Message Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 9 User Programmed Message from the Tree Viewer 2 View the absence message settings SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 257 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 258 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 3 Change the absence message settings 4 Save the changes Text Message Change or enter urgent text messages A station can use up to ten 10 urgent text messages Requirements Only the station for which the Text Message item of 2 5 6 DLI Data is set to Used can se
270. gramming procedure with OfficeServ DM CHAPTER 7 Conference Card Programming In this chapter we describe the conference card programming procedure with OfficeServ DM CHAPTER 8 Troubleshooting This section describes how to handle the problems that may occur while using OfficeServ DM ABBREVIATION Describes the acronyms used in this manual 4 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l Conventions The following types of paragraphs contain special information that must be carefully read and thoroughly understood Such information may or may not be enclosed in a rectangular box separating it from the main text but is always preceded by an icon and or a bold title WARNING Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in WARNING order to avoid personal injury or fatality CAUTION Provides information or instructions that the reader should follow in CAUTION order to avoid a service failure or damage to the system CHECKPOINT Provides the operator with checkpoints for stable system operation CHECK NOTE Indicates additional information as a reference NOTE a 0 p l Console Screen Output The lined box with Courier New font will be used to distinguish between the main content and console output screen text Bold Courier New font will indicate the value entered by the operator on the console screen SAMSUNG Ele
271. group AA Only VM AA group Even if the MP MGI VM key is not entered the VM port can be used as the AA port Ring Distribution Type For the Normal and MSG Group only among the station groups you can set their type to Uncondition Ring Distribution Type Description Sequential Always received to the first member of the group in standby Distribute Received to the members by turns according to the specified order Uncondition Received to all members Requirements e You can specify so that one station belongs to all station groups You can specify up to 99 members in a station group But if the ring distribution method is Uncondition you can specify up to 32 members only To ring the off hook ring to a member which is busy when the call is received to a group the Off Hook Ring item of the 2 5 2 Station On_Off Data must be set to On But at this time the off hook ring is ringed only if the ring distribution method is set to Uncondition 140 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Station Group Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 1 Grouping gt 4 1 1 Station Groups from the Tree Viewer 2 View the station group settings 3 Change the station group settings 4 Save the changes Trunk Groups Sets the trunk groups You can specify so that one trunk belongs to one or multiple trunk groups If setting a trunk group it can be
272. gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP SIP Station Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP SIP Station Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi SIP Station Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN SIP Station Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT SIP Station Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS SIP Station Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP SIP Station Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control Controls the volume for the conference attendants You can control the volume for each analog trunk conference member Conference Gain Control Items Member Number of the analog trunk conference members for which the volume is to be controlled Trunk Analog trunk No A number is given to each member sequentially starting from 0 Conf Gain Controls the sensitivity of the conference bridge TSW Gain Controls the sensitivity of the time switch ITP Volume Changes the handset and speaker gain of the IP phone TX Level Control Controls the phone sending sensitivity The maximum sending sensitivity is 9 206 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide TX Level Control Items Item Description TX Level Controls the phone sending sensitivity Max sensitivity 9 INDEX 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Misc Level Controls the sensitivity for the internal sound source of the MCP card or the external sound source of the MIS card 0 to 7 Greater the number
273. he SPOT View information SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Function Type Description NOCLIP Prevents calling line ID being sent No CLIP Send ABW Connects disconnects to the group agent for auto call distribution DGPALM Sets the alarm time for multiple stations CHOICE Displays the SPOT Choice information STATE Sets the status for the boss DIVERT Switches to the secretary NPAGE Networking announcement Paging Across Networked Node E LCR1 Extended optimal route selection 1 E LCR2 Extended optimal route selection 2 E LCR3 Extended optimal route selection 3 E LCR4 Extended optimal route selection 4 TCLIP Allows the phone to send a different calling line ID for each call Temporary CLIP RTO Switches the mode Ring Plan Time Override RP Switches the ring mode LOG Searches the latest call sent received Call Log DNDO Ignores the Do not disturb setting DND Override WAKEUP Sets the morning call time Hotel function BILL Bills the room charge Hotel function HOTEL Hotel Hotel function RB Bills the call charge Room Bill Hotel function RSV Displays the room status Room Status View Hotel function CREDIT Checks and changes the charge at which the room is available Hotel function CHIN Check in Hotel function CHOUT Check out Hotel function PTHR Aligns the networking call path
274. he Tree Viewer Set whether to clear and print the alarm buffer 3 Save the changes 278 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide WIP Clear Sets the items needed to release registrations of wireless terminals Items to be Specified Clear You can release the registration for each terminal There are two modes to release the registration Forced and Normal The Forced mode deletes only the related DB of the system to register a new terminal due to damage to the terminal etc The Normal mode deletes all of the databases of the system and the terminal through exchange of messages between them Current Status Sets whether to use the WIP IP address in static mode or not Viewing and Changing the Wireless Terminal Registration Clear Settings 1 Select 6 System Control gt 6 3 Commands gt 6 3 11 WIP Clear from the Tree Viewer 2 View the wireless terminal registration clear settings 3 Change the wireless terminal registration clear settings 4 Save the changes Memory Unmount This function is for memory UNMOUNT before restart system Items to be Specified STOP MEDIA Memory UNMOUNT in SD Card This option may not be available in certain OfficeServ models STOP MEMORY Memory UNMOUNT in SD Card and NAND Flash SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 279 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing and Changing the
275. he call Allowable values include any four digit prompt number 1000 9999 If DTMF tones are entered while these prompts are being spoken they will be interrupted and the digits will be carried forward into the next MENU Block SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 405 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here i Port Block The Port Block always precedes a Mode Block This Block contains all the necessary parameters to link the PBX Telephone system with the OfficeServ System This includes all call setup protocols hardware communication processes handshaking and switch integration The Block tells the physical port how to communicate with the hardware it is connected to The Port Block defines the physical connection between a OfficeServ System voice port and the phone system describing all the signals passed between the phone system and OfficeServ System It describes how calls are presented how to answer them and how to collect integration data describing an incoming call It defines the necessary dial strings to place callers on consultation hold and draw dial tone complete call transfers abort call transfers log on and disconnect The Port Block also defines what kind of disconnect supervision the phone system provides and how reliable it is The Port Block answers incoming calls and checks the Schedule Table to find out which Mode Block to pass control to The Block collects the Call Type Data and
276. he call to the station specified by 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing if no digit is entered after it is received by a DISA trunk Max Call Count Sets the maximum number of station calls that can be used at a time when using the DISA 1 to 99 Lock Error Count Sets the maximum password re entry count allowed for the DISA user when he enters a wrong password If this count is exceeded the port is locked 1 to 99 Call DISC Time min Sets the period of time that can be used after calls are received to the DISA 1 to 250 min SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description DTMF Detect Time min Sets the DISA DTMF receiving time Lock Out Time min Sets the period of time for which the DISA locking is maintained 1 to 250 min Pass Check Time min Sets the period of time that if passwords entered are wrong more than the specified times DISA locking is activated 1 to 250 min No Answer DISC Time sec Sets the period of time that if the recipient does not answer while the DISA incoming station rings the call is disconnected 0 to 250 sec No Action Ring Time sec Sets the period of time that if no digit is entered after a DISA call is received the call is processed according to the trunk ringing option 10 sec Viewing and Changing the Incoming CID DISA Option Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option
277. he caller leaves a message The target block allows the caller the option of returning to the beginning of the application or may send the caller to the Bye block if the organization does not want to give the caller additional options NOMSG This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if LEFT the caller does not leave a message The target block may allow the caller the option of returning to the beginning of the application or sending the caller to the Bye block if the organization does not want to give the caller additional options ESCAPE This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if the caller presses the escape digit while listening to the List greeting or while leaving a message When the Escape digit is pressed the OfficeServ System will immediately exit the process it s in and go to the block defined in this pointer GREET This is the Block that the OfficeServ System will pass control to if DTMF the caller enters any valid DTMF while listening to the List greeting If defined the Admin digit escape digit digit to skip the greeting and the operator digit are not considered valid for this pointer The target block is a menu The menu will perform a search operation to match the caller ENTRY to the INPUT value of a pointer or Number of an Extension Mailbox or Announcement OPERATOR This is the Block to go to if Operator assistance is requested 368 SAMSUNG Ele
278. he optimal route selection time table 4 Change the settings for the optimal route selection time table 5 Save the changes Routing Table Enter the trunk group to be selected based on the time and grade of the optimal route selection function that analyzes the external phone number dialed by the user and then connects the call to the lowest cost trunk group automatically and enter the number of the dial conversion table to be referred to based on the selected trunk group If the user dials a valid number the system selects the specific trunk group predefined in the Optimal Route Selection Routing Table Up to 99 numbers can be entered in the routing table If more than one trunk group is available for a call the system established this and selects an available trunk group from the first designated trunk group in sequence If all trunk groups are busy the call will be connected to the next trunk group that becomes available immediately and automatically Items to be Specified Item Description Trunk Group Sets the phone number for the trunk group Modify No Sets the dial conversion table 1 to 200 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 123 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing and Changing the Optimal Route Selection Routing Table 1 Le 3 4 5 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 4 Routing Table from the Tree Viewer Select
279. he phone number where you want to be notified of your new number messages if you have enabled message alert in your mailbox Delivery Enter the from to times for each day of the week that this subscriber Schedule should be notified of new messages Enter 2 digit for the hour 12 or 24 hour clock and 2 digits for the minute This schedule may also be set by the subscriber SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 375 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here MWI amp AutoFoward Mailbox Block TEMPLATE MBX General Authorization Alerts Mw amp AutoFoward E Mail Gateway Call Director This mailbox has an Myvi Message Waiting Indicators Yes MI number d Enable autoforward Message Autoforward Delete after forwarding Auto forward delay HH MM 0 0 Pager notification is enabled No Pager Notification Notify on urgent message only Station Dial d Notification Schedule Stop ON OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Item Description This mailbox It decides to notify that a new message has arrived LCD LED and has an MWI Tone is used for it MWI number It assigns a extension number to notify that a new message has arrived for this mailbox Enable auto This option turns Auto Forward on When set
280. hedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscribers 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 4 By Call Code 8 9 5 By Hour 8 9 6 By Port Number 8 9 7 By Day of Week 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference OfficeServ Devic g eeoa System File Options Util Tab Help a a lala D a e e le PortBase Card Base Page Search _8 9 3 Messaging Activity fuactionai Refresh Timer sec 15 2 Configuration a 3 Call Routing Reporting 4 Group amp Table Created mers Activity Public Subscriber Totals Mailbox Access Count Messages Received From Messages Sent From Mbxs No Messages Sent Current Messages Count New Messages Saved Messages Average Messages Mailbox Total Connect Minutes Disk Space Available MegaBytes I gt Tella E Message Reporting mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S TAS 2010 11 14 PM 5 46 17 Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the Report Counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Activity The Message Activity types Several different categories are shown Public The first column is the total n
281. his prompt is blank It may be changed to any other system prompt or you may replace it with a custom prompt Beep before recording Enables a beep to play prior to recording conversations SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 389 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here E Mail Gateway MClass Block TEMPLATE MCL General Public Caller Interface OutCall Prompts E Mail Gateway Call Director E Mail Gateway Host ID Port SMTP User ID Password Domain Attempts Retry Interval Adjust message retention Message retention to use Item Description Host ID Enter the IP address of the Host Mail Server used by the subscribers assigned this MClass Port The default recommended port to use is 25 Most Mail Servers look at port 25 for receiving and sending Mail SMTP User ID This is the User ID the IVM will use to log on to the Mail Server and Identify itself as a Client associated with sending Mail Mail Servers that are on a local LAN and that do not have Public IP addresses often do not require authentication Password This is the password associated with the IVM s User ID for logging into the Mail Server verifying it is the Client it said it was Mail Servers that are on a local LAN and that do not have Public IP addresses often do not require authentication
282. horize Code gt 4 5 1 Forced Code from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current forced input codes lt Set a code type for a station number 4 Save the changes 150 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Account Code If the account code is pressed for charging whenever making a call the account code changes You can enter up to 999 account codes Viewing and Changing the Account Codes 1 3 4 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 5 Account Authorize Code gt 4 5 2 Account Code from the Tree Viewer View the current account codes Enter the account code up to 14 characters long in the Account Code Number field Save the changes Authorization Code Sets the grade change code to enter when a call is made after changing the service grade of a station You can enter up to 5000 grade change codes A grade change code is 4 to 10 character long Viewing and Changing the Authorization Codes 1 Le J Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 5 Account Authorize Code gt 4 5 3 Authorization Code from the Tree Viewer View the current authorization codes Enter the grade code that needs changing into the Authorization Code field then enter the grade to change in the Authorized COS field Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 151 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 152 UCD UCD Group Options Specifies the
283. hould be sixteen 16 characters long It can contain and blank The password should be sixteen 16 alphanumeric characters long Viewing and Changing the SIP Number Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 7 SIP Number from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current number and password 3 Change the number and password 4 Save the changes Private IP Address Registers the IP address of the devices which use a private IP address among other devices that you want to use to connect an H 323 or SIP call from the system When connecting an H 323 or SIP call using the IP address that is registered here this function recognizes that it is connected to a city private network and sends the private IP of the system to the opposite party Viewing and Changing the Private IP Address Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 8 Private IP Address from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current private IP address 3 Change the private IP address 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MGI Parameter Sets the DSP parameters of the MGI board The parameters of the MGI 3 board and MGI 16 MG 164 board differ respectively You can set them individually MGI 3 Parameter Parameter Description Echo Cancel The Echo Cancellation is the function to remove echo generated by reflection of voice on the Packet Delay and PSTN This option sets whether to u
284. ich NAT system binds a private RTP port Public IP Address 2 Pulbic IP Address is only used for VoIP signaling protocols in a NAT network NAT system binds IP Address with Public IP and processes a voice stream Public RTP Port 2 Public RTP Port which NAT system binds a private RTP port Public IP Address 3 Pulbic IP Address is only used for VoIP signaling protocols in a NAT network NAT system binds IP Address with Public IP and processes a voice stream Public RTP Port 3 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Public RTP Port which NAT system binds a private RTP port 83 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 84 Viewing and Changing the Slot Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 15 MPS Card A amp N Select a gateway and cabinet number Select the Slot Information tab View and change the MGI parameter values 5 Save the changes CNF24 Card Provides network configuration of the CNF24 card s in the system Slot Information Sets the CNF 24 card parameters Slot Information Items CNF24 Parameters MGI Parameter Description IP Version Specifies CNF24 IP version lpv4 Ipv6 IP Address Specifies the IP address for the CNF24 card Subnet Mask Specifies the IP subnet mask This parameter is used by the system to calculate the range of IP devices subnet that are withi
285. ifies the call group to which each station or trunk belongs When you want to restrict calls between stations or trunk calling pick up you can specify it for each call group Requirements A station can be assigned to the call groups 001 to 300 A trunk can be assigned to the call groups 301 to 500 Viewing and Changing the Station Trunk Call Groups Select 5 Features gt 5 1 Call Restriction gt 5 1 1 Port Use Group from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current station trunk call groups 3 Select the station trunk number to change and enter the call group number 4 Save the changes Station To Trunk Dial Sets whether a call can be sent to a specific trunk call group YES or NO Requirements In the 5 1 1 Port Use Group one of call groups 001 to 300 can be set toa station and one of call groups 301 to 500 to a trunk Viewing and Changing the Usage for Each Call Group Select 5 Features gt 5 1 Call Restriction gt 5 1 2 Station To Trunk Dial from the Tree Viewer 2 View whether a call can be sent for each call group currently set SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 2 4 5 Select the station and trunk call group number to change Set whether a call can be sent Save the changes Station To Trunk Answer Sets whether a call pick up can be performed to a specific trunk call group YES or NO Requirements In the 5 1 1 Port Use Group o
286. imer when a specific period of time is passed after a trunk call is sent Headset Use Selects the Headset mode On or Handset mode Off If the Headset mode is selected you have to press the Speaker phone to enter the conversation state when the phone rings Hot Keypad This function operates immediately when a number is pressed in standby state without picking up the receiver or pressing the Speaker button Key Tone Emits the corresponding key tone whenever a key is pressed Page Rejoin When the station being used to send an announcement enters the standby state this function automatically allows the station to hear the announcement Ring Pref When set to On if you pick up the receiver when the phone rings this function lets you answer the call first When set to Off if you pick up the receiver when the phone rings a tone is heard and you have to press the button which is rapidly blinking to answer the call Auto If another trunk enters the system while you are talking on a trunk Campon call this function has it enter the standby mode automatically instead of hearing the busy tone SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description AME PWD Specifies whether to have the user enter a password when changing the AME status Call Cost Specifies whether to display the call charges instead of the call duration on the LCD for an outgoing trunk call
287. in the fixed keys MW Displays the waiting message MESSAGE WAITING NEW New trunk call NEW CALL NIGHT Trunk night group NIGHT GROUP 166 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Function that can Continued be specified Desctlpten NIGHT Trunk night group NIGHT GROUP NND Converts the number name date mode when checking the caller ID NUMBER NAME DATE NOCLIP Rejects sending of the calling line ID NO CLIP SEND NPG Networking announcement PAGING ACROSS NETWORKED NODE NS Calls a networking station NETWORKING STATION NXT Selects the next data when checking the caller ID CID NEXT CALL OHVA Off hook announcement OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT OPER Attendant calling OPERATOR PAGE Announcement PAGE PAGPK Announcement hold response PICK UP PAGE HOLD PARK Saves recovers the call CALL PARK RETRIEVE PAUSE Pauses dialing PAUSE PMSG Absence message STATUS MESSAGE PRB Allows interrupting PRIVACY RELEASE BRIDGE PROG Individual program PROGRAM PTHR Aligns the networking call paths PATH REPLACEMENT RB Bills the call charge ROOM BILL Hotel function REJECT Rejects the off hook announcement OHVA REJECT RETRY Auto redial AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY REVW Checks the caller ID CID REVIEW RP Converts displays the ring mode RING PLAN RSV Displays the room status ROOM STATUS VIEW Hot
288. ing Night Mode Pointers set in the Default Mode are in effect unless overridden by the same Pointer set in the current Operating Mode OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode MSG LEFT The Block to go to after the caller has recorded and sent a message NOMSG LEFT The Block to go to if the caller did not leave a message 392 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description ESCAPE The Block to go to if the caller presses the Escape digit to escape from a mailbox the escape digit may be pressed anytime before the recording tone It is recommended that the named Block be the initial MENU Block This allows the caller to return to the main options that may include dialing another extension GREET DTMF This is the Block to go to if the caller enters any valid DTMF while listening to the mailbox greeting If defined the Admin digit escape digit digit to skip the greeting and the operator digit is not considered valid DTMF digits for this pointer The target block is a menu The menu will perform a search operation to match the caller ENTRY to the KEY value of a pointer extension mailbox or Announcement OPERATOR This is the Block to go to if the caller presses the operator digit while listening to th
289. inued Description Station Type This is the area where the call progress parameters are set up as referred to in the opening paragraphs of this block You can assign the necessary Station Type to fit the appropriate conditions needed to be met If this parameter is left blank the OfficeServ System will select a station Block based on the Station Block s Matching Dialing Strings See Station Blocks for information on this parameter and field If you assign one then you can click to review or edit the Station Block assigned From To This indicates the period from the date when the Report Counters were last cleared till the current date Applies to all call counts in this report Calls This shows the total number of calls processed by this block during the period specified in the following range Answered This shows the number of calls processed by the block which were answered by the called party and what percentage of the total calls this number represents No Answer This shows the number of calls processed by this block which were unanswered resulted in Ring No Answer and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Busy Count This shows the number of calls processed by this block which encountered a busy signal and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Fbusy Count This shows the number of calls processed by this Block which encountered a fast bus
290. inutes if the time previous attempt returned a busy signal No answer The time between notification outcall attempts in minutes if the retry time previous attempt returned was not answered On Premise Set to Y to allow the subscriber to make on premise callbacks Off Premise Set to Y to allow the subscriber to make off premise callbacks Long distance Set to Y to allow the subscriber to make long distance callbacks Station Type Station block type to use for on premise off premise long distance callbacks Leave this field blank for the IVM to auto select Excepted Area Codes These 10 spaces are used to specify area codes that subscribers are not allowed to call Use this to restrict toll calls such as calls to 1 900 numbers SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 387 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Prompts MClass Block TEMPLATE MCL General Public Caller Interface OutCall Prompts E Mail Gateway Call Director Public Record Prompts Description Prompt prior to record Prompt indicating error Prompt indicating discard Prompt indicating success Prompt for normal delivery Prompt for urgent delivery Prompt for call back Prompt for phone number Special Service Prompts Description Prompts for invalid entry 0768 Description Prompts for user av
291. ion the mode specific pointers Examples of operating modes are Day Night or Holiday This field does not set the operating mode for the system that is done in the schedule table This selection allows you to program different destinations called event pointers for each mode Choose the mode you would like to program If you select Default it means all the time unless another mode is entered to override the default setting If you want the same setting to be in effect all the time simply program the default mode and leave the settings for all other modes blank ESCAPE The Block to go to if the caller presses the Escape digit to escape from an announcement the Escape digit may be pressed anytime during the play of the announcement It is recommended that the target Block be the initial MENU Block This allows the caller to return to the main options INVALID This is the Block to go to if the caller enters data DTMF that is not recognized by the system NO ENTRY This is the Block to go to if the caller is prompted to replay the announcement and does not enter anything SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 335 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l EClass Block The ECLASS Class of Service Block is an expansion or extension of service parameters which pertain to an Extension Block All extension blocks are associated with one ECLASS Block ECLASS
292. irst name or last name and the search should be consistent for all entries 8 OfficeServ Device Manager Loe System File Options Util Tab Help lal a lala D amp e lala Port Base Card Base Page Search 8 3 ScheduleTable _8 4 Subscriber List Functional VMS Group 01 v Name Search Add Delete 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features EClass File Export Export Subscriber 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table B 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference Ie aee alel Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 14 51a Office Serv MP20S TAS 2010 11 14 PM 5 03 09 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 289 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here System Parameters 290 To access the System Parameters from the System Main Menu press SYSTEM PARAMETERS System Parameters include fields displaying the software release version number the authorized number of ports and options Other parameters control functionality for the whole system It also displays the MAC ADDRESS of the LAN Port a
293. irtual Cabinet gt 2 3 6 IP UMS from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the IP UMS information Change the IP UMS information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 89 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 90 Virtual GCONF Displays the port common data information for the virtual GCONF For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Virtual GCONF Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 8 Virtual GCONF from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the Cabinet Slot J View the virtual GCONF information 4 Change the virtual GCONF information 5 Save the changes VoIP Trunks Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number Trunk Data and Trunk On Off of the VoIP trunks Use the Prev and Next buttons to move from item to item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the VoIP Trunk Information 1 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 9 VoIP Trunks from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the VoIP trunk information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the VoIP trunk information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Port Configuration
294. ition is encountered It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this BUSY OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block when a busy condition is encountered It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this FBUSY OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block when a fast busy condition is encountered It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this BLOCKED OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block when call blocking is activated in the extension administration menu It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this ERROR OfficeServ System goes immediately to the designated target Block when an error is encountered during the transfer It will not prompt the caller prior to doing this MESSAGE This causes OfficeServ System to go directly to the designated Block if the caller chooses to leave a message for this extension The target is usually a MBX Block However it may be another EXT or DIAL Block If left unspecified in this block and the lt MSG gt pointer in the EClass block associated with it is set OfficeServ System will attempt to find a mailbox with the same number as the Extension If a mailbox is not found OfficeServ System will automatically create one 358 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description If this parameter is not specified in this block and the
295. l Ring Time 100 ms In an unreliable transmission protocol the server cannot ensure that the client has received the last answer after it sent it In this case until the retransmission that the server requested is received it must retransmit the answer during this time For example it is the time to wait after sending a 200 OK message for an INFO message Invite Ring Time 100 ms In an unreliable transmission protocol the client cannot ensure whether the server has received the ACK message after the client sent an ACK for an INVITE Final Response At this time this is the time to wait after sending an ACK for the Final Response Provisional Time 100 ms When a provision response is received this is the time to wait before the user agent ends the timer Inverse Response Time 100 ms This is the time for the user agent to wait before sending a cancel for an Invite Request T4 Time 100 ms This is defined and used for several uses in the RFC 2543 For example in an unreliable transmission protocol one of them is the time to wait after the USA User Agent Server receives an ACK message SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description CLIP Table Sets the UDP port number for signaling Incoming Mode When a VoIP call is received this option sets whether to use the received Called Party Number as it is or to follow the 3 2 3 DID
296. l be automatically changed to match This selection is based on the order of the defined languages in page 3 of the System Wide Parameters If the languages are to be reordered added to or changed in page 3 of the System Wide Parameters then this field should be re entered Announce only mailbox A Y in this field designates this as an announcement only mailbox When a public caller accesses this mailbox it will play the greeting message announcement and exit immediately without recording a message This may be used for bulletin boards and other simple audiotex applications After playing the announcement OfficeServ System will pass control to the block defined by the lt No Msg Left gt pointer Send broadcast MSG allowed A Y in this field gives the mailbox user the ability to send a broadcast message to all subscribers on the system Use LIFO message ordering If set to Y messages are reviewed in Last In First Out order If set to N they are reviewed in First In Last Out order SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 371 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 372 Item Continued Description New message beep s If set to Y the IVM will beep at the subscriber before requesting they enter their password when trying to log in The beep signifies whether they have messages or not This is useful when a caller is
297. l is disconnected 1 to 250 sec Viewing and Changing the Outgoing Retry Option Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 3 Outgoing Retry Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Outgoing Retry Option settings 3 View the Outgoing Retry Option settings 4 Save the changes Incoming CID DISA Options Sets whether to use the Incoming CID DISA functions and changes the system counter and system time variables for the Incoming CID DISA functions Incoming CID DISA Option Items Item Description DID Busy Route Specifies whether to use the function which transfers a call received to a busy DID incoming station onto the trunk ring incoming station DID Error Tone SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Specifies whether to transfer the number received by the DID to the attendant or play the error tone when that number does not exist When this option is set to On the error tone is played When set to Off the call is transferred according to the DID Busy Route setting or a station is called according to the 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing settings 241 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 242 Item Continued Description Trunk Auto Answer MOH If a call is received to a trunk if the incoming calls has to follow the DID Incoming table the DID Destination must be set to A too for which this option
298. l of the enabled options available to a subscriber An N in this parameter disables the option and will play only the first three or four prompts SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 353 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 354 Additional Information Extension Block TEMPLATE ExT General Authorization Additional Information Caller Options Processor Call Director Activity 7 No answer Blocked Greeting Number Recorded Number Record Screening Busy Night Password set Name recorded Availability Schedule Sunday Stop ON OFF Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Item Description Stored Numbers This is a list of nine phone numbers where the subscriber can be reached Examples of this would be cell phone branch office home etc These numbers may be quickly entered into the designated location Alternate or positions 1 5 may be used by the Find Me feature These numbers can be entered in this screen or if allowed by setting the Stored Phone Numbers Allowed flag in page 1 of 5 the subscriber may enter and edit them Greeting Number Recorded GREETING NUMBERS When a subscriber is using the Basic greeting type different greetings will play depending on different call coverage conditions When a subscriber has the Basic greeting enabl
299. lan Enter the dates to set as vacations Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l System Speed Dial System Speed Dial Enter the phone number and name of the common speed dials You can enter up to 24 characters as a speed dial phone number It consists of 0 9 P p F f C c T or T Speed dial phone number can include trunk group Code Inputs Text Code F f Trunk flash code P p Pause code C c Pulse DTMF conversion code TT OCC code Viewing and Changing the System Speed Dial Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 4 System Speed Dial gt 4 4 0 System Speed Dial from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current system speed dials 3 Enter the Trunk No Outgoing Digits and Speed Name for each speed dial 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 149 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Account Authorize Code Forced Code This function specifies the type of code that must be entered when making a trunk call by station Code Type Description NONE Do not input any code AUTHORIZE CODE Enter registered grade change code ACCT VERIFIED Enter registered charge code ACCT NO VERIFIED Enter the account code Does not check whether it is registered or not Viewing and Changing the Type of Forced Input Code Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 5 Account Aut
300. lectronics Co Ltd 321 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Extension and Mailbox Objects On the OfficeServ System Subscribers are defined by both extension blocks and mailbox blocks The extension block is responsible for playing the appropriate personal greeting and performing all transfers It may initiate any hold conditions park and page and other caller options Through the access manager you can control call screening forwarding and blocking find me and follow me It is the main component that callers will experience when they dial an extension number and it provides the subscriber with a collection of management tools and personal services including workload manager availability schedule stored phone numbers and direct calling The mailbox block is far more simple It is used primarily for two things Recording messages and notification Each subscriber may have one or both blocks Call Directors Call Directors are powerful tools used to connect the various blocks together All blocks that pass control of the call to another block use Call Directors Call Directors pass control of the call to the next block Which block they pass control to is dependent on certain conditions called events that have occurred within the current block Events may include no entry invalid entry no message left operator requested and user exit There are many possible events and they will vary
301. ll be truncated Only the most recent 150 KB will be kept OfficeServ Device Manager rf C fe System File Options Util Tab Help s 5 5 p a e E e Port Base Card Base Page Search _8 7 1 Display User Log Functional Down 2 Configuration z Fri Aug 14 0 29 14 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 gt 3 Call Routing Subscriber Logon 4 Group amp Table Fri Aug 14 0 29 45 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 5 Features Caller disconnected SOSEA CING Fri Aug 14 2 22 45 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application Subscriber Logon Fri Aug 14 2 22 53 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 8 3 Schedule Table Caller disconnected 8 4 Subscriber List on Aug 17 1 35 33 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 261 8 5 System Parameters Subscriber Logon Eres yeco came on Aug 17 1 35 44 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 261 8 7 Operating Utilities Invalid login attempt Pz tDismay userLog Mon Aug 17 1 35 44 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 261 8 7 3 Activity Log User exited 8 7 4 ShutDownVM on Aug 17 1 54 04 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 8 7 5 Subscriber Import Subscriber Logon 8 7 6 Backup and Restore Mon Aug 17 1 54 16 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 8 7 7 eat Report Count Invalid login attempt 8 7 8 Initialize VM 8 8 Override Mode on Aug 17 1 54 16 2009 Port 1 EXT 01 EXT 260 I 8 9 View System Report la a u DAAD A kn i Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10
302. ll is processed in the following way NEW CO CALLS New calls are answered by the PORT Block which looks to the SCHEDULE Table to see which MODE Block should take control of the call session The MODE Block based on the Call type will then pass control to one of the MENU blocks This may have sounded complicated but is quite simple By default all of the configuration is done for you Most of the application for the customer actually starts at the MENU Block Knowledge of how the call is routed through the system will help you create more complex applications only when and or if necessary Depending on the current mode Day Night Holiday or Weather A custom Company greeting is played and the caller is directed to any other block in the system based on the DTMF input The below Call Routing Solution Chart shows you the communication links and connections between each of the blocks in the system FORWARDED CALLS Follow the same initial call flow as stated above Their Call Type is identified as a Forwarded call and the call is passed to a MENU Block that handles forwarded calls This MENU Block does not speak to the caller it simply looks at the Forward ID of the Cal and transfers the caller to the appropriate Subscriber s Personal Greeting Based on the Subscriber s greeting the caller may leave a message route themselves to another subscriber return to the main men or simply hang up SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeSer
303. lled party number entered Digit Length Length of the VoIP call digits Delete Length Length of a part of the ACCESS DGT to delete After connecting to the opposite VoIP trunk as many digits as is removed from the ACCESS DGT and the remaining is used Viewing and Changing VoIP Incoming Digits Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 4 VoIP Incoming Digits from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current VoIP Incoming Digits 3 Change the VoIP Incoming Digits 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide VoIP Routing IP Address Sets the Internet address that can be connected via VoIP Viewing and Changing the VoIP Routing IP Addresses Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 5 VoIP Routing IP Address from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current VoIP routing IP addresses J Change the VolP routing IP addresses 4 Save the changes E 164 Numbers Sets the system ID to register in the Gatekeeper to E 164 ID Viewing and Changing the E 164 Number 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 6 E 164 Numbers from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current E 164 Number 3 Change the E 164 Number 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 187 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 188 SIP Number Registers a SIP user ID and password The number i e user ID s
304. lower the level R2 Tx Level Controls the power sensitivity when sending the R2MFC data R2 Rx Level Controls the power sensitivity when receiving the R2MFC data R2 Threshold Controls the voltage level for recognizing an R2MFC signal Viewing and Changing the System Wide Volume Values Select 5 Features gt 5 4 Volume Control gt 5 4 1 System Wide Volume from the Tree Viewer 2 View the System Wide Volume values Change the System Wide Volume values 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 207 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here DGP Volume Controls the volume for the digital phones You can set a different volume for each type of digital phone If you change the volume for a type of digital phone it is applied to all phones of the same type Types of Digital Phones Phone Type Description US24 Unused in Korea EU24 KR24 DS 24SE phone KP24 DS 24SI phone KP20 Unused in Korea US07 EU06 EKTS AOM Add On module DOR Door phone 28B DS 4028E DS 4018E and DS 4008E phones 12L Large LCD phone 21D DS 5038D DS 5021D and DS 5014D phones ITP IP phone Viewing and Changing the DGP Volume Options Select 5 Features gt 5 4 Volume Control gt 5 4 2 DGP Volume from the Tree Viewer N Select the Option tab be View the current option settings A Change the option settings
305. ls Maximum hold time Require input every Nth try Retry interval in seconds Hold Prompts Description No digit hold prompt 0727 Description No digit continue holding prompt 0728 Announce hold interval prompt On Hold Information Message ist 2nd Announce hold position Announce hold time es No Item Description Max hold queue size The maximum number of callers allowed holding in queue while waiting to be transferred to a WorkGroup member Once this parameter is exceeded the OfficeServ System will look to the Que Full or Expand event pointer to determine what action to take Allowable inputs are 1 to maximum number of ports installed Max hold time in minutes The maximum amount of minutes the caller will hold in queue while waiting to be transferred to a WorkGroup member Once this parameter is exceeded OfficeServ System will look to the Que Full or Expand event pointer to determine what action to take Allowable inputs range from 1 to 99 minutes Require input every nth try This allows the caller to remain on hold for a busy extension without pressing the hold digit for each retry interval This parameter specifies the number of retry intervals that the caller is not prompted to enter a digit to indicate they wish to continue holding Allowable entry for this parameter are 1 99 If this parameter is set greater than 1
306. lth from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal BATTERY SYMBOL INFORMATION Correct disposal of batteries in this product Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems This marking on the battery manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life Where marked the chemical symbols Hg Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006 66 If batteries are not properly disposed of these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local free battery return system OfficeServ DM User Guide 2010 Samsung Electronics Co
307. me tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing and Changing the SIP Terminal Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 7 Virtual Port Configuration gt 2 7 2 SIP Phone Information from the Tree Viewer 2 View the SIP terminal information 3 Change the SIP terminal information 4 Save the changes WIP Phone Information Displays the information for the registered wireless terminals Parameter Parameter Description User ID User ID for the terminal Password User password for the terminal Insert Code Sets the trunk prefix to be inserted if the outgoing code has five 5 or more digits Handover Thresh Hold Sets the threshold for handover Handover Delta Value Sets the Delta value for handover Handover Scan Period Sets the Scan period for handover Viewing and Changing the Wireless Terminal Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 7 Virtual Port Configuration gt 2 7 3 WIP Phone Information from the Tree Viewer 2 View the WIP terminal information Change the WIP terminal information 4 Save the changes 114 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Moblie Extension The system shall have virtual stations to serve the MOBEX function This virtual station is called a MOBEX station AMOBExX station shall be mapped to a MOBEX phone in a one to one relationship The trunks that can make a call to a MOBE
308. n direct reach of the CNF24 without having to go through the designated network IP gateway Gateway Specifies the designated IP gateway address used for contacting IP devices beyond the local subnet IP Type Specifies if the system will be routing data over a public or private network Local RTP Port Start Specifies local rtp port The default value is 30000 and the value range is between 10000 and 60000 Public IP Address 1 Public IP Address is only used for VoIP signaling protocols in a NAT network NAT system binds IP Address with Public IP and processes a voice stream Public RTP Port 1 Public RTP Port which NAT system binds a private RTP port SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MGI Parameter Continued Description Public IP Address 2 Pulbic IP Address is only used for VoIP signaling protocols in a NAT network NAT system binds IP Address with Public IP and processes a voice stream Public RTP Port 2 Public RTP Port which NAT system binds a private RTP port Public IP Address 3 Pulbic IP Address is only used for VoIP signaling protocols in a NAT network NAT system binds IP Address with Public IP and processes a voice stream Public RTP Port 3 Public RTP Port which NAT system binds a private RTP port FTP Port Specifies FTP Port for the CNF24 card Viewing and Changing the Slot Information Select 2 Configuratio
309. n gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 16 CNF 24 Card mA KR WwW N SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Select a gateway and cabinet number Select the Slot Information tab View and change the MGI parameter values Save the changes 85 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Virtual Cabinet Virtual Cabinet Information Views the card type of the virtual cabinet Viewing the Virtual Cabinet Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 0 Virtual Cabinet Information from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current virtual cabinet information Virtual DGP Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number DLI Data Station Data Station On Off Customer On Off Data Preset Forward and Hot Line of the virtual DGP Use the Prev and Next buttons to move from item to item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the Virtual DGP Information Select 2 Configuration gt 2 3 Virtual Cabinet gt 2 3 1 Virtual DGP from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot 3 View the virtual DGP information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item 4 Change the virtual DGP information 5 Save the changes 86 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Virtual SLT Displays the information for the Port Port
310. n Service The E1 line is in service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF 14 TODC Error The MCP clock chip error has occurred MNF18 SLI Fault A faulty SLI board which cannot provide the service is detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF19 SLI Recovery An SLI board which can provide the service is detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF28 LAN Printer Err The LAN printer error has occurred in the MCP board Alarm Data Data Type SMDR MNF29 LAN Printer Rec The LAN printer error that occurred in the MCP board has cleared Alarm Data Data Type SMDR MNF30 SPNet Link Error A SPNet link connection error has occurred Alarm Data MMC 820 LINK ID INDEX number SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Alarm Name Continued Description MNF31 SPNet Send Error An SPNet message sending error has occurred Alarm Data xx yyyy zz xx SPNet TRK index yyyy SPNet TRK No zz MMC 820 Link ID index MNF32 SVMi Ready The SVMi Card Ready has started MNF33 SVMi Request The SVMi Card Request has started MNF34 SVMi Ready End The SVMi Card Ready is ended MNF35 SVMi Request End The SVMi Card Request is ended MNF36 SVMi HDD Alarm SVMi Card HDD Alarm MNF37 Manual Reset Req Card Manual R
311. n Timer from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Confirm Disconnect No Action timer settings 3 Change the Confirm Disconnect No Action timer settings 4 Save the changes Outgoing Retry Options Specifies whether to use the Outgoing Retry functions and changes the system counter and system time variables for the Outgoing Retry functions Outgoing Retry Option Items Item Description Dial Pass Time sec Sets the period of time that the call path is connected after a trunk call is dialed 0 to 25 sec New Call Count Sets the maximum time that a trunk can be reused for trunk calls 1 to 99 Trunk Group 2 MBR Specifies whether to expand the number of members to 198 by grouping the 23rd to 30th trunk groups the first groups of No 821 to 828 into two groups When this option is set to On if an odd numbered group is selected the next even numbered group is selected too SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description Auto Redial Counter Sets the maximum time that a call is auto redialed in Auto Redial mode with just an operation 1 to 99 Auto Redial Interval sec Sets the interval with which auto redial is tried in Auto Redial mode 1 to 250 sec Auto Redial RLS sec Sets the period of time that when an auto redial is successful but the recipient does not pick up the receiver they are assumed to have left their seat and the cal
312. n only be set by the subscriber if the extension has Greeting type of Basic Find me Find Me is a feature that may be programmed by the subscriber as a high priority call connection method When this feature is set the OfficeServ System will begin to dial the first 5 numbers in your stored number list until you are reached The enabled field shows if this option is currently set Scheduling Each subscriber if allowed by setting this parameter to Y may define a weekly availability schedule This schedule is used to automatically select a day or night greeting to play to callers During the time a subscriber is according to this schedule available the call will be transferred to the extension blocks dial number and the no answer greeting will play if recorded If the subscriber is not available according to this schedule the call will be transferred to the extension blocks dial number and the extension night greeting will play if recorded 352 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide ltem Continued Description Intercept auto night intercept This feature only affects subscribers who are using an availability schedule this must be allowed by a System Administrator When the intercept feature is set and the subscriber is unavailable callers will not be transferred to the subscriber station instead they will immediately hear the night message if record
313. n the CallDirector section of the Query Block are used to provide the flexibility to handle calls differently for various modes of operation typically at different times of the day The CallDirector uses Event Pointers to pass control of the call General Query Block TEMPLATE GRY Generat _ Call information Call Director Activity Label Name TEMPLATE QRY Query Script Description Query prompt Description Exit prompt Description Error prompt Description Invalid prompt Description Query Script Repeat Query Repeat exit Auto replay Last query Transcription Description Mailbox 412 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Description Label Name The name of this block A Block name can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block name may not be the same as another Block name Query This prompt requests a voice response to be recorded by the caller prompt It is followed by a short tone signal that indicates that the system is recording Valid entries are 1000 9999 with blank indicating say nothing Example Please speak your name at the tone beep Exit prompt This prompt is given after the response has been recorded It may simply say Thank you to acknowledge the response or prompt the caller to enter DTMF tones to playback change
314. nd number of authorized E Mail subscribers The first page mostly provides information only This information may be useful to you or may be needed during a technical support call General Information Default Volume Level The choices are Quietest 2 3 Normal 4 5 Loudest Normal is the default for this parameter R ejeje System File Options Util Tab Help lal a lala D amp e a e PortBase Card Base Page Search 83 ScheduleTable 8 4 SubscriberList _ 8 5 System Parameters Functional General Management Language E mailGateway DNS 2 Configuration General Information aCal Routing Version Display 4 Group amp Table 5 Features Sanr 6 System Control Mac Address 8 VMAA Voice Ports Installed 8 1 Open Block Table Maximum Subscribers 8 2 Save Application Maximum E mail Gateway Subscribers 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List Ree SE B 5 System Parameters Run Time Remaining 8 6 Voice Studio Default Volume Level Normal 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode System Timers 8 9 View System Report Daily Maintenance 3 0 8 10 Site Information Session Timeout 1800 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference System Password Subscriber Default Password 0000 Subscriber PSWD Min Length 0 System Admin 0000 a 2 a ajx e eo amp
315. nd the number 2 jumper to E1 T1 mode Otherwise No Data will be displayed Viewing and Changing the T1 Trunk Data Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 9 T1 Trunk Data from the Tree Viewer 2 View the T1 trunk data SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 111 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 3 Change the T1 trunk data 4 Save the changes ITP Information Virtual Port Configuration Sets various parameters of the IP phone Parameter Parameter Description User ID Enter the ID to be used to identify the user when registering the phone Password Enter the password to be used to identify the user when registering the phone DSP Type Sets the DSP type to use when calling with the IP phone Time Zone For a IP phone at a remote location if the time displayed on the phone is to be different from the time on the system connected this field sets the appropriate time difference Remote MGI When calling between remote IP phones in the same private zone this field sets whether to use MGI Signal Type Selects the signaling method UDP TCP for an IP phone Video CODEC Sets the video standard compression type for an IP video phone Video Size Sets the video input and output format of and IP video phone codec IP Zone Type Sets the IP address type QOS Enable Sets whether to use QoS IP Phone SRTP_ Sets whether
316. ne of call groups 001 to 300 can be set to a station and one of call groups 301 to 500 to a trunk If ANS is set to NO call pick up cannot be performed but it can be performed if the station is ringing due to an incoming call or call forward or for a common hold trunk Viewing and Changing the Usage for Each Call Group 1 2 Select 5 Features gt 5 1 Call Restriction gt 5 1 3 Station To Trunk Answer from the Tree Viewer View whether a call pick up can be performed for each call group currently set Select the station and trunk call group number to change Set whether a call pick up can be performed Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 177 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 178 Station To Station Sets whether a station call group can make a call to other station call groups YES or NO Viewing and Changing the Station Call Groups Where Call Is Available 1 Ze J 4 Select 5 Features gt 5 1 Call Restriction gt 5 1 4 Station To Station from the Tree Viewer View the current station call groups where call is available Select the station call group to receive the call and the station call group where call is available and set whether the call can be sent for each station call group Save the changes Trunk To Trunk Sets whether a trunk call group can make a call to other trunk call groups YES or NO Vi
317. ne of the following current time today s date voiced confirmation of digits entered by the caller or the contents of one of the Call Session Memory Registers This allows an administrator to create a scenario in which the caller enters their account number in a preceding Menu Block and the Speak Block plays The account number you entered is 4788235 If this is correct press 1 If not press 3 to reenter it This uses all three prompt positions the second one playing a confirmation of the number the caller entered in the previous Menu The third prompt implies a Menu Block function within the Speak Block which does not exist Instead an Event Pointer labeled Next has targeted a Menu which receives control immediately following the end of the third prompt Options 1 and 3 are actually processed in this second Menu Block Speak Blocks may be daisy chained to play an extended series of prompts The information contained within the Speak Block screen shown in this section is for discussion and display purposes only One page houses all Speak Block parameters The parameters are grouped by category as follows SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 419 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Speak Block TEMPLATE SPK Label Name TEMPLATE SPK Caller Script Description First prompt Prompt index Description Last prompt Description
318. ne rings in one of eight 8 tones If a user picks up the receiver or presses the Speaker button the phone enters the conversation state Auto Answer Mode An attention signal rings shortly and the speaker of the digital phone opens automatically and the phone enters the conversation state When the trunk call is forwarded to the digital phone which is specified as the auto answering phone both the station which wants to forward it and that digital phone enter the Auto Answer mode But after the station forwards it the receiver is placed and the trunk is forwarded to the digital phone the digital phone rings until a user picks up its receiver or presses its Speaker button Voice Announce The digital phone does not ring but emits a short attention tone and the voice of the opposite party is heard If the user s voice is not sent he enters the conversion state when he picks up the receiver or presses the Speaker button 250 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Station Mode Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 2 Station Mode from the Tree Viewer 2 View the Station Mode settings 3 Change the Station Mode settings 4 Save the changes Station Display Sets the caller information to display on the LCD of the phone when a R2MFC trunk CID trunk or ISDN trunk is received to it and it rings Items to be Specified
319. net Slot Cx Syy MJDO5_ Yellow Alarm A frame transmission error has occurred in the TEPRI board Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJDO6 Yellow Alarm Rec The frame transmission error that occurred in the TEPRI board has cleared MJDO7 Blue Alarm A TEPRI board facility error has occurred Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJDO08 Blue Alarm Rec The TEPRI board facility error has cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJDO9 Bit Error Alarm The bit error rate of the E1 PRI or BRI board is too high Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI board has received an error message from the network Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI board has received a message from the network that the error was cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD13 LPBK Error A loopback test by an internal command has failed Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD14 LPBK Recovery A loopback test by an internal command has succeeded Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD15 BRI DL Unavail The BRI data link is invalid Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD16 BRI DL Recovery The data link of the BRI is now valid Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD18 E1 Restart The E1 board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide C
320. nks Level H restricts all outgoing trunks Therefore the table below is about the Level B to G outgoing trunk grades Up to 500 dial buttons to restrict outgoing trunks can be saved Each button has up to twelve 12 digits For each dial button whether to apply the six 6 outgoing trunk grades is set Dial button Input Value 0 Number you want to permit A C Meta character X Y Z These are used when checking several dial buttons simultaneously If there is a meta character during dialing the dial corresponding to the item 1 of the meta character table is used End mark of the dial F displayed with E Viewing and Changing the Outgoing Trunk Call Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 8 Toll Restriction gt 4 8 2 Toll Allow Table from the Tree Viewer 2 View the outgoing trunk call settings 3 Enter a call allow dial number and set whether to use it for each grade 4 Save the changes Toll Wild Characters When entering a outgoing trunk restriction table or allow table if you need to enter several dial buttons of which only one place is different this function sets whether a digit your enter can be inserted into that one place For example if 1 and 2 has the place 1 in X and there is OX in the restriction table or allow table it corresponds to the dials 01 and 02 160 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the M
321. not be changed Public IP Address System public IP address DHCP Mode Sets whether to use DHCP mode or not IP Type If the IP addresses used in the private network are different from the IP addresses used in the public network this parameter is used to assign a public IP address to a packet to be transmitted to a public network System Reset Sets whether to restart the system Signal Type Sets the signal type to be used in communications Slave IP Address Sets the IP address of the slave system Requirements After a parameter value is modified the MCP board must be reset to apply the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the LAN Parameter Values Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 2 Lan Parameter from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current LAN parameter values 3 Change the LAN parameter values 4 Save the changes SystemTime Sets the information related to the system time System Time Items Item Description Current Time Changes the date and time of the system Daylight Saving Time Sets daylight saving periods Up to 10 daylight saving periods can be entered For example if the system date reaches the start date of a daylight saving period entered when the system time reaches 2 00 a m it will advance to 3 00 a m automatically Also if the system date reaches the end date of the daylight saving period e
322. ns from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current MGI Options values 3 Change the MGI Options values 4 Save the changes 196 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide VoIP Peering Sets VoIP Peering Viewing and Changing the VoIP Peering Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 17 VoIP Peering from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current VoIP Peering values 3 Change the VoIP Peering values 4 Save the changes VoIP Options Sets VoIP Options Viewing and Changing the VoIP Options Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 18 VoIP Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current VoIP Options values 3 Change the VolP Options values 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 197 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here CNF24 Options Sets CNF24 Options Viewing and Changing the VoIP Options 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 19 CNF24 Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current CNF24 Options values 3 Change the CNF24 Options values 4 Save the changes 198 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Wireless LAN WLAN Parameter Sets the parameters related to WLI board interoperation and the parameters related to wireless terminal authentication Depending on the parameters when they are changed the WBS24 wireless station they can be
323. nt New messages Saved messages This page will keep track of this mailbox blocks activity It contains the following statistics Three other subscribe columns of statistics exist Outside or Public callers Call from rs and Totals Item Description Date last The last time the subscriber logged into this Mailbox accessed Mailbox The number of times someone other than the subscriber Public access Callers accessed this Mailbox and the number of times the count subscriber logged into this Mailbox regardless of what functions they performed Message The number of messages this subscriber has sent regardless of sent destination Message The number of messages this subscriber has received from Public received Callers and from other subscribers Total The total amount of time connected to the mailbox connect The total number of messages in this Mailbox listed according to minutes those received from Public Callers and from other subscribers SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 381 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 382 Continued Current The total number of messages in this mailbox listed according to message those received from public callers and from other subscribers count New The current message count broken down to reflect how many have messages not been saved from both Public Callers and other sub
324. nter is used to restrict access to a target Block by requiring the caller to enter a password code before passing control to the target block TRANSLATIONS Translates caller entry telephone system or network integration information to the translated value specified OfficeServ System then searches for a match using the translated value SEARCH Used only with MENU blocks This type of ACTION uses the INPUT value to search a specified range of block types to find a Block with a Number that matches and then passes control to the block More than one Block type may be searched at one time Valid block types to be searched are Extensions Mailboxes and Announcements searched in that order 398 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description FILE This type of action provides for a large amount of Input values for a specific MENU be stored in a database which is accessed at the time the MENU is executing It directs OfficeServ System to search the specified data base file located in the DTA directory of the hard disk for a match to the INPUT value The type of data file is POINTER files that have the filename extension of PTR respectively This is used in applications that would otherwise require a very large number of individual event pointers to be programmed in a MENU Block Pointer PTR files are simple text files which may be produced on a word processor notepad or DOS
325. ntered when the system time reaches 3 00 a m it will go back to 2 00 a m automatically Viewing and Changing the System Time Values Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 3 System Time from the Tree Viewer View the current System Time values Change the System Time values 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 67 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here License Key Displays the current approval status for the Soft phone SIP phone and OfficeServ News which have a restriction on the number of copies that can be used depending on their license keys The approval status for these functions can only be viewed they cannot be modified License Key Items Item Description PBX License OLD This is for backwards compatible with earlier version than V4 30 If having license in previous version the license should be inserted in this parameter PBX License Status This is for backwards compatible with earlier version than V4 30 If inserted license is valid license details are shown PBX License Stack This is for backwards compatible with earlier version than V4 30 Designate the SIP Stack within the number allowed in the license SIP License Insert license for sip stack SIP License Status If inserted license is valid license details are shown Display assigned information of sip stack for
326. ntrol SVMi DGP SVMi Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT SVMi Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK SVMi Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK SVMi Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP SVMi Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP SVMi Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi SVMi Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN SVMi Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT SVMi Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS SVMi Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP SVMi Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN DGP WLAN Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT WLAN Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK WLAN Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control 204 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Connection Type Continued Description Tx Rx WLAN DTRK WLAN Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP WLAN Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP WLAN Tx gt VolP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi WLAN Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN WLAN Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT WLAN Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS WLAN Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP WLAN Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT DGP SOFT Phone Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT SOFT Phone Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivit
327. o be spoken before disconnecting There is only one bye block available in the OfficeServ System but additional Bye blocks can be added Bye Block TEMPLATE BYE Bye Block Controls Description Label Name TEMPLATE BYE Disconnect Prompt 0051 Activity Item Description Label The name of this block A block name can be any alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters including spaces A block name may not be the same as another block name MBX EXT or LIST numbers may not be duplicated within the same group Disconnect The number of the prompt that the OfficeServ System speaks Prompt before disconnecting the caller Allowable inputs are 0001 9999 with blank indicating say nothing SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 325 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Dial Block The functions of a DIAL Block are to perform a dialing operation and then either release the call or branch to another Block based on the outcome of the dialing operation This Block is commonly used to transfer callers to an operator for assistance It does not have the extensive automated attendant features of an Extension Block However it is useful for transferring calls to another system such as a dictation system answering machine FAX machine MODEM or paging terminal It can also be used to facilitate special features that a telephone system may l
328. o the opposite party of a key MANUAL SIGNALING MSG Message MESSAGE This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys MUTE Drops the transmission MUTE This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys MW Displays the waiting message MESSAGE WAITING NEW New trunk call NEW CALL NIGHT Trunk night group NIGHT GROUP NND Converts the number name date mode when checking the caller ID NUMBER NAME DATE NOCLIP Rejects sending of the calling line ID NO CLIP SEND NPG Networking announcement PAGING ACROSS NETWORKED NODE SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Function that can Continued be specified Description NS Calls a networking station NETWORKING STATION NXT Selects the next data when checking the caller ID CID NEXT CALL OHVA Off hook announcement OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT OPER Attendant calling OPERATOR PAGE Announcement PAGE PAGPK Announcement hold response PICK UP PAGE HOLD PARK Saves recovers the call CALL PARK RETRIEVE PAUSE Pauses dialing PAUSE PMSG Absence message STATUS MESSAGE PRB Allows interrupting PRIVACY RELEASE BRIDGE PROG Individual program PROGRAM PTHR Aligns the networking call paths PATH REPLACEMENT RB Bills the call charge ROOM BILL Hotel function REJECT Rejects the off hook announcement OHVA REJECT RETRY Au
329. ock Name A Block name can also be referred to as the Label Name and can be any alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block Name may not be the same as another Block Name MBX EXT or LIST Numbers may not be duplicated within the same group The ECLASS Group Number is located to the left of the ECLASS Block Name Group Numbers are convenient for organizing extensions into application specific groups This number must be the same as the Group Number for the Extension Blocks assigned to this ECLASS In most applications the default value of 01 is normally used Values from 01 to 99 are valid You select which group the ECLASS Block belongs to before you create the ECLASS Block Group Numbers for ECLASS EXTENSION MCLASS MAILBOX and LIST Blocks generally are used for Multi Tenant environments Extension Retention The number of days from 1 to 999 an inactive extension or EXT Block will be retained If an extension goes unused for the specified number of days it will be automatically deleted The default value is 60 days Wait for entry The time in seconds that extensions in this ECLASS will wait for the caller to make an entry This parameter is in effect after prompts play requesting caller entry on a failed transfer This time begins after a prompt is spoken or after the last digit is pressed This parameter should be kept in the 3 5 second range to avoid long delays by the OfficeServ System The
330. oing calls Up to 50 log blocks can be assigned to a digital phone that has LCD 97 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Continued Description Text Message Specifies the stations that can use urgent text messages Up to 100 stations can be enabled to use urgent text messages Group Conference Specifies the stations that can use the temporary conference function Up to 100 stations can be enabled to use the temporary conference function BGM Specifies the Background Music Source BGM by station As system sound sources one 1 internal sound source and two 2 external sound sources are supported by the MIS card Micro Phone Sets whether to use the microphone Ring Back Station Sets whether to display the opposite station name Name instead of the calling message in the ring back state when sending a station call Group Listen by Speaker Requirements Sets whether to operate the Group Listen function with the Speaker button When specifying an external sound source for the background music source you must connect the terminal box port to the external sound source of the MIS card If the BGM item is set to None or a sound source is not connected to the external sound source specified as the background music source even if the background music function is enabled it will not be heard Viewing and Changing the DLI Data
331. ollowing screen is displayed SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 33 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here File Port compon comi v saute 8100 gt ee Destination 165 21 3 89 72 ___ Delete Close 34 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Refer to the following table to configure the communication environment Field Details Site Name Enter the spot name Link Type Select between Modem and LAN Local Area Network Refer to the next page s The two communication environments for Link Type for guidance Destination Enter the spot s IP Address LAN telephone number Modem Data Port Enter which port the OfficeServ DM will use during LAN connection only use in specific circumstances such as NAT File Port Enter which port the file control will use during LAN connection only use in specific circumstances such as NAT FTP Port Enter which port the FTP will use during LAN connection only use in specific circumstances such as NAT COM Port Select the modem s COM port Baudrate Select the appropriate modem speed Delete Button To delete the selected spot information Apply Button To set the selected spot to Connect button s initial value Close Button SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd To close the screen 35 Error Use the Home tab to apply
332. on dial conversion table 5 Save the changes Second LCR Digits Sets the value needed to use E LCR the additional optimal route selection If multiple LCR codes have to be applied they can be programmed using N LCR code For an N LCR in contrast to LCR code there is the problem that the virtual tone will not be heard after entering the code However if E LCR is used the virtual tone can be added after entering the LCR code For E LCR the digits the user dials can be converted to the digits to be sent externally and a trunk group can then be selected so a detour call can be made Option Items Item Description In Digit Digits that the user dials after pressing the E LCR code The user can enter up to sixteen 16 digits Out Digit If the digits the user enters match the In Digit of this table this option sets the number to be sent externally on this occasion It cannot be entered if In Digit is not entered The user can enter up to sixteen 16 digits User LCR No When an LCR code from among E LCR1 E LCR2 E LCR3 and E LCR4 is selected this option sets whether to use the digits entered in In Digit SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 125 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description User LCR No If this option is set to ALL the In Digit for the table matches all four 4 E LCRs and they can all be used
333. on is set the CLIP number is sent to the network Dial Mode Selects whether to use OVERLAP mode or ENBLOCK mode Gatekeeper Sets whether to connect and use the Gatekeeper Connect Gatekeeper Route When connecting to the Gatekeeper this option can be set when you want not the Gatekeeper but the system to perform the analysis for dialing digits Usually the Gatekeeper analyzes digits But when this function is enabled it analyzes the dialing digit with the information specified in the Outband tables of 5 2 3 VoIP Outgoing Digits and 5 2 4 VoIP Incoming Digits Gatekeeper Address Sets the IP address of the Gatekeeper Gatekeeper Alter IP Address If the Gatekeeper is used in redundancy mode this option sets the IP address of the other Gatekeeper to use when the connection to the Primary Gatekeeper is disconnected Gatekeeper Name Sets the alias name of the Gatekeeper H 323 Gateway ID Sets the system ID to register in the Gatekeeper to H 323 ID E 164 Gateway Number Sets the system ID to register in the Gatekeeper to E 164 ID Gatekeeper Keep Alive sec Sets the RRQ transmission interval in the Gatekeeper Gatekeeper Down Route Sets the routing method to use when the connection to the Gatekeeper being used is disconnected Alter Gatekeeper Connects to the Alternative Gatekeeper PSTN Uses the PSTN routing Gatekeeper RAS Type When connecting th
334. one number OfficeServ System will search all Station Blocks to locate the one most closely matching the number being dialed Station Blocks can contain up to six matching dial strings These strings can include any digit which can be dialed and the wildcard character Zero would match the operator s extension Examples 3 Match any four digit number beginning with 3 411 Match 411 only 2225000 Match any seven digit number ending in 5000 Match any three digit number 424 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description Prefix The Dial Prefix instructs OfficeServ System what DTMF to dial if any prior to the actual number Prefix examples include a tie line or trunk access code One example is shown in the Off Premise Station Block 9 tells OfficeServ System to dial 9 and then pause before dialing the actual telephone number Suffix Enter any DTMF that must be dialed after the actual number This will usually be left blank but may include an account code or PBX feature code Beepers usually require some form of DTMF entry after the telephone number Simultaneous xfers Set this parameter to Y to allow more than one port to transfer to the same station simultaneously This applies to blind transfer conditions only Station groups and operator positions are examples of Yes situations In
335. onference Management Meet Me Conference Screen Layout Navigator Display the card position and can select the previous this next week Buttons Displays the all the functions used in program Main Screen Displays the channel status Viewing the System Selection Items Click the Conference from Tree Viewer 2 Select 9 2 Conference Management gt 9 2 1 Meet Me Conference from the Tree Viewer 434 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 3 Check the current items selected on the system Reservation 1 Drag the period in main screen 2 Click the Create button 3 Input the detail information for conference Co ion x Card C1 S3 Date 2010 11 5 2010 11 5 i Subject Conference ID Check Duration Amosas e pmo f Repeat Once Daily Weekly of Attendees Available Channel 24 Owner Station Attendee List C Send Invitation Email Password Options _ Early Entrance _ Recording C Paging Greeting Promt Td Submit Cancel SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 435 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 436 Item Details Subject Input the description for conference Conference Id After input the unique numeric id click the Check button If the id is not
336. ontinued ID Alarm Name Description MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD21 PCM Loss A PCM code loss has occurred in the E1 PRI or BRI board Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD22 PCM Recovery The PCM code loss that occurred in the E1 PRI or BRI board is recovered Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE MGI and Card Error MGI WBS SVMi Error MJE01 MGI Restart The MGI board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The IP address of the MGI board has duplicated Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE04 MGINTWK Error The MGI board has stopped due to a system ping test error Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The stopping of the MGI board due to a system ping test error has now cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE06 MGI DSP Error The DSP operation error has occurred in the MGI board Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Pzz MJE07 MGI DSP Run The DSP operation error that occurred in the MGI board has now cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy Pzz MJE08 WBS Disconnect The WBS has been disconnected from the system Alarm Data CWBS xx or BWBS xx MJE09 WBS connect The WBS is now connected to the system Alarm Data CWBS xx or BWBS xx M
337. or Call for Jane Doe Alternate The OfficeServ System has a feature where a subscriber can Number enter an alternate location and all calls processed by the extension block will be transferred to this alternate number This number can be an internal number other extension or an external number like your home number The designated location option must be set to Yes to use this feature When calls are transferred to a designated location alternate number the OfficeServ System will supervise the transfer i e it will monitor the call progress until the call is answered If the call is not answered it will be routed to the destination specified in this extension block s call director for the no answer event 348 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide ltem Continued Description Supervision Level This sets the type of transfer that this extension block uses to transfer callers NONE BLIND TRANSFER OfficeServ System transfers the call releases and doesn t wait for any subsequent condition PARTIAL Supervise for Busy OfficeServ System transfers the call and waits to see if it gets one valid Ring If it hears a valid ring it releases and doesn t wait for any subsequent condition If it does not hear a valid ring It aborts the transfer pulling the call back and follows the Extension Blocks Busy call condition rules This can be play the subscriber s Busy Gr
338. or a mailbox greeting and List box This can be from 0 to 999 seconds length SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 383 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 384 Continued Item Description Mailbox Specifies the number of days from 1 to 999 an unused mailbox retention should be retained before being erased Maximum Maximum messages allowed from 0 to 999 seconds that a number subscriber can receive and or save in his mailbox messages Zero means no limit Once the maximum has been met callers attempting to leave a message will be informed of the message storage unit full condition The subscriber will be informed of the message storage unit full condition immediately after entering his password Maximum Maximum message length allowed that a public caller can leave for messages a mailbox or List box from 1 to 999 seconds length sec Message retention day The number of days from 1 to 999 that unread messages will remain before being automatically discarded An individual message s retention will be reset to this value each time the message is reviewed and saved This is now associated with the Adjust Message Retention parameter on page 4 When Adjust Message Retention is set to Y this parameter no longer applies SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Public Caller Interface MClass Block TEMPLATE MC
339. ord a voicemail message and the percentage of the total calls this number represents SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 361 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 362 Continued Operator The number of calls processed by this Block during which the caller elected to go to the Operator and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Page The number of callers who chose to have the called party paged while in this block and the percentage of the total calls this number represents Other option The number of calls processed by this Block during which the caller elected to hear the other options and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Avg hold The total time in seconds callers were holding for this extension time in sec Dividing this number by the Hold Count gives an approximation of the average hold time per caller SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide List Block ALIST is a special type of Mailbox Block that is used to distribute copies of recordings to a predetermined list of mailboxes When a message is addressed to a LIST mailbox a copy of it is sent to each of the member mailboxes A List Block can also verify addressees and password protect information It can record a voice response or connect the recipient to the sender when authorized Other LIST mailboxes may be members of thi
340. ort Information PRI Trunk Data Numbering Plan Succeed None Succeed 3 1 1 LCR Options Network Dial Translation Succeed Succeed Networking Options Succeed Remote Station Dial Translation Station Groups Uploading Trunk Groups Station Pair WLAN Parameter PST US RRN ES ES DSU ESD ES ESTES SU SUS I 3 3 5 Remote Station Dial Translation 12 163 32 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 5 When the upload is finished the following screen is displayed Click on OK Message 1 Elapsed Time 00 00 24 Lox Upload download failure If the upload download fails an error message is displayed and the upload download is cancelled Caution when uploading When uploading the card slot of the user s PC database should be CAUTION identical to the key phone system s card slot Depending on the condition it may be necessary to reboot after the upload a message will be prompted To protect memory data from accidental deletion ensure that the MCP Main Control Processor card s backup switch is set to ON Link Setup Site List This menu is used to configure the communication environment between the OfficeServ DM and the key phone system Click on System gt Link Setup The f
341. p when performing the optimal line selection function VMAA Forward Sets whether to use call forwarding to voice mailbox auto attendant Night Password Sets ON the steps verifying the ring plan passcode will be added in Ring Plan change Viewing and Changing Function On Off Settings by Station 1 Ze 3 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 2 Station On Off Data from the Tree Viewer View the Function On Off settings by station Change the Function On Off settings by station SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 4 Save the changes Customer On Off Sets the On or Off option for each function by station Items to be Specified Item Description SMDR Print Sets whether to print the call information Intercom SMDR Sets whether to output the calls between stations to the SMDR Recall Operator If there is no answer from the opposite party after a call transfer this sets the option of whether to re ring the attendant or station that forwarded the call HK Flash No Recall For a normal phone this option sets whether to recall if the receiver is hung up without any digit being dialed after performing the Hook Flash No Cost Print Sets whether to print the SMDR in the Hotel function even if there is no call charge Viewing and Changing the Customer Function Settings Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port
342. pear here Keyset Volume Sets the volume of a keyphone Items to be Specified Item Description Volume Control Ring Sets the volume level when in standby state 1 to 8 Off Ring Sets the volume level when the receiver is picked up 1 to 8 Handset Sets the volume heard through the receiver 1 to 8 Speaker Sets the volume heard through the speaker 1 to 16 BGM Sets the volume of the background music 1 to 16 Page Sets the volume of announcements heard through the speaker 1 to 16 Headset Sets the volume of the headset 1 to 14 Ring Frequency Specifies the ringtone 1 to 8 If you set a different ringtone it can prevent an incoming call being missed due to noise from the adjacent phones Viewing and Changing the Volume and Tone of the Keyphone Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 5 Keyset Volume from the Tree Viewer 2 View the volume and tone of the keyphone Change the volume and tone of the keyphone 4 Save the changes 254 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Call Forwarding Specifies the phone number to which calls are forwarded and whether to use call forwarding or not Types of Call Forwarding Item Description Forward Cancel Cancels the call forwarding Forward All Forwards all calls Busy Forwards calls when the phone is busy No Answer Forwards calls when they are not
343. pecifies whether to use the charge rate table for each trunk Viewing and Changing Whether to Use the Charge Rate Table for Trunks Select 5 Features gt 5 12 Call Costing gt 5 12 1 Trunk Rate from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current settings for whether to use the charge rate table for trunks 3 View the settings for whether to use the charge rate table for trunks 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 229 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Cost Rate The cost rate is used to set the charge for each charging item Charging Item Charging Item Description First Duration sec The period of time for which the charge is billed when a call is first made is applied First Cost cent The charge applied for the First Duration Second Duration sec The period of time after the First Duration for which a charge is added for every specific time Second Cost cent The charge added for every Second Duration Sur Charge cent The additional charge added to the call charge Viewing and Changing the Cost Rate Select 5 Features gt 5 12 Call Costing gt 5 12 2 Cost Rate from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current cost rate Change the cost rate 4 Save the changes 230 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Cost Dial Plan The Cost Dial Plan function analyzes the major dialed
344. posite message If the mailbox has not been used by another Query block or the parameter Last Query was set to Y in the previous Query Block a new voice message will be created SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 413 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 414 Call Information Query Block TEMPLATE GRY General Cal Information Call Director Activity Take input from VOICE Caller Interface Maximum caller response Wait for voice response Wait for DTMF response 30 3 Digit play back response Digit to play back response Digit Assignment Digit to confirm response Terminator digit Escape digit Item Description Take input from This is a list of possible input types This will usually only be Voice or in some cases DTMF Important Note If you are going to set any Query Block to take Input from anything other than Voice you must set Use 32 Kbit s rate to Y This will guarantee the accurate playing back of DTMF entries in a Voice Format during the transcription of the message Maximum caller response The maximum length of recorded response allowed 1 999 s Wait for voice This is the time that the IVM will wait for the caller to begin response speaking a response to the query 1 9 s Wait for DTMF This is the time to wait for the caller to enter
345. ption The enabled field shows if this option is currently set This setting must be Y to allow a subscriber to set this greeting This option can only be set by the subscriber if the extension has Greeting type of Basic Call forwarding A Y in this parameter allows the Subscriber to remotely redirect calls to another extension An N in this parameter disables the option and it will not be spoken as an option in the extension user menu The enabled field shows if this option is currently set If you enable this feature here you must also assign a destination to the Remote Fwd pointer in the Extension Block page 4 of 5 When this feature is activated the OfficeServ System will perform a blind transfer and the control of the call will then be passed to the forward destination Call screening A Y in this parameter allows the Subscriber to set call screening for their extension OfficeServ System asks the calling party to speak his name before transferring the call and allows the called party to accept or reject the call when answered If the call is rejected OfficeServ System will prompt the caller that their party is unavailable and allow them to dial another extension or leave a message Allowable inputs are Y for yes or N for no The enabled field shows if this option is currently set This setting must be Y to allow a subscriber to set this greeting This option ca
346. r a station Station Lock Type Unlocked The lock is released Locked Outgoing Trunk outgoing is locked Locked All Calls The station is locked Viewing and Changing the Station Lock Settings 1 w N Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 1 Station Options from the Tree Viewer View the Station Lock settings Change the Station Lock settings Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 249 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Station Mode Changes the answer mode of a phone This function also changes the format of the date and time displayed on the LCD of a phone if it has an LCD and changes the speed at which information is displayed on the LCD of the phone Items to be Specified Item Description Answer Mode Changes the Answer mode of a digital phone or add on module Auto Answer Co Sets whether to answer the incoming trunk calls automatically or not Date Mode Sets the Date mode to either Oriental or Western Oriental Month Day Day of the Week HH MM Western Day of the Week Day Month HH MM Time Mode Sets the Time mode to either 12Hour or 24Hour Display Mode Sets the Displays mode to either Lower or Upper Case Call Speed Sets the speed at which information is displayed on the LCD of the digital phone when the OfficeServ Call function is used Answer Mode Types Item Description Ring Mode The pho
347. r of the station you want to set as the pair for the station number 4 Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Boss Secretary Sets the boss or secretary phone You can sets up to four 4 secretaries for each boss If you specify as a secretary one of the four 4 numbers already assigned to a boss the Invalid Input try again message is displayed Requirements The station sets to a boss cannot be set as a secretary of other boss Viewing and Changing the Boss Secretary Settings Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 2 Station Pairing gt 4 2 2 Boss Secretary from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current boss secretary settings 3 Enter the station number to set as the secretary for each boss number 4 Save the changes AOM Master Sets a station which operates as the master for each Add On module AOM Up to four 4 Add On modules can be set as a pair Whether to give an off hook announcement Whether to give an off hook Description announcement Ohvaed Off Off hook announcement is not used as an Add On module Ohvaed On Off hook announcement is used as an Add Requirements On module e The Add On module cannot be specified as a master If the Add On module is specified as the first Add On module pair of the master phone you have to also set whether the off hook announcement function can be performed using it In this case the DS 24SE
348. rade Trunk Group Sets whether a call can be sent to the thirty 30 trunk groups defined in the system for each service grade BIVMS Sets whether the embedded voice mailbox port can be used for each service grade 154 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Function of Service Grade Table Function Description TOLL Type Trunk call restriction grade by service grade AA CALER Auto answer by caller ABSENCE Absence presence ALM CLR Clears alarm AUTO RDL Auto redial CALLBACK Reservation CID ABND Views the saved information for the unanswered incoming calls CID INQR Views the sender s information for the call on hold CID INVT Checking of the call status of other station override call disconnection CONFER conference DALM CLR Clears DISA alarm ring DIRECT Direct dial DISA DISA DND Do Not Disturb DND FWRD Call forward in the Do Not Disturb state DND OVRD Ignores the Do Not Disturb DOOR Door phone ring answer Door Unlock DSS Station direct selection DTS Trunk direct selection EXT AREC Records the station call to the SVM 800 voice mailbox automatically EXT FWD Forward call to external FEATURE Uses function FLASH Flash FOLLOW ME Retrieve forwarded call FORWARD Call forwarding FWDTOVMS Forwards SVM 800 to voice mailbox GRP I O Includes excludes group HOLD Hold HOT LINE Hotline SAMSUNG
349. ransferred call is recalled if it is not answered 0 to 250 sec Camp On Recall Time sec Specifies the time after which an auto reserved call is recalled if it is not answered 0 to 250 sec E Hold Recall Time sec SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the recall time for the calls that the station holds 0 to 250 sec 237 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 238 Continued Function Description System Hold Recall Time sec Sets the recall time for common hold calls 0 to 250 sec Park Recall Time sec Sets the recall time for park calls 0 to 250 sec ATT Recall Time sec If a recalled call is not answered and this ATT recall time is set to 0 sec the call is not recalled again and is disconnected 0 to 250 sec Recall Wait Time sec Sets the time that a call should wait before it is recalled to the attendant when the recalled station is busy When set to 0 sec it is not recalled to the attendant and is disconnected 0 to 250 sec Recall Disconnect Time min Sets the time after which a trunk call recalled to the attendant is disconnected if it is not answered 1 250 min Viewing and Changing the Transfer Recall Pickup Settings and their Timer Settings 1 Ze Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 1 Transfer Recall Pickup Options from the Tree Viewer View the current Transfer
350. reated The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows one Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes using different Targets for the pointers various Mode references For example the Invalid pointer might route callers to an operator s Extension during the Day Mode but after 5 00 PM it would route them to a Night Options Menu during Night Mode Pointers set in the Default Mode stay in effect unless overridden by Pointers set in the current Operating Mode OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode Event NO ENTRY POINTER The Block that the OfficeServ System will execute next if the caller makes no entry in this MENU INVALID POINTER The Block that the OfficeServ System will execute next if the caller has made too many invalid entries determined by Retries allowed or a search on a value other than ENTRY failed to find a match FAXCALL POINTER The Block that the OfficeServ System will execute next after hearing a FAX Tone This applies only when the FAX machine is an extension of the telephone system Action GOTO Specifies the next Block to execute if the caller s entry matches the INPUT value PASS PASSWORD THEN GOTO Used only with MENU Blocks A password poi
351. rm Data CWBS xx or BWBS xx SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Alarm Name Continued Definition MJE10 SVMi Restart The SVMi 20E board has restarted MJE11 SVMi Halt The SVMi card has been halted MJE12 SVMi Down The SVMi card has gone down MJE13 MGI Self Restart The MGI board has restarted automatically MNF01 Card Out No card is inserted into a specific slot Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNFO02 Card In A card is inserted into a specific slot Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF04 Trunk Fault A faulty trunk which cannot provide service is detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNFO05 Trunk Recovery A trunk which can provide service is detected by the internal codec test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNFO6 Trunk A faulty trunk which cannot provide service has been Disconnect detected by the external occupation test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNFO07 Trunk Connect A trunk which can provide service is detected by the external occupation test Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MNF10 T1 Out Of Srv The T1 line is out of service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF 11 T1 In Service The T1 line is in service Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MNF14 TODC Error An MCP clock chip error has occurred MNF18 S
352. rm Reminder Interval Sets the interval at which the alarm is sounded when the alarm time set by 5 15 8 Alarm Reminder is reached 1 to 250 sec Alarm Reminder Ring Off SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the period of time after which the call is disconnected when the alarm set by 5 15 8 Alarm Reminder is sounded but is not answered 1 to 25 sec 245 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 246 Viewing and Changing the UCD Forward Wakeup Option Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 6 UCD Forward Wakeup Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current UCD Forward Wakeup Option settings 3 View the UCD Forward Wakeup Option settings 4 Save the changes SMDR Alarm Hotel Options Specifies whether to use the SMDR Alarm Hotel functions and changes the system counter and system time variables for the SMDR Alarm Hotel functions SMDR Alarm Hotel Items Item Description Auth On Account Allows the authorization code to be put above the account code when outputting the SMDR Pulse Start Time sec Sets the SMDR start time of the dial pulse trunk 1 to 250 sec DTMF Start Time sec Sets the SMDR start time of the DTMF pulse trunk 1 to 250 sec System Alarm Interval sec Sets the period of time that when a system alarm is sounded and it is answered but not cleared an alarm is soun
353. rogram Cancel Button Closes the screen Delete Button To delete the selected file Change INI To select which initialization file to use during the system Button startup The current file is displayed as blue within the index You must check the box in the INIT field to modify the selection Refresh Button To refresh the system file index Update Slave To update the slave system same with master system Button Using the Change INI button KN i N The Change INI button can only be used in OS7100 NOTE Uploading the program file Example in Program tab click on File and select the location path and name of the file to upload to the key phone system s Smart Media MMC card 3 File Control Storage Program File Upload File Name Size byte s Modified Date Name Version Date Status 0 0 44 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 45 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 2 Click on Upload to upload 3 Upon successful completion of the file upload the following message is displayed mx The file s is uploaded successfully Uploading the file You can verify the status of the file upload using the MMC 818 PGM DOWNLOAD l DB Import Export This menu is used to impo
354. rt 8 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscribers ID Initialize VM This operation will set up the system to original configuration This means that all the customization thatwas done will be REMOVED In particular all the mailboxes and all messages in them will be DELETED Custom prompts will also be returned to their original out of box settings After this the system will be reset automatically Continue alle el gt el e u e e u 4 Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide l Override Mode The Override Mode bypasses control of the Schedule Table This allows the System Administrator to immediately put a single port or group of ports in a specific mode This override will stay active on the specified ports until the System Administrator reasserts the automatic schedule The Override Mode can be activated remotely by the System Administrator See Manual Mode Selection System File Options Util Tab Help Jal a lola amp e a a PortBase Card Base Page Search _8 8 0verride Mode Functional Port Mode 2 Configuration 1 Scheduled 3 Call Routing 2 Scheduled 4 Group amp Table 3 Scheduled 5 Features 4 Scheduled 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Op
355. rt export a specific page content from to the Excel file xls This can only be used in off line mode Click on Util gt DB Import DB Export The following screen is displayed 3 DB Export Export File Sheet Iv New Feature 2 4 2 Port Common Data x Export J 0 Close Tel Number Name Made Busy MOH LCR Class Call Priority Distinct DGP Tone Distinct SLT Ring Distinct VM R No Data 46 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide DB Comparison This menu is used to compare two database files Comparing the database Example Click on Util gt DB Comparison The following screen is displayed 3 DB Comparison File 1 HH start File 2 close File 1 File 2 Result 2 Click on and select the two files to compare then click on Compare The following screen is displayed SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 47 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here DB Comparison File 1 C Documents and Settings Administrator My Documents 7 100 0dm m File 2 ADocuments and Settings Administrator My Documents 7100 down odm File 1 File 2 2 1 0 System Selection 2 1 2 LAN Parameter 2 1 5 System Options 2 2 0 Cabinet Information 2 4 1 Port Information 2 1 0 8ystem Selection 2 1 2 LAN Parameter 2 1 5 8ystem Options 2 2 0 Cabin
356. rty heard RE Route Time sec When sending a VOIP trunk call if there is no answer from the opposite party within this time it is processed as fail In case of the LCR this option specifies the time to call the next group Gateway Allow In case that this option is set to ENABLE when receiving a H 323 call if the calling side IP address is not registered in the program 833 VoIP Internet addresses the call cannot be received Fast Setup Sets whether to use the H 323 Fast Start Tunnel Mode For H 245 signaling this option sets whether to use a Q 931 signaling channel together without using a channel separately Codec Negotiation SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets whether to change the codec type to use automatically depending on the opposite party 179 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 180 Item Continued Description CLIP Table When sending a call to a VOIP network this option sets 2 4 3 CLI Send Number to use as the caller ID to send When set to NONE the CO Number of 2 6 1 Trunk Data is used Incoming Mode When a VOIP call is received this option sets whether to use the received Called Party Number as it is or to follow the 3 2 3 DID Ringing or to follow the receiving location for trunks specified in 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing CLIR With Number When set to ENABLE even if CLIP Restricti
357. runk Option Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 5 ISDN R2 Trunk Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current ISDN R2 Trunk Option settings 3 View the ISDN R2 Trunk Option settings 4 Save the changes UCD Forward Wakeup Options Specifies whether to use the UCD Forward Wakeup functions and changes the system counter and system time variables for the UCD Forward Wakeup functions UCD Forward Wakeup Items Item Description Periodic UCD Report Specifies whether to use the function that periodically outputs the statistics data of the auto call distribution groups Periodic Report SIO Specifies whether to send the PERI UCD data to the UCD port instead of the PERI UCD port of the SIO service type ports UCDS Visual Alarm During auto call distribution this function is not used if the Count number of waiting calls which ring an alarm on the LED and LCD is zero 1 to 25 244 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Continued Description UCDS Audio Alarm Count During auto call distribution this function is not used if the number of waiting calls which ring an alarm ring is zero 1 to 25 UCD CS Level 1 During auto call distribution this function is not used if the number of Level 1 calls which notify the LED of their waiting level is zero 1 to 25 UCD CS Level 2 During auto call distribution this fun
358. rver If a domain name is entered in this option the DNS query is executed and through this the IP address of the SIP server is obtained Alter Proxy IP Address In case that the proxy address is specified to be an IP address type this option sets the alternative proxy IP address to replace when the specified SIP server fails DNS Server1 IP Address When executing a DNS Query using a domain name this option sets the IP address of the name server that gives the IP address of the SIP server DNS Server2 IP Address Set the alternate name server to use when the name server specified in the DNS Server1 IP Address field fails SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the SIP Option Settings 1 Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 2 SIP Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current SIP Option settings 3 Change the SIP Option settings 4 Save the changes VoIP Outgoing Digits Sets the digit code conversion settings when sending an H 323 and SIP VoIP trunk call Items to be Specified Description Table No Index 0 to 62 of the first IP table to refer to when converting an access code to an IP address Access Digit Digits needed to connect to the opposite party This is needed to transmit a call to the opposite system Insert Digit Digit to insert at the front of the called party number entered Digit Length Length of the VoIP
359. rward to the next Block Wait for first This is the time in seconds from 0 to 99 that OfficeServ System will entry digits wait for the caller to make an entry This timer begins after the last menu prompt has been spoken Wait for This is the time in seconds from 0 to 99 that OfficeServ System will subsequent wait for the caller to make a subsequent entry This timer begins digits after the first caller entry digit has been received and resets after each digit pressed by the caller up to the Max Caller Entry value Repeat Indicates the number of times from 0 to 9 the menu prompts are prompts if repeated if no entry is made by the caller no entry Retry if The number of additional attempts that this MENU allows if the invalid caller makes an invalid entry The allowable inputs are 0 9 condition When retries are exhausted the OfficeServ System will exit the MENU using the lt INVALID gt condition Append to A Y in this parameter instructs OfficeServ System to add the key register resulting KEY value to the previous KEY value stored in the KEY register The new KEY will only be appended if the search in the current MENU was successful This is useful in applications where the caller is asked to enter DTMF usually one or two digits in response to a series of prompts MENUs Each response is first validated by matching an INPUT value and then added appended to the previous response After the final response
360. ry Accesses 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report Times All Ports Busy Number of Subscribers Total Message Count Avg Messages Mailbox Disk Space Available 316 8 10 Site Information B 11 Status Screen 9 Conference al al o la a u Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 50 48 Port The Port column indicates the voice port number Mode The Mode Number column displays which mode the port is in Active Block This column displays which block is currently servicing a call as it gets directed through the call session SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Item Description Status The status column displays the current condition that the port is in Some examples are Idle Processing Transferring Messaging etc Calls To Date The total number of calls that the OfficeServ System has processed Average Calls The average number of calls per week Per Week Directory The total number of callers that have accessed the directory Accesses Times All The total number of times all ports have been busy Ports Busy Number Of The total number of subscribers on the system This is actually a Subscribers mailbox count Extensions are created for every station port on the phon
361. s Sets the interval of time for which the message waiting lamp is turned off for the regular phone Default 1 second Hook Off Time 10 ms Sets the minimum period of time to be recognized as a hook off for the regular phone Hook On Time 10 ms Sets the minimum period of time to be recognized as a hook on for the regular phone Hook Flash Min Time 10 ms Sets the minimum hook flash time for the regular phone Enter a value in units of 10 ms Hook Flash Max Time 10 ms Sets the maximum hook flash time for the regular phone Enter a value in units of 10 ms Power Down Time 100 ms SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the power down time when the SLI is disconnected Enter a value in units of 100 ms 211 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 212 Viewing and Changing the System Information Select 5 Features gt 5 5 System Control gt 5 5 0 System Control from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the System Information tab 3 View the current system information values 4 Change the system information values 5 Save the changes System I O Options System I O Parameter Sets the parameter values related to the LAN and the phone interoperation If you changed a LAN parameter value you have to restart the system System I O Parameter Parameter Description Easyset Password Sets the password used for confirmation
362. s 8 9 3 Messaging Activity 8 9 5 By Hour 8 9 6 By Port Number 8 9 7 By Day of Week 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T OfficeServ MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 47 13 Reporting Indicates the report period This is the date beginning when the Report Counters were last cleared and ending at the current date Created The date and time the report was actually created Calls The total number of calls listed by each Call Code Total Count The percentage of the calls of a particular Call Code Minutes The total connect time in minutes of all calls of a particular Call Code Port Utilization A listing of the Call Code types and their port utilization by By Call Code percentage 312 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide siii File Option rm Tab Help amp o s D amp By e PortBase Card Base Page Search 8 9 5 By Hour Fuactional Refresh Timer sec 15 w 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing Reporting 4 Group amp Table Created 5 Features 5A 6P rang Comet Calls Total Count Minutes Port Utilization by Call Code 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2
363. s Path Replacement CONP Displays the networking name Connected Name Display SRELOC Exchanges station data Set Relocation SLOCAT Checks the locations of hotel staff Staff Locater Hotel function SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 119 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Function Type Description INFDSP Displays the SPOT View information NOCLIP Prevents calling line ID being sent No CLIP Send ABW Connects disconnects to the group agent for auto call distribution DGPALM Sets the alarm time for multiple stations CHOICE Displays the SPOT Choice information STATE Sets the status for the boss DIVERT Switches to the secretary NPAGE Networking announcement Paging Across Networked Node E LCR1 Extended optimal route selection 1 E LCR2 Extended optimal route selection 2 E LCR3 Extended optimal route selection 3 E LCR4 Extended optimal route selection 4 TCLIP Allows the phone to send a different calling line ID for each call Temporary CLIP Viewing and Changing the Number Plan Select 2 Configuration gt 2 8 Numbering Plan gt 2 8 0 Numbering Plan from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the cabinet type 3 View the number plan for the selected cabinet type 4 Change the number plan for the selected cabinet type 5 Save the changes 120 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide
364. s it to the Mail server A value of 0 means delete the original voice message immediately after it is packed up and sent to the Mail Server Adjust Message Retention must be set to Y for this parameter to take effect The selected range is from 0 to 999 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 391 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Call Director MClass Block TEMPLATE MCL General Public Caller Interface OutCall Prompts E Mail Gateway Call Director Operating Mode 00 Default v nt T Be Action Type MSG LEFT MNU NOMSG LEFT ESCAPE GREET DTMF OPERATOR USER EXIT DIRECTORY Call Director Gp Target Name Item Description Operating Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Mode Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given an unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows one Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes using different Targets for the pointers various Mode references For example the No Answer pointer might route callers to an associate s Extension during the Day Mode but after 5 00 PM it would route them to a Mailbox dur
365. s list thereby creating nested lists Members may be changed according to changes in operating mode General List Block TEMPLATE LST General List Member Call Director General VMS Group Label Name TEMPLATE LST Number Extension Mclass Language List Controls _ Send broadcast MSG allowed Extended Prompting enabled Yes Public Directory T ser Mailbox greeting allowed Subscriber password Retention days remaining 0 Delete all unheard copies of a No Activity From To Msgs distributed Item Description VMS Group VMS group Label Name The name of this block A Block name can be any alphanumeric Name normally used string up to 16 characters long including spaces A Block name may not be the same as another Block name MBX EXT or LIST Numbers may not be duplicated within the same group The LIST Group Number is located to the left of the LIST Block Group Numbers are convenient for organizing Lists into application specific groups In most applications the default value of 01 is SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 363 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 364 Item Continued Description Values from 01 to 99 are valid You select which group the LIST Block belongs to before you create the LIST Block Group Numbers for ECLASS EXTENSION MCLASS MAILBOX and LIST
366. s the time is set to 00 00 in which case it is not saved automatically The database from a smart media card MMC card can only be copied to the system manually while the system is operating After copying the system should be restarted after which the system will operate with the copied database Alarm Overflow Sets the processing method when all alarm buffers are filled Over Written Overwrites starting with the oldest alarm entry Stop Recording No longer records alarm entries System Speed Max Sets the number of common system speed dials to the maximum of 500 or 950 System Speed Block Assigns the common speed dial blocks Up to 50 common speed dial blocks can be set Idle when enblock When a large scaled LCD phone is in Enblock mode and a number to send to is being entered on the keypad before pressing the Send button this option sets whether the system processes this period as Busy or Idle LCD2 Enblock Sets whether to set the dial mode of a two 2 line LCD phone with a navigation button to Enblock mode Simultaneous Zone External Page Sets whether an announcement is available or not from two 2 external announcement areas at the same time Use Loud Bell For Page Cabinet 1 Sets whether to use the LB port of the MISC card in Cabinet1 as the ROP port Use Loud Bell For Page Cabinet 2 Sets whether to use the LB port of the MISC card in Cabinet2 as th
367. s this object to be listed in either of the appropriate Directories The Public directory is the directory that callers access the User directory is the directory that subscribers access Retention days remaining The number of days remaining before this block is automatically discarded during system maintenance if unused The range is 0 999 days An entry of 0 means indefinite Authorization Extension Block TEMPLATE ExT General Additional Information Caller Options Processor Call Director Authorizations Blocking allowed Blocking Enabled Call2 Enabled Call screening Scheduling Intercept Retrieve public caller allowed Busy greeting allowed Extended prompting enabled gt ele l 121 118 Blocking Call blocking will prevent any calls from being transferred to your extension or designated location You may think of it as a DND feature It will override all call transfer instructions follow me forward find me etc but it will not override call screening A Y in this field allows the Subscriber to set Call Blocking for their extension An N in this field disables the option and it will not be spoken as an option in the extension user menu SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 351 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Descri
368. s whether to operate SPNet dialing in Overlap mode CLIP Table When a network call is received in the KB Net this option sets so that the CLI number set in the 2 4 3 CLI Send Number is displayed instead of Node Station number Real Ringback Tone When calling on the VoIP networking this option sets whether to have a virtual tone heard or have a ring back tone received from the opposite party heard Use 2 System ID In networking this option sets so that a system can have two 2 node IDs ELCR CLIP Table In case of the E LCR call this option sets so that it follows the CLIP Table SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 137 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 138 Continued Item Description KB Call Trace Sets whether to perform the VoIP and PRI call traces SPNet DTMF Forward In case of the SPNet this option sets so that the ext fwd is performed in the state that only a trunk port is occupied and a dial tone is heard Remote Voice Mail Sets whether to use the voice mailbox card of other system connected using the Q Sig Remote Attendant 1 to 6 Sets whether to use the attendant of other system for each ring mode Viewing and Changing the Networking Option Settings 1 2 3 4 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 3 Networking gt 3 3 4 Networking Options from the Tree Viewer View the networking option settings Change the ne
369. saved files when exiting the program a Do you want to save chage s message is displayed Click on Yes to save the files Otherwise click on No to discard files SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 39 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Options Menu The Options menu consists of Language Partial Request and Use Toolbar Selection Lanquage gt 5 Partial Request 4 Use Toolbar l Language You can select the language to be displayed in the OfficeServ DM program Currently available languages are English Korean Russian Germany and Italian From Options gt Language select which language to use The following message is displayed E o Gi New language setting saved Restart the program Lox 2 Restart the program to use the interface with the selected language 40 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Partial Request You can request to the system that you selected items Enable Options gt Partial Request following screen will be displayed in some menu 3 Partial Request Total Item s Wanted Item s Array Range All ok Cancel 2 You can select items to the system Field Details Total Item s Display all items that you can select Array Select items clicking with Total Item s or writing with text box 201
370. scribers Saved The current message count from Public Callers and other messages subscribers reflecting how many have been saved SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide MClass Block The MClass Class of Service Block is a block containing many general parameters effecting Mailbox or List Block Each MClass Block may be associated with one or several subscriber mailboxes Mailbox Blocks or List Blocks This information includes the maximum length of a mailbox number the number of days messages will be retained the number of days unused mailboxes will be retained Message Waiting Indication MWI dialing codes Message Alert and other parameters There is no limit to the number of Mailbox Blocks the MClass Block may be associated with General MClass Block TEMPLATE MCL General Public Caller Interface OutCall Prompts E Mail Gateway Call Director General VMS Group Label Name TEMPLATE MCL Message Center Controls Max greeting lenath 30 Mailbox retention 0 Maximum number messages 0 Maximum messages length sec 600 Message retention day 9999 Item Description VMS Group VMS group Label Name This is the name of the MClass and is used to reference this block It must be a unique name and cannot be the same as any other MClass Block Max Maximum greeting length that a subscriber can record f
371. scssscsscesseeesseeseseeeeseeeeseeeeeeeesseeesseeeeseeeeseeeeseeesseeenseeesees 22 CHAPTER 3 OfficeServ DM General Functions 23 Screen Layo Ut eresse osanaan a vs Zep ected sas ceccendaceeeced soot ch AaS aras taevani dreasa ESEAS EEIE NESSES 23 OfficeServ DM Toolbar ICONS cccc cceceeeeceeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesseaeeeseneeeeseneeeeeees 24 System MON ocsssecescenscccesie cecensacevcssnceseestee vided acecvcseddcuced ddaneeee ssuedccenveadcce dev eadctenuexcusccetand 25 COMME Cte ss 23s 5eissiicecdhd BRUMMELL 25 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 9 TABLE OF CONTENTS DISCOMMOCtiasac5sSecdegh 2h hbbs steady cokes ddechactacdens tadlceaveethacpesseecsfaviencedd ETT 26 Download DBs ien ich tad din e ab oneal seal Soe 26 lO AND B ates EE eit cesta neraee der aecenes E dais eee ete 30 Link Setup tei neice Ge EE A Sd eee 33 File MOU i sicissicicsectaiecesccbicinstesenccdtyvantinadsvnsnstacuvaaniacctucaeasiepadscouucdeeasteredauduugesadstsseuousiesancends 38 Open DB ies Akita A toate Attain Rat At Ata bhi a ahahaha 38 Close DB ire ra aie nai Si di hs td ene 39 EEX UU ratte oa cg we ce ceca ee tee oe caked ie dee bh eto tates a Midian be Seg tat Sei eoee teh 39 Options Menu is siviciscccccccetsdveccccenceecen annaa mannana aaan Kanana a anaiona nia naiai aaia aiana 40 Language sni aches eee is es A ca ecg 40 Partial Request lt icivn aie ei etn atl ev aie Nin rete ee ee 41 Wse ToolBar A E T AETAT 41 tH eaa a A AT EE
372. se this function Silence Suppression The Silence Suppression is the function that detects silence during talking and does not transmit those voice packets This option sets whether to use this function Input Filter Sets whether to perform the DSP Input Filtering Input Gain Inputs the call receptivity of the PCM voice that enters the DSP 31 31 Db Voice Volume Sets the volume used when converting voice packets to a PCM voice 31 31 Db Frame Count Selects the audio codec of the MGI card and sets the transmission interval time for VoIP packets Jitter Option Factor Sets the reference to control the Jitter buffering operation when converting voice packets received from the network to a PCM voice If this option is set to a value less than 4 emphasis is put on the packet loss processing If set to a value larger than 4 emphasis is put on the packet delay Min Jitter Delay ms Selects the jitter delay value Max Jitter Delay ms Selects the maximum jitter delay value Loss Check Time Sets the loss check interval for RTP packets sec FAX ECM When using the T 38 fax this option sets the additional recovery function for fax transmission errors FAX Count Sets the maximum allowable number of the Internet FAX channels DTMF Type Sets whether to send DTMF signals along a voice channel SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd INBAND or using a separate message
373. set time variables related to the Transfer Recall Pickup functions Items to be Specified Function Description Transfer Ring Back MOH Specifies whether to use the function that sends the hold tone instead of the dial tone when a call is transferred Cancel Key After the user has switched to the second caller on a phone without an LCD whenever the hook switch is pressed the next caller is connected and others enter the hold state This is called the alternate call state This option is not used for an alternate call state When this option is set to On if the hook switch is pressed the new call i e the second call is released and the user returns to the first caller VMS Transfer Key Specifies whether the VT key operation is transferred or not to the VM Recall Pickup Specifies whether other stations can answer the recalled calls in place of the ringing station Any station can answer the recalled calls received on the attendant regardless of this option s setting Pickup by DSS Key When set to On if a call is received at a station to which the DS button is set that DS button blinks By pressing this button a user can answer the call immediately in place of the original recipient Pickup Hold Station Specifies which other station can pick up held calls E amp M Transfer Recall E amp M Transfer Recall Transfer Recall Time sec Specifies the time after which a t
374. sing different Targets for the pointers various Mode references For example the No Answer pointer might route callers to an operator s Extension during the Day Mode but after 5 00 PM it would route them to a Night Options Menu during Night Mode Pointers set in the Default Mode are always in effect unless the same Pointer is set in the current Operating Mode OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 329 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued ANSWER The block that the OfficeServ system will execute next if the dialed number is answered Normally this pointer is left blank in which case the OfficeServ system will hang up after completing the call transfer NO ANSR The OfficeServ system goes immediately to the designated target Block when a ring noanswer condition is encountered BUSY The OfficeServ system goes immediately to the designated target Block when a busy condition is encountered FBUSY The OfficeServ system goes immediately to the designated target Block when a fast busy is encountered ERROR The OfficeServ system goes immediately to the designated target Block if an error signal is encountered after dialing the number
375. sly this option sets the maximum number of incoming calls that can be processed SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 129 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 130 Continued Item Description Max call If the number of calls received by a DGP and are being processed is higher than the number specified in this item any new incoming call cannot be processed and will be disconnected Call Wait When the station to which the call is forwarded is busy this option sets whether to make it wait automatically Translate Name Enter a name for the entered digits which can be up to 11 characters long Priority Sets the priority for a call When all members of the station group called are busy and there are multiple calls on standby this option is used to decide which standby call will be connected first if a member of that station group becomes available Range 1 to 9 where 1 is the highest priority DGP Tone When a call is received by the incoming digits phone if the receiving station is a digital phone the tone can be differentiated so that it can be distinguished from other rings SLT Ring Requirements When a call is received by the incoming digits phone if the receiving station is a digital phone the ring period can be differentiated so that it can be distinguished from other rings Sets the ENM Translate item of 2 6 4 Digits
376. so sets whether to perform call restriction by station or by giving a grade to each trunk The call restriction grade of a trunk should be set for each ring mode Below are the call restriction grades for trunks Grade Description F STN Depends o the call restriction grade of the station CLS A Depends on the call restriction grade A Does not restrict calls CLS B Depends on the call restriction grade B CLS C Depends on the call restriction grade C CLS D Depends on the call restriction grade D CLS E Depends on the call restriction grade E CLS F Depends on the call restriction grade F CLS G Depends on the call restriction grade G CLS H Depends on the call restriction grade H Cannot send trunk calls Viewing and Changing the Trunk Call Restriction Grades 1 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 8 Toll Restriction gt 4 8 5 Trunk Toll Type from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current trunk call restriction grades Change the call restriction grades 4 Save the changes 162 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Key Programming Default Key For each phone type that has the button that can be programmed this function specifies the same functions to the same program button at a once No Phone Type Description 00 24 BTN SETS Phone that has twenty four 24 program buttons 01 12 BTN SETS Phone that h
377. st of the numbers 0 to 9 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 233 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Feature Password Items Item Description MMC The password to enter when specifying the administrator program mode Ring Plan The password to enter when changing the mode DISA Alarm The password to enter when clearing a DISA alarm HMT Delete The password to enter when deleting the Hotel charge WLI Regist The password to enter when registering a wireless phone Alarm Clear The password to enter when clearing an alarm Viewing and Changing the Tenant Options Select 5 Features gt 5 13 System Features gt 5 13 1 Tenant Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current tenant options setting J Change the tenant options setting 4 Save the changes Customer Access KMMC Sets the System Administrator customer to have access to certain MMCs This MMC is for both tenants Viewing and Changing the Customer Access KMMC Select 5 13 System Features gt 5 13 2 Customer Access KMMC from the Tree Viewer View the Customer Access KMMC 3 Change the Customer Access KMMC 4 Save the changes 234 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Programmed Message Sets the programmed messages Viewing and Changing the Programmed Messages Select 5 Features gt 5 13 System Features gt 5 13 3 Programmed M
378. t AA or VMS card for alarm answering Wake up Announcement Items Item Description Source Set the auto attendant AA or voice mailbox VMS group numbers to be connected for the coloring service Group Busy Sets the background sound source to be played when all auto attendants AA or voice mailbox VMS groups to be connected for alarm answering are already being used If set to None the Dial tone is played If set to Tone the Hold tone is played Prompt Sets the number of the announcement to play for alarm answering Automatic Traffic Report Sets the statistics data printing options auto manual In Auto Print mode after printing the data all existing data is deleted and new data begins to be saved Automatic Traffic Report Options Option Description Auto Print Off Automatic printing is disabled Daily Time Prints the data at the same time every day You have to set the hour and minute for printing Every Time Prints the data every hour You have to set the minute for printing Three Time Shift Sets three printing times at which the data is printed You have to set at least one printing time and set the start end hour and minute Feature Password You have to enter a password when specifying the administrator program node and there are also some functions that require a specific password before use You can change these passwords with this function They have four 4 digits and consi
379. t Cx Syy MJD19 PRI Restart The PRI board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD20 BRI Restart The BRI board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD21 PCM Loss APCM code loss has occurred in the E1 PRI or BRI board Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD22 PCM Recovery The PCM code loss that occurred in the E1 PRI or BRI board is recovered Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD23 L2 Disconnect The PRI L2 is disconnected MJD24 L2 Connect The PRI L2 is connected MJE01 MGI Restart The MGI board is restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE03 MGI IP Duplicate The IP address of the MGI board has duplicated Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE04 MGI NTWK Error The MGI board has stopped due to a system ping test error Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE05 MGI NTWK Rec The stopping of the MGI board has cleared due to a system ping test error Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJE06 MGI DSP Error The DSP operation error has occurred in the MGI board Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MJE07 MGI DSP Run The DSP operation error that occurred in the MGI board is cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Port Cx Syy Pzz MJE08 WBS Disconnect The WBS has been disconnected from the system Alarm Data CWBS xx or BWBS xx MJE09 WBS Connect The WBS has been connected to the system Ala
380. t and use the urgent text messages Viewing and Changing the Urgent Text Messages Select 5 Features gt 5 15 Station Features gt 5 15 10 Text Message from the Tree Viewer 2 View the urgent text messages 3 Change the urgent text messages 4 Save the changes Group Conference Sets the conference groups for a large LCD phone You can set up to five 5 conference groups for a station The number of members you can register for a conference group can be up to four 4 person s excluding yourself If you call a previously set conference group using the GCONF button ona large LCD phone the call connection tone is heard and if a member answers it the call connection tone stops and the phone is changed to Conference mode automatically If a member is called via a normal analog trunk your phone cannot know whether they has answered or not Therefore in this case he is always regarded as having answered when the SMDR START TIME is passed and his phone is changed to Conference mode automatically Also if you are talking on a normal analog trunk your phone cannot know whether a member is disconnected or not Therefore in this case the conference chairman has to remove the member from Conference mode manually SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 259 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 260 Requirements Only the station for which the Group Conference item of 2 5 6 DL
381. t call 0710 Description Realtime Greeting 0741 Description Item Description Target herald prompt The prompt that plays during a transfer By default this is transferring to Forward herald prompt The prompt that plays when a call is forwarded By default this is forwarding to Blind xfer prompt The prompt that plays during a blind transfer By default this is one moment please Monitored xfer prompt The prompt that plays during a monitored transfer By default this is Please hold while connect your call Find me xfer prompt The prompt that plays during a find me operation By default this is Please hold while locate your party Call screening The prompt that plays during call screening By default this is Whose calling please No answer The prompt that plays to a caller during an unanswered prompt transfer By default this is I m sorry the call was not answered Busy prompt The prompt that plays when a caller is holding for a busy station By default there are two they are I m sorry the number is busy and I m sorry the number is still busy SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 339 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 340 Item Continued Description Block prompt The prompt that plays
382. t is ringed does not answer within this time the ring is disconnected and the next member is ringed When set to 0 sec this option does not operate Group Busy If all members of the station group are buddy this option sets whether to process a new call as a call during the busy state In case of an uncondition group this is not applied Group Answer For a call received to a group this option sets whether to apply the auto ringing The auto ringing is available only if the ring distribution method is Sequential or Distributed All Out Next When all members of the station group are logged out this option sets whether to forward the call to the station group specified in the Next Port option without waiting for the Overflow time Override Sets the waiting time to override forcibly Announce Sets the auto announcement playback time Member 1 99 Sets the members of the station group SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 139 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Station Group Type Station Group Type Description Normal Normal station group VMAA Voice mailbox auto attendant group UCD Auto call distribution group Bi_VMS Embedded voice mailbox group MSG Message group When a member of this group leaves a message the answer call is received to the group So BRI SO station group VMSUCD Group that uses the VMS as the next port of the UCD
383. t necessarily have to be the same number dialed by OfficeServ System when transferring to the extension on the telephone system This cannot be the same number of any other extension and is also referred to as the Key Value Mailbox The mailbox corresponding to the subscriber Extension Block By entering a Mailbox Block here signifies that this extension owns the specified Mailbox Eclass The name of the EClass block that contains the class of service information for this Extension Much of the prompts control and parameters are located here See the EClass Block for detailed information and operation Language This is a language option You may select from any installed language and from that point on the extension will respond to the authorized owner in the language selected Authorized owner means a user who has entered a valid password The mailbox block also has a language field and the OfficeServ System will try to resolve these fields to a single value make them match If conflicting information is contained in these fields the Extension Block has priority and the Mailbox Block will be automatically changed to match This selection is based on the order of the defined languages in page 3 of the System Wide Parameters SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 347 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description If the languages
384. t the modem s initialization command SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 37 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here File Menu The File menu provides functions such as opening closing the user database and exiting the program fs Open DB Close DB Using the File menu A CS The File menu s Open Database can only be used in off line NOTE mode l Open DB This menu is used to open a file This can only be used in off line mode Click on File gt Open DB The following screen is displayed Loom SERE download odm FileName Files of Type open Cancet_ 38 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Select a file and then click on Open The following lt Login gt screen is displayed Password Tenant No Tenant 1 Enter the correct password to open the selected file c Entering the password Enter the correct password After three unsuccessful login attempts CHECK an error message is displayed and the Open Database menu is cancelled Close DB This menu is used to close a file This can only be used in off line mode Click on File gt Close DB to close an opened user database l Exit This menu is used to terminate the program Click on File gt Exit to terminate the program Save changes on exit When there are un
385. tation Block is the Call Progress Training facility This feature allows you to provide phone numbers and have OfficeServ System call them to learn the ringback and busy signals automatically The OfficeServ System then adjusts the appropriate parameter settings in the Station Block according to the data collected by calling the provided numbers Blocks that reference a telephone number such as Mailbox Blocks must reference a Station Block which allows the OfficeServ System to dial This is particularly useful for unique stations that must be handled in a special way However this usually isn t necessary Station Blocks contain a set of matching strings which allow the OfficeServ System to select an appropriate Station Block based on the kind of number being dialed all seven digit numbers four digit numbers beginning with 3 0 long distance numbers etc The OfficeServ System requires at least one Station Block to make supervised calls and you can create as many Station Blocks as desired Station blocks can be specifically selected If an instruction to dial a number such as a message alert number or pager notification both found in the mailbox block does not have a specific station block defined a station block will be automatically selected based on the number to dial See Matching Dial Strings for more on this subject There are five types of Station Blocks preset on OfficeServ System Template Beeper Long Distance Off Pr
386. tchdog Reset The MCP has restarted due to an exception KKK e e KK KKK KKK IKKE KKK KKK AKER ARERR Alarm Data Reason BUS ERR Bus error ADDR ERR Address error ILLEGAL Wrong opcode ZERO DIVID Divided by zero PRIVILEGE Privilege violation ENDL LOOP Endless loop MJAO5 LCP Reset The LCP has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet 1 2 MJAO6 PCM Switching Switching control error Alarm Data MCP BASE ESM 1 ESM 2 or ESM 3 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued ID Alarm Name Description MJAO8 FAN Sensor Error A power fan sensor error has occurred MJAO9 FAN Recovery The power fan sensor error has recovered MJA10 SW Except Reset System restart with SW exception MJA11 CPU Overload The current CPU load has reached more than 80 i f in the NAND Flash MJA12 Flash Format Err Formatting was per ormed in the ash as an error has occurred during its operation A Halt occurs as the system is activated by an MJA1 Invalid MMC Hal i ee Hall unauthorized MMC MJB LCP Task Error LCP or task error MJBO1 HDLC Com Error An error has occurred in communication with the LCP MJB02 Memory Alarm 1 An MCP RAM area diagnostics error has occurred MJBO6 IPC MSGQ Over IPC TX queue full error has occurred in the MCP2 Alarm data IPC Queue type MCP LAN MCP SCP MCP LCP1 MCP LCP2 MJBO7 IPC MSG
387. te the reminders they Follow up create as either a Commitment Follow up or Task The individual allowed meaning of these labels may vary from person to person their intent is to provide a way of separating reminders into different categories SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 373 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description These categories can be reviewed in the subscriber Workload Manager Workload Manager must be Y to make Commitment Follow up Allowed Work Message If this is enabled a subscriber may group messages for playback grouping Reminders messages from a specific sender Urgent messages allowed Call back messages and Private messages may all be grouped separately Reminders may be further sub divided in the Subscriber Workload manager Mailbox When set to yes the caller is allowed to record a mailbox greeting greeting allowed Message When set to yes the caller is allowed to turn on and off the message alert control alert and set the alert number allowed Extended A Y in this field enables the full length extended prompting to play prompting to the subscriber the next time he logs into his mailbox Once the enabled flag is set to N extended prompting does not play again and the subscriber does not have to listen to all the dialing options The extended prompting is used to aid the new mailbox user Auto play of
388. ternal station Not used Monitor transfer Not used Max Time of This is the maximum time of waiting for answers in seconds Waiting for Answer Rings for no Number of ringback tones to decide that the callee does not answer answer Busy cycles for busy Number of busy tones to decide that the callee is busy Silence duration Not used Max Time of waiting for Silence Not used SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 425 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 426 Override Strings Station Block TEMPLATE STN General Override Strings Transfer Call Transfer DTMF Override Strings No answer Connect Busy Rejected Error Conference Call Control Override Strings Initiate Setup Abort Tear down Item Description Transfer The digits string command to dial to place a caller on consultation hold when transferring a caller from one extension to another and get a dial tone No answer The digits string command the system dials to abort a call transfer which resulted in a no answer condition Connect The digits string command to dial to complete a call transfer and connect the caller to the called party Busy The digits string command the system dials to abort a call transfer which resulted in a busy signal Rejected The digits string
389. the MOH and the called station continues to ring If the station does not answer for the TrunkAuto MOH Disconnect Time the call is disconnected Page Disconnect Time sec Sets the maximum period of time for which an external announcement can be played 1 to 250 sec First Digit Time sec Sets the period of time during which the first digit should be pressed when making a call 1 to 250 sec Inter Digit Time sec Sets the maximum period of time between two digits 1 to 250 sec Feature Out Time min Sets the maximum Future No Action Time KMMC Lock Out Time sec SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Sets the period of time that the MMC become disabled if there is no operation 10 to 250 sec 239 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 240 Continued Time Variable Description WebMMC Lock Time min Sets the period of time that the WebMMC become disconnected if there is no operation 1 to 60 min Call Back No Answer Time Sets the period of time after which a reserved ring sec is canceled if there is no answer 1 to 250 sec OHVA Answer Time sec Sets the period of time that an off hook announcement becomes disconnected if there is no answer 1 to 250 sec Viewing and Changing the Confirm Disconnect No Action Timer Settings Select 5 Features gt 5 14 Timer Option Features gt 5 14 2 Confirm Disconnect NoActio
390. the branch group for the station 1 to 99 Each station has a branch group Calls received by other phones in the same branch group can be picked up by the station just by lifting the phone s receiver CID ANI Allow Sets whether to allow sender information for the station to be displayed Ringback Sets the ring back service for the station Enter the VMS message Message number to use for ring back 1 to 9999 Speed Block Assigns individual speed dial blocks 0 to 5 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 93 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 94 Viewing and Changing the Station Data L A 4 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 5 Station Port gt 2 5 1 Station Data from the Tree Viewer View the Pickup Group Branch Group CID ANI Allow Ringback Message and Speed Block settings for the stations Change the Pickup Group Branch Group CID ANI Allow Ring back Message and Speed Block settings for the stations Save the changes Station On Off Data Sets the On or Off option for each function by station Items to be Specified Item Description Off Hook Ring Sets whether to use the Off Hook Ring function Access Dial Sets whether to select a trunk or trunk group directly by dialing when using the optimal line selection function Next Group Tone Sets whether to use a signal sound to notify selection of a trunk group for the next ste
391. the power status of the fan located inside the cabinet Option Board1 Displays the daughter cards installed in option slot 1 of the LP40 card of the cabinet Option Board2 Displays the daughter cards installed in option slot 2 of the LP40 card of the cabinet Option Board3 Displays the daughter cards installed in option slot 3 of the LP40 card of the cabinet Board EPLD Version Displays the cabinet s motherboard EPLD version Board PCB Version Displays the cabinet s motherboard PCB version Card EPLD Version Displays the LP card EPLD version in the cabinet Card PCB Version SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Displays the LP card PCB version in the cabinet 73 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Slot Information When installing a new card in the slot if this new card is of a different type from the existing card this option sets the information related to this new card Slot Information Items Item Description Previous Card Information for the previously installed card Previous Service 1 Previous Service 2 Previous Service 3 Service type of the previously installed card Current Card Information for the new card Current Service 1 Current Service 2 Current Service 3 Service type of the new card Card Version Version of the new card Max Channel 1 Max
392. then set your desired times to Day mode Ring Mode Description Ring Mode 1 00 00 23 59 Night mode Includes all the times that are not included in the modes 2 to 4 Ring Mode 2 08 00 12 00 morning business time Ring Mode 3 12 01 12 59 lunch time Ring Mode 4 13 00 17 00 afternoon business time SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 147 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 148 e When connecting and using a device that has only the Day Night mode such as voice mailbox etc you must set the 2 1 6 VMS Day Night Ring Plan items Viewing and Changing the Ring Plan Time Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 3 Ring Plan gt 4 3 1 Ring Plan Time from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current Ring Plan Time Option settings 3 Change the Ring Plan Time Override and Ring Plan Override settings 4 Save the changes Holyday List Sets the vacation dates for a year If it reaches one of the annual holidays the station changes to Night mode automatically You can enter a holiday in the format of month and day MMDD You can enter up to 20 holidays The RING PLAN is the mode number to operate in a specified holiday Viewing and Changing the Holyday List 1 Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 3 Ring Plan gt 4 3 2 Holiday List from the Tree Viewer View the current vacations in a year Enter a mode number to operate on a vacation set in the Ring P
393. tinct 7 Ti 1 2 Conagueston 2001 Idie ONE fi No No a 2 1 8ystem Configuration 2002 Idie TONE fi No Ino A 2 2 Cabinet Configuration 2003 Idie TONE fi No No 2 3 Virtual Cabinet 2004 iaie Tone 1 No No PPE RPON C 2005 idie hone h no No 2 4 1 Port Information 2 42Port Common Daia 2006 idle ONE fi No No 2 4 3 Send CLI Number 2007 Idie TONE fi No No 2 5 Station Port Configuration 2008 Idie TONE fi No No 2 6 Trunk Port Configuration 4100 7 idie TONE R _ iNo No 2 7 Virtual Port Configuration t oheka 4101 Idie TONE fi No No 3 Call Routing 4102 idle TONE fi No No 4 Group amp Table 4103 Idle TONE 1 No No 5 Features 4104 Idle TONE f No No geam Conka 4105 idie Tone fi No No 9 Conference 4106 Idie Tone fi No No 4107 Idle TONE fi No No 4108 E Idie Tone fi No Mo LI aaan ha oe la im N jz I i p gt in 7 a a el x a e e u e a u Message Default 165 213 89 72 10 09 16 V4 52 OfficeServ 7400 USA 2010 10 26 14 17 41 56 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 57 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here 3 Set each field appropriately and click on g to save changes 4 Click on u to terminate the lt Page Screen gt Displaying the Cell Property When the cursor is in an input field the OfficeServ DM displays the corresponding field properties on the status bar Message
394. ting is correct From the Internet Explorer 8 click on Tools gt Internet Options gt Security gt Custom Level Web Browser Setting IAS This options must be set in Internet or Local Intranet or Trusted sites NOTE with connection status ActiveX Controls and plug ins gt Initialize and script ActiveX contols not marked as safe for scripting This must be Prompt or Enable SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 443 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Security Settings Trusted Sites Zone xi f Settings Prompt 9 Download unsigned Activex controls Disable Enable Initialize and script Activex controls not marked as safe for se O Disable Enable Tv Ony alow approved domains to use Activex without promp Disable Enable 9 Run Activex controls and plug ins Administrator approved O Disable A Fnahle Takes effect after you restart Internet Explorer hf M Reset custom settings Resetto Medium default ha Reset Security Settings Trusted Sites Zone Eg M Settings a Downloads Automatic prompting For file downloads O Disable Enable 1 amp 5 File download O Disable Enable E Font download O Disable Enable O Prompt e8 Enable NET Framework setup O Disable Enable _ Miscellaneous rress data sources arenes damains Takes
395. to ask the caller to enter the parties FIRST name Target name prefix The prompt spoken in front of the target object s name To reach SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 333 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Item Description No matches The prompt indicating no matches were found found Invalid entry The prompt indicating the caller input is invalid Press 9 for The prompt offering the caller additional matches more names Press 0 fora new name The prompt offering the caller the option to search for another name Press to exit The prompt offering the caller the option to return to the previous menu Press 1 8 A brief description of the prompt that is played to the caller and its associated prompt number Directory This is a record of directory activity and may be used for system Activity planning or troubleshooting Call Director Directory Block TEMPLATE DIR Search Information Prompts Call Director Operating Mode 00 Default lw Event Call Director Action Type Gp Target Name ESCAPE INVALID MNU MNU NO ENTRY MNU AUDIOLIB 334 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Item Description Operating Mode This is used to select an operating mode for configurat
396. to redial AUTO REDIAL ON BUSY REVW Checks the caller ID CID REVIEW RP Converts displays the ring mode RING PLAN RSV Displays the room status ROOM STATUS VIEW Hotel function RTO Fixes ring mode RING PLAN OVERRIDE SETDND Sets releases the Do Not Disturb function of other station REMOTE SET DND SETMG Leaving a message SET MESSAGE W O RING SG Direct station group selection STATION GROUP SLOCAT Checks the locations of the hotel staff STAFF LOCATER Hotel function SMDR Displays prints and removes the call charge SNR Saved number redial SAVED NUMBER REDIAL SP Monitors the auto call distribution groups SUPERVISOR SPD Speed dial SPEED DIAL SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 173 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Continued Function that can 3 Ha Description be specified SPKR Speaker SPEAKER This can be specified only if it does not exist in the fixed keys STATE Sets the status of the boss STORE Saves the caller ID in the individual speed dial buffer CID STORE SYSALM System alarm SYSTEM FAULT ALARM TCLIP Allows the phone to send the calling line ID differently for each call Temporary CLIP TG Direct trunk selection button TRUNK GROUP TIMER Timer TIMER TRARPT Processes the statistics data TRAFFIC REPORT TRSF Transfer TRANSFER This can be specified only if it does not exist in the
397. to set the DSP parameter of IP phone to SYSTEM BASE or ITP BASE ITP TX Limit Option Sets whether to restrict sending from the IP phone Viewing and Changing the Phone Versions Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 10 System IP Options from the Tree Viewer mM KR amp N SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd Select Phone Version tab View the current phone versions Change the phone versions Save the changes 193 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here ITP DSP Parameter Sets various parameters of the IP phone ITP DSP Parameter Parameter Description Frame Count Sets the number of buffering when transmitting a voice packet to the network This system performs as many as voice packet buffering set in this item and sends them as one 1 voice packet Jitter Size Sets the reference to control the Jitter buffering operation when converting a voice packet received from the network to a PCM voice signal TOS Field Sets the TOS Type Of Service field value Viewing and Changing the ITP DSP Parameter Values Select 5 Features gt 5 2 VoIP Options gt 5 2 11 ITP DSP Parameter from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current ITP DSP parameter values 3 Change the ITP DSP parameter values 4 Save the changes SIP Stack Ext Trunk Options Sets SIP Stack Ext Trunk Options Viewing and Changing the SIP Stack Ext Trunk Options V
398. tworking option settings Save the changes Remote Station Dial Translation Assigns the digit translation table used per remote stations for networking And the maximum value of the remote station is 2000 and it can be assigned in 2 8 0 Number Plan R STN option Viewing and Changing the Remote Station Dial Translation Settings 1 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 3 Networking gt 3 3 5 Remote Station Dial Translation from the Tree Viewer View the Remote Station Dial Translation settings Change the Remote Station Dial Translation settings Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Group amp Table Grouping Station Groups Sets the station groups Items to be Specified Item Description Group Type Sets the type of the station group Ring Mode Sets the ring distribution method Next Port Sets the station group to be received in the next time Ringback Tone Used when performing the coloring service for a station group Message Enter the VMS message number to use for the coloring In case of the F STN it operates according to the station coloring message of the received group member 0 to 9998 F STN None Group Name Sets the name of the station group Transfer Time Sets the group transfer time Overflow Time Sets the ringing time for the next group Hunt Time In Sequential or Distribute Receiving mode if the member tha
399. umber by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new modes are created Pressing ENTER at this field opens a Pointer Mode Target Generator from which an existing mode name may be selected or a new name may be entered Entering a new name creates a new Mode with its corresponding Number The mode number and name are associated with the block s pointers not the block itself This allows one block to route calls to different destinations in different modes using different Targets for the pointers various mode references Template Blocks To simplify creating multiple blocks of a given type OfficeServ System provides a template for each type of block Templates have default values preset for many of their parameters You may change these defaults and save the modified Template or by using the Save As option create a new block of that type while preserving the original template Each time a block is created it will be initialized with the parameter values which are set in the template This is particularly useful when building mailbox and extension blocks for subscribers where many of the parameter settings will be uniform from subscriber to subscriber 324 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Configuration Blocks Bye Block The BYE Block is very simple Its purpose is to say good bye to the caller disconnect the call and free the port The only parameter is the prompt t
400. umber of public callers that accessed a particular type of Message Activity The second column is the percentage of public callers out of the total number of callers including subscribers which accessed a particular type of Message Activity Subscriber The first column is the total number of subscriber callers that accessed a particular type of Message Activity The second column is the percentage of subscriber callers out of the total number of callers including public callers which accessed a particular type of Message Activity Totals The total number of all callers that accessed a particular type of Message Activity SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 311 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here By Call Code System File Options Util Tab Help ra by amp B H e PortBase Card Base Page Search 8 9 4 By Call Code Functional Refresh Timer sec 15 2 Configuration a 3 Call Routing Reporting 4 Group amp Table Created FEES Calls Total Count Port Utilization by Call Code 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 9 1 By Application 8 9 2 To Subscriber
401. unk SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd without passing via a station the DTMF signal is detected which enters from that trunk At this time this option sets whether to assign the DTMF Receiver 181 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 182 Item Continued Description Real Ringback Tone When calling with a VOIP trunk this option sets whether to have a virtual tone heard or have a ring back tone received from the opposite party heard RE Route Time sec When sending a VOIP trunk call if there is no answer from the opposite party within this time it is processed as fail In case of the LCR this option specifies the time to call the next group Gateway Allow In case that this option is set to ENABLE when receiving a H 323 call if the calling side IP address is not registered in 5 2 5 VoIP Routing IP Address the call is not received UDP Trunk Port Sets the UDP port number when the opposite party of the trunk is also a trunk UDP Phone Port Sets the UDP port number when the opposite party of the phone is also a phone T1 Time 100 ms When using an unreliable transmission protocol such as UDP if there is no answer after transmitting a call it is retransmitted The T1 Time is the first retransmission interval defined in the RFC2543 T2 Time 100 ms Maximum retransmission interval defined in the RFC2542 Genera
402. unk for which the Trunk Auto Answer MOH of the 5 14 4 Incoming CID DISA Options is set to On and the Auto Answer item is also set to On for a DID MSN trunk if the DID Destination is set to A the trunk is answered automatically after the time set in this option has elapsed The sound source set in the Answer MOH option is then connected Auto Answer If a call is received by a trunk with this item is set to On if following the DID receiving table when received the DID Destination must be set to A the sound source specified in the Answer MOH item is heard by answering automatically after the time set in the Trunk Answer Time has elapsed At this point the call is received in the location designated in 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing If there is no answer before the Trunk Auto MOH Disconnect Time set in 5 14 2 Confirm Disconnect No Action Timer elapses the call is disconnected automatically This option is only applied when the Trunk Auto Answer MOH item in the 5 14 4 Incoming CID DISA Option is set to On Answer MOH Sets the phone number of the sound source to be heard when performing Auto Answer MFR Delay Time Sets the standby time for assigning the MFR 0 to 25 sec Requirements When a station is talking pressing enables another call to be tried while pressing disconnects the DISA call 128 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Viewing and Changing the Trunk DIS
403. use most of the configuration for any customer will usually be in the Block Tables these are dealt in detail with separately in the next section D amp G a al PortBase CardBase Page Search 4 K Functional 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List 8 5 System Parameters 8 6 Voice Studio 8 7 Operating Utilities 8 8 Override Mode 8 9 View System Report 8 10 Site Information 8 11 Status Screen 9 Conference Message mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 0 Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 4 54 05 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Save Application If changes are made to the customer database they are live and immediate however they are not immediately saved to disk The save to disk will only take place if The administrator reboots the system after gracefully exiting using Operating Utilities and Shutdown System e Or the nightly maintenance runs This happens each night at 3 A M e Or the administrator selects Save Application from the System Main Menu The save application option forces the changes to be written to the database immediately This will ensure that if the system looses power between the time that the changes are made and the nightly maintenance the changes will
404. utting down taba gina 0 SmtpClient stopped 0 Maintainance shutting down 8 7 3 Activity Log Down 2 Configuration 5 VM hanging up 3 Call Routing 6 VM hanging up 4 Group amp Table 3 VM hanging up 5 Features 1 VM hanging up 6 System Control 2 VM hanging uy oa y vM oe 2 8 1 Open Block Table ii gmg P 8 2 Save Application 0 Console shutting down 8 3 Schedule Table 0 Status Process Shutting down 8 4 Subscriber List 0 IPC process shutting down 8 5 System Parameters 0 IPC process is down Karea hors 0 Web Process Shutting down 4 4 2 z kd lel a u Message LAN mp20s 165 213 89 64 10 09 06 T Office Serv MP20S AS 2010 11 14 PM 5 36 28 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Shutdown VM Shutdown System does exactly what you would expect It will deactivate OfficeServ System and shut down the application The OfficeServ System will not answer the telephone until restarted This is the preferred and recommended method of shutting down the OfficeServ System also referred to as a Proper Shutdown ee oe Tab Help allal lole D e e a a PortBase Card Base Page Search 8 7 3 ActivityLog _8 7 4 ShutDownVM Functional Input Password Password 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 0pen Block Table 8 2 Save Application
405. v DM User Guide Import Basic Concepts The Configuration Concept for the OfficeServ System is a series of Blocks Pointers and Objects configured together to create a Call Routing Solution for specific Member s of the TeleCommunity TeleCommunity Anybody and or anything that needs to communicate with the organization Communicate The need to deliver and or receive information Call Routing Solution The process in which the OfficeServ System products connects the caller to the Person and or Device most suitable for communicating with the caller z TeleCommunity Call Routing Solution Service Providers Call Processors eee eee information Containers Menu Block ae Librarian Document Librarian OfficeServ g 7030 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 319 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 320 Blocks Blocks are the components used to build your individual customer application All call flow is programmed using these blocks Each block type has a specific function and can be chained together with other blocks to provide a complete call processing solution Bye Block Speaks a prompt usually Good bye then terminates the call session Dial Block This block is typically used for dial devices such as fax machines and modems or paging systems Any device where the power of having the functionality of a subscriber
406. ve the changes PRI Card Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number PRI Trunk Data Trunk Data and Trunk On Off of the PRI boards Use the Prev and Next buttons to move to any item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the PRI Card Configuration 1 Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 10 PRI Card from the Tree Viewer Select the Cabinet Slot View the PRI card information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item Change the PRI card information Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 81 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 82 T1 Card Displays the information for the Port Port Common Data CLI Send Number T1 Trunk Data Trunk Data Trunk On Off Trunk Timer and Digits Translation of the T1 boards Use the Prev and Next buttons to move to any item For more information for each item refer to its description elsewhere in this manual Viewing and Changing the T1 Card Configuration Select 2 Configuration gt 2 2 Cabinet Configuration gt 2 2 11 T1 Card from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the Cabinet Slot 3 View the T1 card information Use the Next or Prev button to move to an item 4 Change the T1 card information 6 Save the changes OAS Card Provides configuration of the
407. ver a pointer in Default mode 400 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Activity This page shows the activity for this mailbox from the time the statistics were last set in Main Menu Operating Utilities Clear report count to the present time Menu Block TEMPLATE MNU General Menu Input Processor Activity Activity From To Abandoned Admin count Total count Item Description From To Activity period Abandoned Callers who hung up while in this menu Admin count The number of times an administrator accessed the system from this menu Total count The total number of times that callers accessed this menu SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 401 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Mode Block A Mode block exists for each operating mode An operating mode is defined by a combination of port s and time It can be as simple as Day or Night mode or more complex e g a special mode that is in effect for port 2 and 3 between 9 23 AM and 7 41 PM on Mondays and Wednesdays The MODE Block is the entry point into the call routing solution for a particular operating mode and can contain the opening voice prompts which the OfficeServ System will speak when answering a call The main purpose of the MODE Block is to provide the OfficeServ System with an entry point into the call session and
408. w Event Call Director Action Type Target Name NO ENTRY ESCAPE DISK FULL NEXT SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 415 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Item Description Operating Indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Mode Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given a unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows one Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes Pointers set in the Default Mode stay in effect unless overridden by the same Pointer set in the current Operating Mode OfficeServ System will display Default Mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default Mode pointers will be Blued grayed on a Black and white monitor out to denote that they were not set in the current mode but will operate as indicated NO ENTRY The next Block to go to if no response was recorded or if not confirmed and Digit to confirm response is set ESCAPE The next Block to go to if the caller presses the Escape Digit DISK FULL The next Block to go to if a system error occurs The most common error condition is that the message storage disk is full NEXT The next
409. w Alarm Rec The frame transmission error that occurred in the TEPRI board is cleared MJDO7 Blue Alarm A TEPRI board facility error has occurred Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD08 Blue Alarm Rec The TEPRI board facility error is cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJDO9 Bit Error Alarm The bit error rate of the E1 PRI or BRI board is excessive Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Cx Syy MJD11 SPID Init Error The BRI board has received an error message from the network Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD12 SPID Init Rec The BRI board has received a message from the network that the error was cleared Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD13 LPBK Error A loopback test by an internal command has failed Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD14 LPBK Recovery SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd A loopback test by an internal command has succeeded Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz 221 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 222 Alarm Name Continued Definition MJD15 BRI DL Unavail The data link of the BRI is invalid Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD16 BRI DL Recovery The data link of the BRI is now valid Alarm Data Cabinet Slot Channel Cx Syy czz MJD18 T1 Restart The E1 board has restarted Alarm Data Cabinet Slo
410. when connecting to an Easyset server VDC SMDR Status Specifies whether to send the SMDR output information to the CTI link VDC UCD Status Specifies whether to send the UCD output information to the CTI link Easyset Alive Time sec Sets the time interval at which the link operation is checked or not checked during Easyset interoperation CTI Alive Time 10 sec Sets the period of time for checking the CTI link If an ALIVE message is not received from the CLI in this period of time the CLI link is processed as disconnected MGI Alive Time sec Sets the time interval at which the MGI link is checked IPC Data Card Specifies whether to perform the IPC operation with the Data card when it is installed in the system Data Server IP Address Sets the IP address of the data server of the system Feature Server IP Sets the IP address of the IP UMS server Address SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Parameter Description NMS Trap IP Address Sets the IP address of the NMS trap Link IP Address Sets the IP address of the link IP News IP Address Sets the IP address of the news server E Mail IP Address Sets the IP address of the email server MMS IP Address Sets the IP address of the MMS server MMS Web IP Address Sets the IP address of the MMS web server IMPS IP Address Sets the IP address of the IMPS server QOS IP Address Sets the IP address of
411. when it is received from a leased line or DID trunk or when providing the TANDEM trunk trunk trunk leased line leased line network trunk service 105 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 106 ENM Translate Receiving Type Receiving Type Description Follow Incoming Digit When receiving a call it is received by the station group with the same number as the received number Follow DID Translation The call is received based on the 3 2 3 DID Ringing settings Follow Trunk Ring The call is received based on the 3 2 1 Trunk Ringing settings In this event set in the Receive Digit field the number of received digits at which the receiving service is to be performed Requirements For the R2MFC trunk only the Follow Incoming Digit and Follow DID Translation receiving types are supported Viewing and Changing the Digits Translation Settings i Select 2 Configuration gt 2 6 Trunk Port gt 2 6 4 Digits Translation from the Tree Viewer View the settings related to the use of a leased line or DID trunk Change the settings related to the use of a leased line or DID trunk Save the changes SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Loop Trunk Data Sets whether to provide caller ID for an analog trunk whether to use Tone Check and the Connect Delay time parameter value Items to be Specified Item Description
412. whether there is a modem installed in the system Virtual Cabinet Max Displays the maximum virtual cabinet value of the system S W Version Displays the versions of the software programs System MP SP VMS MGI BRI WEB Linux and MPS installed in the system LP Connect Displays if LP 1 2 3 is Connected Free Speed Block Displays the number of available speed dial blocks Free CID Block Displays the number of available CID blocks Free Log Block Displays the number of available LOG blocks Free TMSG Station Displays the number of available urgent text messages Free GCONF Station Displays the number of available conference groups SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 65 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here Viewing the System Information Items Select 2 Configuration gt 2 1 System Configuration gt 2 1 1 System Information from the Tree Viewer 2 Check the current system information LAN Parameter Specifies the LAN parameter values After changing a LAN parameter value the system must be restarted LAN Parameter Items Item Description IP Version Specifies whether to use IPv4 or IPv6 as the system IP version IP Address Sets the IP address of the system Gateway Sets the gateway address of the system Subnet Mask Sets the subnet mask for the system MAC Address System hardware address This address can
413. which the hold sound is heard between the second message and second message Auto logout When disconnecting a ring and ringing the next member because a member of the auto call distribution group does not answer this option sets whether to log out the first member All Out to Final When all members of the auto call distribution group are logged out this option sets whether to forward the call to the final destination SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Continued Control Information Description Group Busy Next When all agents are busy this option sets whether to call the next port without waiting for the overflow time MOH BGM Sets the hold sound source to be heard between the second message and second message NONE TONE 371 to 376 Agent ID When an agent enters the auto call distribution group this option sets whether to press the auto call distribution agent code Viewing and Changing the Auto Call Distribution Control Information Select 4 Group amp Table gt 4 6 UCD gt 4 6 1 UCD Group Options from the Tree Viewer 2 View the current call distribution control information J Change the call distribution control information 4 Save the changes UCD PIN Number Enter the auto call distribution agent code The auto call distribution agent code you enter must belong to only one auto call distribution group You can enter up to four 4
414. witch Gain Connection Types Connection Type Description Tx Rx DGP DGP Digital Phone Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT Digital Phone Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK Digital Phone Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK Digital Phone Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP Digital Phone Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP Digital Phone Tx gt VolP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi Digital Phone Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN Digital Phone Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT Digital Phone Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS Digital Phone Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP Digital Phone Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control SLT DGP Normal Phone Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT Normal Phone Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK Normal Phone Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK Normal Phone Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP Normal Phone Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP Normal Phone Tx gt VolP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi Normal Phone Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN Normal Phone Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT Normal Phone Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control 202 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Connection Type Continued
415. with extension txt SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide 3 Select Subscriber Objects Select subscriber objects for easy importation of a large number of subscribers In the selection field enter either e for Extensions e for Mailboxes e for Both EXT amp MBX Create a text file or use any existing text file to import subscribers The file can be named user txt and include separate columns for the user name extension and or mailbox Only the subscriber list may be in the file The user txt file can look like e Sandy Parks 217 217 e Dusty Roads 222 202 e Sonny Skies 227 007 e Jane Doe 201 e John Doe 202 4 Review Import List Scroll through and review the subscriber list The list may not be edited at this point Accept it as is by pressing OK or reject the list by pressing the Cancel button All editing that may need to be done on the subscriber list must be done in the text file that the list was created in SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 303 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 304 Backup and Restore This facility allows backup and restoring the configuration user mailboxes customized prompts This does not support to backup and restore the recorded messages in users mailboxes You have to use ftp client program to do it The port number is 60021 m ia
416. x Special Mode for Port 2 Only on July 19th between 7 and 8 p m New modes may be added as needed The times that operating modes are effective are defined in the Schedule Table The behavior of the OfficeServ System when it answers a new call during each specific operating mode is defined in the Mode Block OfficeServ System can be made to change modes either manually by using Special Administrative commands or automatically as specified in the Schedule Table SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 323 Error Use the Home tab to apply 5 1 to the text that you want to appear here Mode Specific Event Pointers When configuration any block that defines event targets exit points from the block the OfficeServ System will first ask you to select a mode This allows the exit destinations to be different for each mode For example the next pointer might access an announcement informing callers of special daytime sales events during the Day Mode but after 5 00 p m it would pass control to a different announcement about evening shopping hours during Night Mode Pointers set in the Default mode are always in effect unless the same pointer is set in another Operating Mode The OfficeServ System will display Default mode pointers in a block while viewing pointers in another mode The Default mode pointers will be grayed out to denote that they are not in the current mode Each Operating Mode is given an unique n
417. y Control ATRK SOFT Phone Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK SOFT Phone Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP SOFT Phone Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP SOFT Phone Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi SOFT Phone Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN SOFT Phone Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT SOFT Phone Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS SOFT Phone Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP SOFT Phone Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control UMS DGP UMS Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT UMS Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK UMS Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK UMS Tx gt Digital Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control ITP UMS Tx gt ITP Rx Sensitivity Control VOIP UMS Tx gt VoIP Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control SVMi UMS Tx gt SVMi Rx Sensitivity Control WLAN UMS Tx gt WLAN Rx Sensitivity Control SOFT UMS Tx gt SOFT Phone Rx Sensitivity Control UMS UMS Tx gt IP UMS Rx Sensitivity Control SIP UMS Tx gt SIP Station Rx Sensitivity Control SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 205 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here SIP Conference Gain Continued DGP SIP Station Tx gt Digital Phone Rx Sensitivity Control SLT SIP Station Tx gt Normal Phone Rx Sensitivity Control ATRK SIP Station Tx gt Analog Trunk Rx Sensitivity Control DTRK SIP Station Tx
418. y re record any prompt in the system but if you re record system prompts prompts below 1000 the original prompt will be lost Language This is a language option You may select from any installed language and from that point on the Voice studio will interact with that language Length sec The length of the recording in seconds This parameter is automatically filled in by the OfficeServ System when the Prompt is recorded Recorded The date the recording was made or last updated Description Space is provided for entering the text of the Prompt to be recorded Use this space to provide information on the intended usage of the recording The entered text has no effect on the actual recording However it is recommended that the recording be the same as the text to make later editing or re recording easier SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 297 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here l Operating Utilities 298 This page is used for accessing various display logs and System Administrator facilities The utilities and parameters contained within the Operating Utilities are as follows Display User Log This log provides information on all user accesses to the system Information displayed includes Subscriber Logon Port Used Service Accessed Message Center Activities Greetings Recorded and all other User Activities During system maintenance this log wi
419. y signal usually indicating an invalid number was dialed or the destination returned fast busy in a DND condition and what percentage of the total calls this number represents Error Count This shows the number of calls processed by this Block which encountered a signal or condition which OfficeServ System could not recognize or were terminated due to a processing error and what percentage of the total calls this number represents 328 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Call Director Dial Block TEMPLATE DAL General Information Call Director Operating Mode 00 Default v Event ANSWER Call Director Action Type Gp Target Name NO ANSR BUSY FBUSY ERROR Item Description Operating This indicates the Mode Name and Number for which the displayed Mode Block Pointers Targets are active Each Operating Mode is given a unique Number by the system Valid numbers are 01 99 and are assigned in sequence as new Modes are created Pressing ENTER at this field opens a Mode Target Generator from which an existing Mode Name may be selected or a new name may be entered Entering a new name creates a new Mode with its corresponding Number The Mode Number and Name are associated with the Block s Pointers not the Block itself This allows one Block to route calls to different destinations in different Modes u
420. you want to appear here Call Director EClass Block TEMPLATE ECL General Prompts Hold Controls OutCall Call Director Operating Mode 00 Default v Event Call Director _Action Type Target Name MESSAGE OPTIONS Goto OPERATOR Goto ESCAPE Goto NO ENTRY Tran INVALID Goto QUE FULL Goto USER EXIT DIRECTORY u m m Item Description Operating Mode This is used to select an operating mode for configuration the mode specific pointers Examples of operating modes are Day Night or Holiday This field does not set the operating mode for the system that is done in the schedule table This selection allows you to program different destinations called event pointers for each mode If you select Default it means all the time unless another mode is entered to override the default setting If you want the same setting to be in effect all the time simply program the default mode and leave the settings for all other modes blank MESSAGE This causes the OfficeServ System to go directly to the designated Block if the caller chooses to leave a message This is usually an MCLASS Block which routes the caller to a mailbox with the same number as the Extension Block However it may be a DIAL Block or Extension Block if messages are to be taken by a secretary or separate voice mail system OfficeServ System will ignore this
421. ype Type Gp EXT 1 MBX Item Description Label Name This is the name of the block A block name can be any alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters including spaces A block name may not be the same as another block name SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 331 Error Use the Home tab to apply 1 to the text that you want to appear here 332 Continued Item Description Maximum This is the maximum number of digits the caller may enter to entry digits search for a target that a caller is trying to locate This is usually set to three because most people s names do not have the same first three letters This number can be between 1 and 10 Wait for first This is the amount of time in seconds that the system waits for the digit caller to enter the first digit Wait for This is the amount of time in seconds that the system waits for the subsequent caller to enter the digits following his first entry digit digits Repeat This is the number of times that the system repeats prompts if the prompts if no entry caller does not enter any digits Retries if no This is the maximum number of names that a caller may enter if match no match is found on the digits that the caller entered If this occurs it is considered an INVALID entry Maximum This is the number of names played to a caller if more than one number of name matches the entry The number can be between 1
422. zation A listing of the days of the week and the percentage of calls handled by each day represented by the bar chart SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd 315 Error Use the Home tab to apply 4 1 to the text that you want to appear here Site Information This page allows the System Administrator access to helpful information about the site in which the OfficeServ System is installed This information becomes very useful long after the system installation has been completed These are only memo pages but it is recommended that these screens be filled out for all sites Having a record of all port connections helps make trouble shooting easier if it becomes necessary Status Screen The is the normal operating page for the OfficeServ System The Status Screen is a display only facility and shows information in real time relating to the current status of the OfficeServ System The following information is displayed OfficeServ Device Manager eco System File Options Util Tab Help la a ols b amp a a PortBase Card Base Page Search 8 11 Status Screen Functional Port Mode Active Block Status 2 Configuration 3 Call Routing 4 Group amp Table 5 Features 6 System Control 8 VMAA 8 1 Open Block Table 8 2 Save Application 8 3 Schedule Table 8 4 Subscriber List Reporting 08 07 06 09 11 10 10 51PM Call To Date Average Calls per Week Directo
423. zes the external phone number dialed by the user and then connects the call to the lowest cost trunk group automatically You can enter up to 2000 numbers in the optimal route selection function Each of them can have up to 10 digits Items to be Specified Item Description LCR Digit Enter the digits for the optimal route selection Length Enter the number of digits entered Router Table Enter the number of the routing table to be referred to 1 to 99 Viewing and Changing the Optimal Route Selection Digits Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 2 Routing Digits from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the gateway for which you want to view the optimal route selection digits 3 View the settings for the optimal route selection digits 4 Change the settings for the optimal route selection digits 5 Save the changes 122 SAMSUNG Electronics Co Ltd OfficeServ DM User Guide Time Table Enter the time table to be referred to based on the day and time of the optimal route selection function that analyzes the external phone number dialed by the user and then connects the call to the lowest cost trunk group automatically Viewing and Changing the Optimal Route Selection Time Table 1 Select 3 Call Routing gt 3 1 Outgoing gt 3 1 3 Time Table from the Tree Viewer 2 Select the gateway for which you want to view the optimal route selection time table J View the settings for t

OfficeServ DM User Guide - Nycomm Holding Page

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents